F
I
O
A
W
T
N
E
D
R
U
H
A
C
N
D
A
B
O
T
O
K
O
WHY CHOOSING
GENUINE PARTS
We really know your vehicle because we invented,
designed and built it: we really know every single detail. At Fiat Professional Service authorised workshops
you can find technicians directly trained by us, offering quality and professionalism for all service operations.
Fiat Professional workshops are always close to you for the regular servicing operations, season checks and practical
recommendations by our experts.
With Fiat Professional Genuine Parts you keep the reliability, comfort and performance features of your
new vehicle unchanged in time: that's why you bought it for.
Always ask for Genuine Parts for the components used on our vehicles; we recommend them because they come from
our steady commitment in research and development of highly innovative technologies.
For all these reasons: rely on Genuine Parts,
because they are the only ones designed by Fiat Professional for your vehicle.
SAFETY: BRAKING
SYSTEM
ENVIRONMENT: PARTICULATE FILTERS,
CLIMATE CONTROL SYSTEM MAINTENANCE
COMFORT:
SUSPENSION AND WINDSCREEN WIPERS
PERFORMANCE:
SPARK PLUGS, INJECTORS AND
BATTERIES
LINEACCESSORI:
ROOF RACK BARS, WHEEL RIMS
CHOOSING GENUINE PARTS
IS THE MOST NATURAL CHOICE
PERFORMANCE
G E N U I N E
P A R T S
COMFORT
G E N U I N E
P A R T S
SAFETY
G E N U I N E
P A R T S
AMBIENT
G E N U I N E
P A R T S
ACCESSORIES
G E N U I N E
P A R T S
VALUES
G E N U I N E
P A R T S
HOW TO RECOGNISE
GENUINE PARTS
All Genuine Parts undergo strict controls, both during design and manufacturing stages,
by specialists using vanguard materials,
to test the component reliability.
This to guarantee performance and safety for you and your passengers on board,
for a long time.
Always ask for and make sure a Genuine Part has been used.
Dear Customer.
Thank you for choosing Fiat and congratulations on your choice of a Fiat Ducato.
We have written this handbook to help you get to know all the features of your vehicle and use it in the best
possible way.
You are recommended to read it right through before taking to the road for the first time. You will find information,
tips and important warnings regarding the use of your vehicle to help you get the most from the technological
features of your Fiat Ducato.
Read the warnings and indications, marked with the following symbols:
personal safety;
vehicle integrity;
environmental protection.
The enclosed Warranty Booklet lists the services that Fiat offers to its Customers:
❒ the Warranty Certificate with terms and conditions for maintaining its validity;
❒ the range of additional services available to Fiat Customers.
Enjoy reading and happy motoring!
This Owner Handbook describes all the versions of the Fiat Ducato.
As a consequence, you should only consider the information which is related to the engine
and bodywork version of the vehicle you have purchased.
VERY IMPORTANT
REFUELLING
K
Only refuel with automotive diesel conforming
to the European specification EN590.
The use of other products or mixtures may
damage the engine beyond repair and
consequently invalidate the warranty depending
on the damage caused.
STARTING THE ENGINE
Make sure that the handbrake is engaged, set the
gear lever to neutral, fully depress the clutch
pedal without pressing the accelerator, then turn
the ignition key to MAR-ON and wait for the
warning lights Y and m to go off; turn the
ignition key to AVV and release it as soon as the
engine has started.
PARKING ON FLAMMABLE MATERIAL
The catalytic converter develops high
temperatures during operation. Do not park on
grass, dry leaves, pine needles or other
flammable material: fire hazard.
RESPECTING THE ENVIRONMENT
The vehicle is fitted with a system that allows
continuous diagnosis of the emission-related
components in order to help protect the
environment.
ELECTRICAL ACCESSORIES
쇵
If, after buying the vehicle, you decide to add
electrical accessories (with the risk of gradually
draining the battery), visit a Fiat Dealership. They
can calculate the overall electrical requirement
and check that the vehicle’s electrical system can
support the required load.
CODE card
Keep it in a safe place, not in the vehicle.
Make sure you have the electronic code written
on the CODE card with you at all times.
SCHEDULED SERVICING
Correct vehicle servicing is essential for ensuring
it stays in tip-top condition and safeguards its
safety features, its environmental friendliness and
low running costs for a long time to come.
THE OWNER’S HANDBOOK CONTAINS…
...important information, advice and warnings
for correct use, driving safety and maintenance
of your vehicle over time. Pay special attention
to the symbols " (personal safety)
# (environmental protection) ! (vehicle
integrity).
KNOWING YOUR CAR
KNOWING
YOUR CAR
DASHBOARD
The presence and position of the controls, instruments and gauges may vary depending on the version.
SAFETY
STARTING
AND
DRIVING
WARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGES
IN AN
EMERGENCY
MAINTENANCE
AND CARE
Fig. 1
F0N0510m
1. Fixed side air vents – 2. Adjustable side air vents – 3. Left steering column stalk: external lights
– 4. Instrument and warning light panel – 5. Right steering column stalk: windscreen wiper controls, rear window
wiper, trip computer – 6. Adjustable central air vents – 7. Car radio (for versions/markets, where provided)
– 8. Passenger side glove compartment/front air bag (for versions/markets, where provided) – 9. Oddment
compartment – 10. Cigar lighter/12 V socket – 11. HVAC controls – 12. Controls on dashboard – 13. Gear lever
– 14. Ignition device – 15. Steering wheel adjustment lever – 16. Driver side front airbag/Horn – 17. Control plate:
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
INDEX
lamp/headlamp alignment adjustment/digital display/multifunction display.
3
KNOWING
YOUR CAR
SAFETY
STARTING
AND
DRIVING
SYMBOLS
THE FIAT CODE SYSTEM
Special coloured plates have been attached near or on
some of the components of your vehicle. These plates
bear symbols that draw your attention to the
precautions required when handling the component in
question.
This is an electrical engine locking system which
increases protection against attempted theft of the
vehicle. It is automatically activated when the ignition
key is removed.
The plate summarising the symbols used can be found
under the bonnet, fig. 2.
WARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGES
OPERATION
Each time the vehicle is started by turning the ignition
key to MAR-ON, the Fiat CODE system control unit
sends a recognition code to the engine control unit to
deactivate the immobiliser.
IN AN
EMERGENCY
The acknowledgement code is sent only if the Fiat
CODE system control unit has recognised the code
transmitted from the key.
MAINTENANCE
AND CARE
Each time the ignition key is turned to STOP, the Fiat
CODE system deactivates the functions of the engine
management control unit.
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
If the code is not recognised correctly during ignition,
the Y warning light comes on on the instrument panel
together with a specific message on the display (see
“Warning lights and messages”).
INDEX
4
An electronic device, in fact, is fitted in each ignition key
grip. The device transmits a radio-frequency signal when
the engine is started through a special aerial built into
the ignition switch. The modulated signal, which changes
each time the engine is started, is the “password”, by
means of which the control unit recognises the key and
enables to start the engine.
fig. 2
F0N0002m
In this case, turn the key to STOP and then to MARON; if the lock persists, try again with the spare set of
keys. Contact a Fiat Dealership if you still cannot start
the engine.
THE KEYS
IMPORTANT Each key has its own code which must be
stored by the system electronic control unit. Contact
the Fiat Dealership to have new keys (up to eight)
stored with the code.
The vehicle is delivered with two copies of the ignition
key and with the CODE card which bears the following:
Warning light Y coming on when driving
❒ If the warning light Y turns on, this means that the
system is running a self-diagnosis (for example due to
a voltage drop).
KNOWING
YOUR CAR
CODE CARD Fig. 3
A the electronic code;
B The mechanical key code to be given to the Fiat
Dealership when ordering duplicate keys.
IMPORTANT In order to ensure complete efficiency of
the electronic devices inside the keys, they should never
be exposed to direct sunlight.
❒ If the warning light Y stays on, contact a Fiat
Dealership.
SAFETY
STARTING
AND
DRIVING
WARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGES
IN AN
EMERGENCY
MAINTENANCE
AND CARE
The electronic components inside the key
may be damaged if the key is submitted
to sharp knocks.
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
INDEX
fig. 3
F0N0003m
5
All the keys and the CODE card must be
handed over to the new owner when
selling the vehicle.
KNOWING
YOUR CAR
To extract the metal insert, press button B and to
reinsert it proceed as follows:
❒ keep button B pressed and turn the metal insert A;
❒ release button B and turn the metal insert A
completely until the proper locking click is heard to
ensure correct closure.
SAFETY
KEY WITH REMOTE CONTROL fig. 4-5
STARTING
AND
DRIVING
WARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGES
The metal insert A is retractable and it operates:
❒ the ignition switch;
WARNING
Button B should only be pressed when
the key is away from the body, in
particular from the eyes and from objects that
can be spoilt (e.g. clothes). Never leave the key
unattended to make sure it is not touched by
others, especially children, who may
inadvertently press the button.
❒ the door locks;
❒ opening and closing of the fuel cap.
IN AN
EMERGENCY
Button Q is used for unlocking the front doors.
MAINTENANCE
AND CARE
Button Á is used for locking all the doors;
Button P is used for unlocking the load compartment
doors.
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
The passenger’s compartment lights will come on for
a preset time when the doors are unlocked.
INDEX
6
fig. 4
F0N0800m
Some versions are equipped with a key with a remote
control with 2 keys Á and Ë fig. 5.
Button Á is used for locking all the doors;
Button Ë is used for unlocking all the doors.
Request for additional remote controls
The system can recognise up to 8 keys with
incorporated remote control. Should a new remote
control be necessary, contact a Fiat Dealership and be
ready to present the CODE card, a personal identity
document and the vehicle ownership documents.
Dashboard LED indications
When locking the doors, led A-fig. 6 switches on for
about 3 seconds and than starts flashing (deterrence
function).
KNOWING
YOUR CAR
SAFETY
STARTING
AND
DRIVING
When the doors are locked, if one or more doors are
not closed correctly, the LED and direction indicators
start flashing quickly.
WARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGES
IN AN
EMERGENCY
MAINTENANCE
AND CARE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
INDEX
fig. 5
F0N0801m
fig. 6
F0N0114m
7
KNOWING
YOUR CAR
SAFETY
STARTING
AND
DRIVING
Replacing the battery of the key with remote
control fig. 7
To replace the battery, proceed as follows:
❒ press button A and bring the metal insert B to the
open position;
❒ turn the screw C to Ë using a fine bit screwdriver;
❒ take out the battery case D and replace the battery
E, respecting its polarity;
❒ refit the battery case D inside the key and lock it by
turning the screw C to Á.
WARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGES
Used batteries are harmful to the
environment. They should be disposed of,
as specified by law, in the special
containers provided, otherwise take them to the
Fiat Dealership, which will deal with their
disposal.
KEY WITHOUT REMOTE CONTROL fig. 8
The metal insert of the key A is fixed.
The key operates:
❒ the ignition switch;
❒ the door locks;
❒ opening and closing of the fuel cap.
IN AN
EMERGENCY
MAINTENANCE
AND CARE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
INDEX
8
fig. 7
F0N0802m
fig. 8
F0N0337m
The main functions that can be activated with the keys (with or without remote control) are the following:
Type of key
Unlocking the
doors
Door closing
from the outside
Dead lock
activation
(*)
Unlocking of load
compartment
lock
Windows down
(*)
Windows up
(*)
Key without remote control Turn key
anticlockwise
(driver’s side)
Turn key
clockwise
(driver’s side)
–
–
–
–
Turn key
anticlockwise
(driver’s side)
Turn key
clockwise
(driver’s side)
–
–
–
–
Briefly press
button Q/Ë
Press briefly
button Á
Press
button Á
twice
Briefly press
button P
Hold down
(for more than
2 seconds)
button Q
Hold down button
Á (for longer than
2 seconds)
Direction indicators
flashing (only with key
with remote control)
blinks twice
blinks once
3 blinks
blinks twice
blinks twice
blinks once
Deterrence led
Off
Steady for
Double blinking
approximately
and then
3 seconds and then deterrent blinking
deterrent blinking
Deterrent blinking
Off
Deterrent
blinking
Key with remote control
Visual indication
(*) For versions/markets, where provided.
KNOWING
YOUR CAR
SAFETY
STARTING
AND
DRIVING
WARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGES
IN AN
EMERGENCY
MAINTENANCE
AND CARE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
IMPORTANT Window opening operation is a consequence of a door unlocking control; window closing operation is
a consequence of a door locking control.
INDEX
9
KNOWING
YOUR CAR
SAFETY
STARTING
AND
DRIVING
WARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGES
IN AN
EMERGENCY
MAINTENANCE
AND CARE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
INDEX
10
ELECTRONIC ALARM
(for versions/markets where provided)
There is a maximum number of acoustic/visual cycles.
When this is reached the system returns to normal
operation.
The alarm, in addition to all the remote control
functions described previously, is controlled by the
receiver located under the dashboard near the fuse box.
IMPORTANT The engine lock function is guaranteed by
the Fiat CODE, which is automatically activated when
the ignition key is extracted from the starter device.
ALARM TRIPPING
TURNING THE ALARM ON
The alarm intervenes in the following cases:
With the doors and bonnet closed and the ignition key
either turned to STOP or removed, point the key with
the remote control towards the vehicle and press and
release the lock button.
❒ when one of the doors or bonnet is opened
illegitimately (perimeter protection);
❒ when the ignition system is started up (ignition key
rotated to MAR-ON);
❒ when the battery cables are cut.
Depending on the market, the activation of the alarm
causes the activation of the siren and the direction
indicators (for about 26 seconds). Alarm tripping and
the number of cycles depend on the sales market.
Excluding some markets, the system produces an
acoustic warning (beep) and enables door locking.
The switching on of the alarm is preceded by an selfdiagnosis stage: if a fault is detected, the system
produces another acoustic signal.
In this case, turn the alarm off by pressing the “release
doors/release load compartment” button, check that the
doors and bonnet are properly closed and turn the
alarm back on by pressing the lock button.
If a door or the bonnet is not properly shut, it will be
excluded from the testing by the alarm system.
If the alarm produces an acoustic signal even when the
doors and bonnet are correctly closed, a fault has
occurred in the operation of the system. Contact a Fiat
Dealership.
IMPORTANT If the central door locking system is
engaged using the metal insert of the key, the alarm is
not enabled.
IMPORTANT The alarm is adapted to meet
requirements in various countries.
TURNING THE ALARM OFF
Press the door release/load compartment release
button on the key with remote control.
The following operations are performed (excluding
some markets):
❒ the direction indicators turn on shortly twice;
❒ two short beeps are produced by the warning buzzer;
❒ the doors are unlocked.
IMPORTANT If the central door locking system is
released using the metal insert of the key, the alarm is
not disabled.
KNOWING
YOUR CAR
SAFETY
STARTING
AND
DRIVING
WARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGES
IN AN
EMERGENCY
MAINTENANCE
AND CARE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
INDEX
11
BREAK IN ATTEMPT INDICATION
KNOWING
YOUR CAR
SAFETY
STARTING
AND
DRIVING
WARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGES
Any break in attempt is indicated by the turning on of
warning light Y on the instrument panel together with
the message on the multifunction display (where
provided), (see section “Warning lights and messages”).
DISABLING THE ALARM
To permanently disable the alarm (e.g. during a lengthy
period of idleness), simply lock the vehicle by turning
the metal insert of the key with remote control in the
lock.
IMPORTANT If the battery of the key with the remote
control goes flat or the system fails, the alarm can be
switched off by placing the key in the ignition switch and
turning it to MAR-ON.
IGNITION DEVICE
The key can be turned to 3 different positions fig. 9:
❒ STOP: engine off, key can be extracted, steering
locked. Some electrical devices (e.g. sound system,
central door locking system, etc.) can operate;
❒ MAR-ON: driving position. All electrical devices are
enabled;
❒ AVV: engine starting (unstable position).
The ignition switch is fitted with an electronic safety
system that requires the ignition key to be turned back
to STOP if the engine will not start, before the starting
operation can be repeated.
IN AN
EMERGENCY
MAINTENANCE
AND CARE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
INDEX
12
fig. 9
F0N0007m
WARNING
If the ignition device is tampered with
(e.g.: attempted theft), have it checked
over by a Fiat Dealership as soon as possible.
WARNING
Never extract the key while the vehicle
is moving. The steering wheel would
automatically lock as soon as you try to turn it.
This is always the case, even when the vehicle is
being towed.
KNOWING
YOUR CAR
SAFETY
WARNING
Always remove the key from the vehicle
when leaving it in order to prevent
accidental engagement of the control.
Remember to engage the handbrake. Engage
first gear if the vehicle is parked uphill or
reverse gear if the vehicle is parked downhill.
Never leave children unattended in the vehicle.
STEERING LOCK
Engagement
When the key is at STOP, remove the key and turn the
steering wheel until it locks.
Disengagement
Move the steering wheel slightly as you turn the ignition
key to MAR-ON.
WARNING
It is absolutely forbidden to carry out
any after-sales operation involving
steering system or steering column
modifications (e.g. installing an anti-theft
device) that could badly affect performance and
safety, invalidate the warranty and also result in
the vehicle failing to comply with regulations.
STARTING
AND
DRIVING
WARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGES
IN AN
EMERGENCY
MAINTENANCE
AND CARE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
INDEX
13
KNOWING
YOUR CAR
INSTRUMENT PANEL
A Speedometer (speed indicator)
B Multifunction display
C Rev counter
SAFETY
D Engine coolant temperature
gauge with overheating warning
light
STARTING
AND
DRIVING
E Fuel level gauge with reserve
warning light
WARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGES
F0N0518m
fig. 10
IN AN
EMERGENCY
MAINTENANCE
AND CARE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
INDEX
14
INSTRUMENTS
REV COUNTER fig. 12
The instrument background colour and type may vary
according to the versions.
SPEEDOMETER fig. 11
It shows the vehicle speed.
The rev counter shows the engine rpm.
IMPORTANT The electronic injection control system
gradually shuts off the flow of fuel when the engine is
“over-revving” resulting in a gradual loss of engine
power.
When the engine is idling, the rev counter may indicate
a gradual or sudden increase of the speed.
This behaviour is standard as it takes place during the
activation of the climate control system or the fan.
It should not be considered as a fault. In such cases,
a slight increase in engine idle speed helps to safeguard
the battery charge level.
KNOWING
YOUR CAR
SAFETY
STARTING
AND
DRIVING
WARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGES
IN AN
EMERGENCY
MAINTENANCE
AND CARE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
INDEX
fig. 11
F0N0332m
fig. 12
F0N0013m
15
FUEL GAUGE fig. 13
KNOWING
YOUR CAR
SAFETY
STARTING
AND
DRIVING
WARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGES
IN AN
EMERGENCY
The needle shows the amount of fuel left in the fuel
tank.
E vacuum tank;
F tank full (see “Refuelling”).
The warning light A coming on indicates that there are
about 10-12 litres of fuel (for versions with tank capacity
90-120 l) or 10 l (for versions with tank capacity 60 l)
remaining in the tank. Do not travel with the fuel tank
almost empty: any gaps in fuel delivery could damage the
catalytic converter.
IMPORTANT The needle will point to E and warning
light A will flash to indicate a fault in the system.
Contact a Fiat Dealership to have the system checked.
ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE
GAUGE fig. 14
This shows the temperature of the engine coolant fluid
and starts working when the fluid temperature exceeds
approx. 50 °C.
In normal usage, the needle should hover around the
middle of the scale.
C Low engine coolant temperature.
H High engine coolant temperature.
Warning light B may light up (and a message on the
multifunction display may appear on certain versions) to
indicate that the coolant fluid temperature is too high; in
this case, stop the engine and contact a Fiat Dealership.
IMPORTANT It is not advisable to start the additional
heater (Webasto) when fuel is on reserve.
MAINTENANCE
AND CARE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
INDEX
16
fig. 13
F0N0014m
fig. 14
F0N0015m
If the needle reaches the red area, stop
the engine immediately and contact
a Fiat Dealership.
ENGINE OIL LEVEL GAUGE
(for versions/markets where provided)
The gauge provides a graphic indication of the level of
oil in the engine.
F0N1021g
When the ignition key is turned to MAR-ON the display
shows the oil level on the first row by turning five
symbols on/off.
The symbols are gradually turned off as the oil level
drops.
Four or five symbols light up to indicate a sufficient level
of oil in the sump. If the fifth symbol is not lit, this does
not indicate a fault or that insufficient oil is present in
the sump.
If the oil level is lower than the minimum required value,
the display shows a dedicated message indicating
minimum engine oil level and the need for a top-up.
IMPORTANT To find out the correct oil quantity,
always check using the dipstick (see paragraph
“Checking levels” in the section “Maintenance and
care”).
After a few seconds, the symbol display indicating the
amount of engine oil disappears and:
❒ when the next scheduled servicing is near, the time
to the next service is displayed and the warning light
õ lights up on the instrument panel. When the
service date is reached, the display shows
a dedicated message;
❒ then, if it is nearly time to change the engine oil, the
time to the next oil change is shown on the top row
of the display. When the service interval has expired
a dedicated warning will be shown on the display.
KNOWING
YOUR CAR
SAFETY
STARTING
AND
DRIVING
WARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGES
IN AN
EMERGENCY
MAINTENANCE
AND CARE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
INDEX
17
KNOWING
YOUR CAR
MULTIFUNCTION DISPLAY
NOTE When opening one of the front doors, the
display will turn on and show for a few seconds the
clock and the kilometres or miles covered.
(for versions/markets where provided)
The multifunction display is able to display information
that is useful and necessary during when driving.
SAFETY
STARTING
AND
DRIVING
WARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGES
STANDARD SCREEN fig. 15
The standard screen shows the following information:
A Date;
B Odometer (display of covered km or miles);
C Time;
D Outside temperature;
E Headlamp alignment position (only with dipped
headlamps on).
IN AN
EMERGENCY
CONTROL BUTTONS fig. 16
▲ To scroll the displayed menu and the related options
upwards or to increase the value displayed.
MODE Press briefly to enter the menu and/or go to
the next screen or to confirm the required
menu option.
Hold pressed to go back to the standard
screen.
▼ To scroll the displayed menu and the related options
downwards or to decrease the value displayed.
NOTE Buttons ▲ and ▼ activate different functions
according to the following situations:
MAINTENANCE
AND CARE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
INDEX
18
fig. 15
F0N0519m
fig. 16
F0N0017m
Light adjustment inside vehicle
– with the side lights on and standard screen active, it is
possible to adjust the brightness inside the vehicle.
Setup menu
– within the menu, they allow you to scroll up and
down through the options;
– during settings operations, they increase or decrease
values.
SETUP MENU fig. 17
The menu comprises a series of functions arranged in
a cycle which can be selected through buttons ▲ and ▼
to access the different select operations and settings
(setup) given in the following paragraphs. A submenu is
provided for some items (Setting the clock and Set
units).
The setup menu can be activated by pressing the MODE
button briefly.
Single presses on buttons ▲ or ▼ will scroll through
the setup menu options.
Operating modes are different according to the
characteristics of the option selected.
Selecting an option from the main menu without a submenu
– Briefly press button MODE to select the main menu
option that needs to be changed.
– Press buttons ▲ or ▼ (with single presses) to select
the new setting.
– Briefly press button MODE to store the new setting
and at the same time go back to the previously selected
menu option.
KNOWING
YOUR CAR
SAFETY
STARTING
AND
DRIVING
WARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGES
IN AN
EMERGENCY
MAINTENANCE
AND CARE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
INDEX
19
KNOWING
YOUR CAR
SAFETY
STARTING
AND
DRIVING
Selecting an option from the main menu with
a submenu:
– a short press on the button will display the first
submenu option;
– to return to the main menu if you are at another point
of the menu (e.g.: at submenu option setting level, at
submenu level or at main menu option setting level);
– briefly press the MODE button to select the displayed
submenu option and to open the relevant set-up menu;
– to save only the changes stored by the user (and
confirmed by pressing button MODE).
– press buttons ▲ or ▼ (with single presses) to select
the new setting for this submenu option;
The environment of the Set Up menu is timed; when
the menu is exited due to expiry of the time allowed,
only the changes already stored by the user (confirmed
beforehand by a brief press of the button) will be saved.
– briefly press button MODE to store the new setting
and at the same time go back to the previously selected
menu option.
IN AN
EMERGENCY
– briefly press button MODE to select the first value to
be changed (e.g. hours/minutes or year/month/day);
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
INDEX
20
– to return to the set up menu if you are in the main
menu;
– press buttons ▲ or ▼ (with single presses) to scroll
through all the submenu options;
WARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGES
MAINTENANCE
AND CARE
Hold down the MODE button:
Selecting “Date” and “Set Clock”:
– Press buttons ▲ or ▼ (with single presses) to select
the new setting;
– briefly press MODE to store the new setting and go
to the next setup menu option; if this is the last one you
will go back to the previous menu option.
Example:
Example:
From the standard screen, briefly press button MODE
to start browsing. Press ▲ or ▼ to browse within the
menu.
NOTE Only the short menu may be accessed for
reasons of safety while the vehicle is moving (“Speed
Beep” setting). Stop the vehicle to access the full menu.
Deutsch
Italiano
English
Español
Nederland
Français
Português
▲
▲
MODE
short press
of button
▼
▲
▼
SPEED BEEP
▼
Year
MODE
short press
of button
▼
TRIP B DATA
MENU EXIT
Month
SAFETY
▲
SENSOR
HEADLAMPS
KNOWING
YOUR CAR
Day
▲
▼
WARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGES
SET TIME
▲
PASSENGER AIR BAG
▼
▼
▲
SERVICE
▲
SET DATE
▼
▼
BUZZER SEAT BELTS (*)
▲
AUTOCLOSE
BUTTON VOLUME
▲
▼
▲
BUZZER VOLUME
LANGUAGE
▼
▲
MEAS. UNIT
▼
▼
▼
▲
F0N1020g
▲
▲
(*) This function may only be displayed after the SBR system is deactivated by a Fiat Dealership.
IN AN
EMERGENCY
MAINTENANCE
AND CARE
SEE RADIO
▼
STARTING
AND
DRIVING
fig. 17
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
INDEX
21
KNOWING
YOUR CAR
SAFETY
STARTING
AND
DRIVING
WARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGES
IN AN
EMERGENCY
MAINTENANCE
AND CARE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
INDEX
22
Speed limit (Speed Beep)
To cancel the setting, proceed as follows:
This function enables setting of the vehicle speed limit
(km/h or mph). When this limit is exceeded the driver is
immediately alerted (see section “Warning lights and
messages”).
– briefly press button MODE: ON flashes on the display;
To set the desired speed limit, proceed as follows:
– briefly press button MODE: the display will show the
wording “Speed Beep”;
– press button ▲ or ▼ to activate (On) or deactivate
(Off) the speed limit;
– if the function has been activated (On), press buttons
▲ or ▼ to select the required speed limit and then
press MODE to confirm.
NOTE. The speed may be set in the range from 30 to
200 km/h, or from 20 to 125 mph according to the
previously chosen unit (see “Setting the distance unit”
paragraph ) described below. The setting will increase/
decrease by five units each time button ▲/▼ is pressed.
Hold down button ▲/▼ to increase/decrease the setting
rapidly. Complete the setting by briefly pressing the
button when you approach the required value.
– press the MODE button briefly to return to the menu
screen or press the button for longer to return to the
standard screen without memorising.
– press button ▼: OFF flashes on the display;
– press the MODE button briefly to return to the menu
screen or press the button for longer to return to the
standard screen without memorising.
Headlight sensor sensitivity adjustment
(for versions/markets where provided)
With this function it is possible to adjust the rain
headlight sensitivity according to 3 levels.
To set the required sensitivity level, proceed as follows:
– briefly press button MODE: the previously set
sensitivity “level” start to flash on the display;
– press button ▲ or ▼ to adjust;
– press the MODE button briefly to return to the menu
screen or press the button for longer to return to the
standard screen without memorising.
Trip B On/Off (trip B data)
This function can be used to activate (On) or deactivate
(Off) the Trip B display (partial trip).
For further information see “Trip computer”.
Proceed as follows to switch the function on and off:
– briefly press button MODE: ON or OFF flashes on
the display (according to the previous setting);
– press button ▲ or ▼ to select;
– press the MODE button briefly to return to the menu
screen or press the button for longer to return to the
standard screen without memorising.
Setting the clock (Set time)
This function enables the clock to be set through two
submenus: “Time” and “Format”.
To carry out the adjustment, proceed as follows:
– briefly press the MODE button and two submenus,
“Time” and “Format”, are displayed;
– press ▲ or ▼ to move between the two submenus;
– once you have selected the submenu to be changed,
press the button MODE briefly;
– when accessing the “Time” submenu: briefly press the
button MODE, “hours” will flash on the display;
– press button ▲ or ▼ to adjust;
– briefly press button MODE: “minutes” starts flashing
on the display;
– press button ▲ or ▼ to adjust;
– when accessing the “Format” submenu: briefly press
button MODE : the previously set display format will
flash on the display;
– press ▲ or ▼ to select 24h or 12h.
When you have made the required settings, briefly press
the MODE button to go back to the submenu screen or
hold the button down to go back to the main menu
screen without storing the new settings.
– press the MODE button again for a while to return to
the standard screen or to the main menu according to
where you are in the menu.
KNOWING
YOUR CAR
SAFETY
STARTING
AND
DRIVING
WARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGES
IN AN
EMERGENCY
MAINTENANCE
AND CARE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
INDEX
23
KNOWING
YOUR CAR
SAFETY
STARTING
AND
DRIVING
WARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGES
IN AN
EMERGENCY
MAINTENANCE
AND CARE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
INDEX
24
Set date (Set Date)
Using this function you can update the date
(day – month – year).
Proceed as follows to update:
– briefly press button MODE: the day starts flashing on
the display (dd);
– press button ▲ or ▼ to adjust;
– briefly press button MODE: the month starts flashing
on the display (mm);
– press button ▲ or ▼ to adjust;
– briefly press button MODE: the year starts flashing on
the display (yyyy);
Audio information (See sound system)
With this function the display shows information about
the sound system.
– Radio: selected radio station frequency or RDS
message, automatic tuning activation or AutoSTore;
– audio CD, MP3 CD: track number;
– CD Changer: CD number and track number;
To show the sound system information on the display
(On) or clear it (Off), proceed as follows:
– briefly press the button MODE: (On) or (Off) will
flash on the display (depending on the previous setting);
– press ▲ or ▼ to adjust the value.
– press the MODE button briefly to return to the menu
screen or press the button for longer to return to the
standard screen without memorising.
NOTE The setting increases or decreases by one unit
each time button ▲ or ▼ is pressed. Hold the button
pressed to increase/decrease the setting rapidly and
automatically. Complete the setting by briefly pressing
the button when you approach the required value.
– press the MODE button briefly to return to the menu
screen or press the button for longer to return to the
standard screen without memorising.
– press button ▲ or ▼ to select;
Automatic central door locking with vehicle
running (Autoclose)
When activated (On), this function locks the doors
automatically when the vehicle speed exceeds 20 km/h.
Proceed as follows to activate (On) or deactivate (Off)
this function:
– briefly press the button MODE to display one
submenu;
– briefly press the button MODE : “On” or “Off” flash
on the display (depending on the previous setting);
– press button ▲ or ▼ to select;
– press the MODE button briefly to return to the
submenu screen or give the button a long press to
return to the main menu screen without storing;
– press the MODE button again for a while to return to
the standard screen or to the main menu according to
where you are in the menu.
Set units (Measurement units)
With this function is possible to set the unit of
measurement in three submenus: “Distance”,
“Consumption” and “Temperature”.
– when accessing the “Distance” submenu: briefly press the
button MODE and the display will show “km” or “mi”
(depending on the previous setting);
– press button ▲ or ▼ to select;
– when accessing the “Consumption” submenu: briefly
press button MODE: the display will show “km/l”,
“l/100 km” or “mpg” (according to previous setting);
If the distance unit is set to km, you can set the fuel
consumption unit to km/l or l/100 km.
To set the required unit proceed as follows:
If the distance unit is set to mi, fuel consumption is
displayed in mpg.
– briefly press MODE to display the three submenus;
– press button ▲ or ▼ to select;
– press ▲ or ▼ to move between the three submenus;
– when accessing the “Temperature” submenu: briefly
press button MODE: the display will show “°C” or “°F”
(according to previous setting);
– once you have selected the submenu to be changed,
press the button MODE briefly;
KNOWING
YOUR CAR
– press button ▲ or ▼ to select;
When you have made the required settings, briefly press
the MODE button to go back to the submenu screen or
hold the button down to go back to the main menu
screen without storing the new settings.
– press the MODE button again for a while to return to
the standard screen or to the main menu according to
where you are in the menu.
SAFETY
STARTING
AND
DRIVING
WARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGES
IN AN
EMERGENCY
MAINTENANCE
AND CARE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
INDEX
25
KNOWING
YOUR CAR
SAFETY
STARTING
AND
DRIVING
WARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGES
IN AN
EMERGENCY
MAINTENANCE
AND CARE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
INDEX
26
Selecting the language (Language)
Adjust the button volume (Button Vol.)
Display messages can be shown in different languages:
Italian, German, English, Spanish, French, Portuguese
and Dutch.
This function is used to set the volume of the rogerbeep accompanying the activation of buttons MODE,
▲ and ▼ to 8 levels.
To set the desired language, proceed as follows:
To set the desired volume, proceed as follows:
– briefly press button MODE: the previously set
language starts flashing on the display;
– press button ▲ or ▼ to select;
– press the MODE button briefly to return to the menu
screen or press the button for longer to return to the
standard screen without memorising.
– press the MODE button briefly, making the display
flash the previously set volume level;
Adjust the failure/warning buzzer volume
(Buzzer Volume)
With this function the volume of the buzzer which
accompanies the display of any failure/warning can be
adjusted according to 8 levels.
To set the desired volume, proceed as follows:
– press the MODE button briefly, making the display
flash the previously set volume level;
– press button ▲ or ▼ to adjust;
– press the MODE button briefly to return to the menu
screen or press the button for longer to return to the
standard screen without memorising.
– press button ▲ or ▼ to adjust;
– press the MODE button briefly to return to the menu
screen or press the button for longer to return to the
standard screen without memorising.
S.B.R. buzzer reactivation (Belt Buzzer)
This function can be displayed only after a Fiat
Dealership has deactivated the SBR system (see “SBR
system” in the “Safety” section).
Scheduled Servicing (Service)
Scheduled servicing
Using this function you can display information about
the mileage intervals for car servicing.
To consult this information, proceed as follows:
– briefly press the MODE button: the display shows
service requirements in km or mi according to the
previous setting (see paragraph “Unit of measure”);
– briefly press the MODE button to go back to the
menu screen or press the button for a prolonged time
to go back to the standard screen.
Oil change
This function enables to display information on the km
distance to the next oil change.
To consult this information, proceed as follows:
– briefly press the MODE button; the display shows the
estimated km distance to the next oil change (depending
on the driving mode);
– briefly press the MODE button to go back to the
menu screen or press the button for a prolonged time
to go back to the standard screen.
NOTE The “Scheduled Maintenance Plan” sets out
different service intervals depending on the engine type.
This indication will appear automatically with the key at
MAR-ON starting from 2,000 km (or 1240 mi) and will
be presented automatically every 200 km (or 124 mi).
Oil change notification messages are displayed in the
same way. Use keys ▲ and ▼ to display service and oil
change due dates alternately. Below 200 km servicing
indications are more frequent. The display will be in
kilometres or miles depending on the measurement unit
settings. When the next scheduled service is
approaching, the message “Service” will appear on the
display followed by the number of kilometres or miles
left when the key is turned to MAR-ON. Contact a Fiat
Dealership to carry out any service operation in the
“Scheduled servicing plan” and to reset the display.
NOTE When the oil change is near to come, turning
the ignition key to MAR-ON the display will show a
dedicated message. Engine performance will decrease
still driving in these conditions. When the oil change is
due, the dedicated message is displayed again and the
v and U warning lights turn on. Contact a Fiat
Dealership.
KNOWING
YOUR CAR
SAFETY
STARTING
AND
DRIVING
WARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGES
IN AN
EMERGENCY
MAINTENANCE
AND CARE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
INDEX
27
F0N1022g
Front passenger’s airbag and chest side bag
activation/deactivation fig. 18
(for versions/markets, where provided)
This function is used to activate/deactivate the front
passenger’s airbag.
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
MODE
Exit Menu
This is the last function that closes the cycle of settings
listed in the menu screen. Pressing the MODE button
briefly will return the display to the standard screen
without storing. Press button ▼ to return to the first
menu option (Speed Beep).
INDEX
fig. 18
28
F0N1024g
F0N1023g
❒ briefly press button MODE: the display shows a
message confirming the selected value. Now, go back to
the menu screen or press the button for longer to
go back to the standard screen without storing the
settings.
F0N1022g
MAINTENANCE
AND CARE
▲ ▲
▼ ▼
❒ press buttons ▲ or ▼ to select either Yes (to
confirm activation/deactivation) or No (to abort);
F0N1028g
IN AN
EMERGENCY
MODE
❒ the display will show the confirmation message;
F0N1025g
WARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGES
❒ press MODE and after the message (Bag pass Off)
(deactivate) or (Bag pass On) (activate) appears by
pressing buttons ▲ e ▼, press the MODE button
again;
F0N1022g
STARTING
AND
DRIVING
Proceed as follows:
F0N1027g
SAFETY
MODE
▲ ▲
▼ ▼
F0N1026g
KNOWING
YOUR CAR
TRIP COMPUTER
General information
The “Trip computer” is used to display information on
vehicle operation when the key is turned to MAR-ON.
This function allows you to define two separate trips,
called “Trip A” and “Trip B”, for monitoring the
vehicle’s “complete mission” (journey) in a reciprocally
independent manner. Both functions can be reset (reset
means start of a new journey).
“Trip A” is used to display the figures relating to:
– Outside temperature
– Range
– Trip distance
– Average consumption
– Current consumption
– Average speed
– Trip time (driving time).
“Trip B”, available on multifunction display only, is used
to display the figures relating to:
– Trip distance B
– Average consumption B
– Average speed B
– Trip time B (driving time).
NOTE “Trip B” function can be excluded (see paragraph
“Trip B on”). “Range” and “Instant consumption”
parameters cannot be reset.
Values displayed
External temperature
Indicates the temperature outside the vehicle passenger
compartment.
Range (for versions/markets where provided)
It indicates the distance that can still be travelled based
on the fuel in the tank assuming that driving conditions
will not change. The message “---” will appear on the
display in the following cases:
– range value lower than 50 km (or 30 mi)
– vehicle left parked with engine running for long
period.
Trip distance
This value shows the distance covered from the start of
the new mission.
Average consumption (for versions/markets where provided)
This value shows the average consumption from the
start of the new mission.
Instant consumption (for versions/markets where provided)
This indicates instant fuel consumption and it is
constantly updated. The message “---” will appear on
the display if the vehicle is parked with the engine
running.
Average speed
Represents the average vehicle speed as a function of
the overall time elapsed since the start of a new mission.
KNOWING
YOUR CAR
SAFETY
STARTING
AND
DRIVING
WARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGES
IN AN
EMERGENCY
MAINTENANCE
AND CARE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
INDEX
29
KNOWING
YOUR CAR
SAFETY
STARTING
AND
DRIVING
WARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGES
Trip time
This value shows the time elapsed since the start of the
new mission.
IMPORTANT If the reset operation is carried out when
“Trip B” is being displayed, only the information
associated with this function is reset.
IMPORTANT In the absence of information, Trip
Computer values are displayed with “----”. When
normal operating conditions are restarted, calculation of
different units will restart regularly. The values displayed
before the failure will not be reset nor will a new
mission be started.
Start of journey procedure
TRIP control button fig. 19
To quit the Trip function: keep button MODE pressed
for over 2 seconds.
The TRIP button is located on the right hand lever.
With the ignition key turned to MAR-ON, this button
allows you to view the previously described parameters
and also reset them to begin a new mission:
With the ignition key in the MAR-ON position, reset by
pressing the TRIP button and keeping it pressed for
more than 2 seconds.
Exit Trip
– brief press to access the various parameter displays;
IN AN
EMERGENCY
MAINTENANCE
AND CARE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
INDEX
30
– long press to reset and start a new mission.
New mission
It begins after a reset:
– “manual” resetting by the user, by pressing the
relevant button;
– “automatic” resetting, when the “Trip distance”
reaches 3999.9 km or 9999.9 km (according to the type
of display) or when the “Travel time” reaches 99.59
(99 hours and 59 minutes);
– disconnection/reconnection of the battery.
IMPORTANT If the reset operation is carried out when
“Trip A” is being displayed, only the information
associated with this function is reset.
fig. 19
F0N0019m
SEATS
WARNING
WARNING
Any adjustments should only be carried
out with the vehicle stationary.
The fabric covers on your vehicle have
been dimensioned to be resistant to
normal wear and tear. Some precautions
are however needed. Avoid prolonged rubbing
against clothing accessories, such as metal
buckles, bosses, Velcro strips and the like, which
by applying a high pressure on the fabric in
a small area could cause the breakage of some
threads and damage the upholstery.
Once you have released the adjustment
lever, always check that the seat is
locked on the guides by trying to move it back
and forth. If it is not locked, the seat may move
unexpectedly and make you lose control of the
vehicle.
KNOWING
YOUR CAR
SAFETY
STARTING
AND
DRIVING
Height adjustment
To raise the seat: whilst sitting, move the lever B
upwards (front part of the seat) or the lever C (rear
part of the seat) and shift your body weight away from
the part of the seat to be raised.
WARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGES
IN AN
EMERGENCY
Lengthwise direction adjustment fig. 20
MAINTENANCE
AND CARE
Lift the lever A and push the seat forwards or
backwards: in driving position your arms should rest on
the rim of the steering wheel.
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
INDEX
fig. 20
F0N0118m
31
KNOWING
YOUR CAR
SAFETY
STARTING
AND
DRIVING
WARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGES
IN AN
EMERGENCY
To lower the seat: whilst sitting, move the lever B
upwards (front part of the seat) or the lever C (rear
part of the seat) and place your body weight on the part
of the seat to be lowered.
Backrest angle adjustment fig. 20
AIR SEAT
The seat is equipped with a mechanical spring system
and hydraulic shock absorber to ensure maximum
comfort and safety. The system of springs also
effectively absorbs impact from uneven road surfaces.
See the description in the “Front seats” section for the
lengthwise adjustments, height adjustments, backrest
adjustment, lumbar adjustment and armrest adjustment.
Turn knob D.
WARNING
Damper weight adjustment
For maximum safety, keep the back of
your seat upright, lean back into it and
make sure the seat belt fits closely across your
chest and hips.
Use the adjustment knob A-fig. 22 to set the required
setting based on body weight, with settings between
40 kg and 130 kg.
Lumbar adjustment
To adjust, turn knob E-fig. 21.
MAINTENANCE
AND CARE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
INDEX
32
fig. 21
F0N0147m
fig. 22
F0N0139m
SEATS WITH ADJUSTABLE ARMRESTS
The driver’s seat may be equipped with an armrest that
can be raised and adjusted for height. To adjust, use the
wheel A-fig. 23.
REVOLVING BASE SEAT
(for versions/markets where provided)
It may be turned through 180° toward the seat on the
opposite side. Use the control A-fig. 24 to rotate the
seat. Before turning, move the seat forward and only
then adjust the reach fig. 25.
KNOWING
YOUR CAR
SAFETY
WARNING
Before putting on the front seat belts,
make sure that the armrests are in a
vertical position (see “Seat belts” paragraph).
STARTING
AND
DRIVING
WARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGES
WARNING
Before unfastening your seat belt and
getting out of the vehicle, make sure
that the (door side) outer armrest is fully raised.
IN AN
EMERGENCY
F0N0187m
fig. 24
MAINTENANCE
AND CARE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
1
fig. 23
F0N0148m
fig. 25
INDEX
2
F0N0187m
33
KNOWING
YOUR CAR
SAFETY
REVOLVING SEAT WITH SEAT BELT
(for versions/markets, where provided)
Backrest angle adjustment fig. 27
Adjust lever A.
It is equipped with a seat belt with three anchorage
points fig. 26, two adjustable armrests (for the
adjustment, see “Seats with adjustable armrests”
paragraph) and height-adjustable head restraints (for the
adjustment, see “Head restraints” paragraph).
Height adjustment fig. 27
Operate the controls B or C to raise/lower the
front/rear part of the seat respectively.
Seat rotation
STARTING
AND
DRIVING
WARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGES
It may be turned through 180° toward the seat on the
opposite side and approximately 35° toward the door It
may be locked in the driving position or at 180°.
WARNING
All adjustments must be made with the
vehicle stationary. In particular, while
turning the seat, take care that it does not
interfere with the handbrake lever.
IN AN
EMERGENCY
MAINTENANCE
AND CARE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
INDEX
34
fig. 26
F0N0173m
fig. 27
F0N0174m
Use the lever D-fig. 28 (on the right side of the seat) to
turn the seat.
Seat heating fig. 29
(for versions/markets where available)
Before turning, move the seat forward and only then
adjust the reach fig. 25.
With the key turned to MAR-ON, press the button E to
switch the function on/off.
KNOWING
YOUR CAR
SAFETY
WARNING
STARTING
AND
DRIVING
Ensure the seat is locked in the driving
position before starting up the vehicle.
WARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGES
IN AN
EMERGENCY
MAINTENANCE
AND CARE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
INDEX
fig. 28
F0N0175m
fig. 29
F0N0213m
35
KNOWING
YOUR CAR
SAFETY
STARTING
AND
DRIVING
WARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGES
FLAP ON BENCH fig. 30
(for versions/markets where provided)
The seat is equipped with a fold-down flap that can be
used as a document support surface. To use, the pull tab
A and lower the flap. The flap is equipped with two cup
holders and a support surface with a paper holder clip.
COMPARTMENT UNDER THE SEAT
(for versions/markets where provided)
A compartment A-fig. 31 is present under the seat that
can be easily removed by withdrawing the hooks on the
support base.
WARNING
Do not place heavy loads on the flap
with the vehicle in motion because they
could be thrown against the vehicle occupants
in the event of sudden braking or impacts,
causing severe injury.
IN AN
EMERGENCY
MAINTENANCE
AND CARE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
INDEX
36
fig. 30
F0N0149m
fig. 31
F0N0237m
SEAT BASE PLASTIC COVERS fig. 32
(for versions/markets where provided)
PANORAMA VERSIONS
The Front cover A can be opened by operating the
release handle B on the upper part.
This gives access to the under-seat compartment (see
“under-seat compartment” paragraph).
To make it easier to open the front cover and gain
access to the compartment, the seat must be as far back
as possible.
To allow removal of the front cover, it must be turned
as far forward as possible and withdrawn from the
hooks on the lower side by pulling toward the front of
the vehicle.
Adjusting the passenger seat tilting backrest
fig. 33
KNOWING
YOUR CAR
Turn the knob A.
SAFETY
Access to seats in second row fig. 33
To gain access to the second row of seats, operate the
lever B for the right outer side seat in the first row and
tilt the backrest forward pushing with your left hand.
When the seat is restored to its normal position, it
engages with the retaining device without the need to
operate the lever again.
On the one-piece Panorama seat in the second row
both side seats are fixed.
STARTING
AND
DRIVING
WARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGES
IN AN
EMERGENCY
MAINTENANCE
AND CARE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
INDEX
fig. 32
F0N0238m
fig. 33
F0N0227m
37
KNOWING
YOUR CAR
SAFETY
STARTING
AND
DRIVING
WARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGES
Tilting middle seat backrest
(2nd – 3rd row) fig. 33
Stacked position
Proceed as follows:
Lift the lever C and fold the backrest forwards.
A hard surface on the back of the middle seat is for use
as an armrest and table with cup holders.
Operate the lever to reposition the backrest.
To lower the backrest of the middle seat in the second
row, remove the head restraint to make it easier to
adjust the backrest of the middle seat in the first row.
– remove the head restraints from the easy entry
position;
– raise txhe lever B-fig. 35 (located beneath the lever
A-fig. 34) with your right hand;
– turn the backrest 5° to the rear;
– fold the backrest forward with your left hand.
COMBI VERSIONS
Easy Entry position
Lift lever A-fig. 34 and tilt the backrest forwards.
IN AN
EMERGENCY
MAINTENANCE
AND CARE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
INDEX
38
fig. 34
F0N0228m
fig. 35
F0N0229m
Proceed as follows to remove the bench:
WARNING
Do not travel with passengers seated in
the 3rd row with the 2nd row bench
folded over. Do not place objects of any type
on the backrest of the 2nd bench with the row
folded over: in the event of impact or sharp
braking they could be thrown against the
occupants of the vehicle casing serious injury.
For more information, see the contents of the
adhesive plate located under the bench.
– from the stacked position, operate levers C and
D-fig. 36 , turning them forward (as specified on the
adhesive plate located on the lower crossmember);
– lift seat base forward;
SAFETY
– bring the seat to an upright position;
– from the upright position, operate the levers E and
F-fig. 37, turning them upward;
– raise the bench from the floor and remove it.
Removing the bench
WARNING
IMPORTANT At least two people must be present to
remove the bench.
KNOWING
YOUR CAR
When refitting the bench, ensure it is
correctly locked to the floor guides.
STARTING
AND
DRIVING
WARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGES
IN AN
EMERGENCY
MAINTENANCE
AND CARE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
INDEX
fig. 36
F0N0230m
fig. 37
F0N0231m
39
KNOWING
YOUR CAR
SAFETY
STARTING
AND
DRIVING
WARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGES
HEAD RESTRAINTS
WARNING
FRONT HEAD RESTRAINTS fig. 38
On certain versions the head restraints are adjustable in
height and they lock automatically in the required
position.
Adjustment
❒ Upwards adjustment: lift the head restraint until it
locks;
❒ downwards adjustment: press button A and lower
the head restraint.
To extract the front head restraints press the buttons A
and B on both sides simultaneously and release them
upwards.
IN AN
EMERGENCY
MAINTENANCE
AND CARE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
INDEX
40
fig. 38
F0N0020m
Head restraints must be adjusted so that
the head, rather than the neck, rests on
them. Only in this case they can protect your
head correctly.
To make the best use of the head restraint’s protective
action, adjust the backrest so that your torso is upright
and keep your head as close as possible to the head
restraint.
STEERING WHEEL
WARNING
The steering wheel position can be adjusted axially.
To carry out the adjustment, proceed as follows:
The adjustments should only be carried
out with the vehicle stationary and the
engine turned off.
❒ release lever fig. 39 by pulling it towards the steering
wheel (position 2);
KNOWING
YOUR CAR
SAFETY
WARNING
❒ adjust the steering wheel;
❒ lock the lever by pushing it forwards (position 1).
It is absolutely forbidden to carry out
any after-sales operations involving
steering system or steering column
modifications (e.g. installing an anti-theft
device). This could affect performance and
safety, invalidate the warranty and also result in
the vehicle failing to comply with regulations.
STARTING
AND
DRIVING
WARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGES
IN AN
EMERGENCY
MAINTENANCE
AND CARE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
INDEX
fig. 39
F0N0321m
41
KNOWING
YOUR CAR
SAFETY
STARTING
AND
DRIVING
WARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGES
REAR VIEW MIRRORS
WARNING
REAR-VIEW MIRROR fig. 40
The mirror is fitted with a safety device that causes its
release in the event of a violent impact with the
passenger.
Lever A can be used to move the mirror to two
different positions: normal or antiglare.
As the driver’s exterior mirror is curved,
it may slightly alter the perception of
distance of the reflected image.
Further, the reflective surface of the lower part
of the exterior mirrors is parabolic to increase
the field of view. The reflected image size is thus
reduced and gives the impression that the
reflected item is further away than it actually is.
DOOR MIRRORS
Mirrors with manual adjustment
Electrically adjustable mirrors fig. 41
To adjust the mirrors, manually adjust each of the two
glasses of each mirror.
The electrical adjustment can only be carried out with
the ignition key in the MAR-ON position.
IN AN
EMERGENCY
MAINTENANCE
AND CARE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
INDEX
42
fig. 40
F0N0022m
fig. 41
F0N0024m
To adjust the mirror, place the knob B in one of the
four positions: ÿ1 left mirror,
⁄ 2 right mirror ¤ 3 left wide angle,
Ÿ 4 right wide angle.
After rotating the knob B on the mirror to be adjusted,
move it in the direction shown by the arrows to adjust
the selected glass.
Mirror folding with manual adjustment fig. 42
When required (for example when the mirror causes
difficulty in narrow spaces or during an automatic car
wash) it is possible to fold the mirrors manually moving
them from position 1 to position 2.
If the mirror has been accidentally rotated forwards
(position 3), for example due to an impact, it must be
manually returned to position 1.
WARNING
When driving the mirrors should always
remain in position 1.
KNOWING
YOUR CAR
SAFETY
Mirror folding with electrical adjustment
fig. 42-43
(for versions/markets, where provided)
When required (for example when the mirror causes
difficulty in narrow spaces or during an automatic car
wash) it is possible to fold the mirrors both electrically
and manually moving them from position 1-fig. 42 to
position 2.
STARTING
AND
DRIVING
WARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGES
IN AN
EMERGENCY
MAINTENANCE
AND CARE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
INDEX
fig. 42
F0N0023m
fig. 43
F0N0159m
43
Electric folding
KNOWING
YOUR CAR
SAFETY
STARTING
AND
DRIVING
WARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGES
IN AN
EMERGENCY
To fold the mirrors electrically, press point 2 of the
rocker button A-fig. 43. To bring the mirrors back to
the open position, press point 1 of the button.
IMPORTANT If the mirrors are folded electrically, they
should be returned to the open position electrically: do
not try to return the mirrors manually to driving
position.
Manual folding
To fold the mirrors manually, move them from position
1-fig. 42 to position 2. If the mirrors are folded
manually, they can be returned to the open position
both manually and electrically.
IMPORTANT To bring the mirrors electrically to the
opening position, press point 2 of the rocker button
A-fig. 43 until an engagement “click” is heard, then press
again point 1 of the button again.
Folding forwards
MAINTENANCE
AND CARE
The mirrors can be manually folded forwards (position
3-fig. 42) or brought to the opening position 2 again
manually if they have been accidentally rotated forwards
(for example due to an impact).
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
If the mirrors have been rotated forwards manually or
due to an impact, they can be returned to the open
position both manually and electrically.
INDEX
44
To bring the mirrors to the opening position electrically,
press point 2 of the rocker button A-fig. 43 until an
engagement “click” is heard, then press point 1 of the
button.
IMPORTANT If the mirrors have been manually folded
by mistake to position 3 – fig. 42, the mirror moves to
an intermediate position. In this case, manually rotate
the mirror to position 1, then press point 2 of the
rocker button A-fig. 43 to return the mirror to position
2 until a “click” is heard, then press point 1 of the
button to bring it back to position 1.
Defrosting/demisting
(for versions/markets where provided)
The mirrors are fitted with resistors that are activated
when the heated rear windscreen is turned on (by
pressing button ().
IMPORTANT This function is timed and it will turn off
automatically a few minutes later.
HEATING AND VENTILATION SYSTEM
F0N0322m
KNOWING
YOUR CAR
SAFETY
STARTING
AND
DRIVING
WARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGES
IN AN
EMERGENCY
MAINTENANCE
AND CARE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
fig. 44
1. Upper fixed vent – 2. Adjustable centre vents – 3. Fixed side vent – 4. Adjustable side vents – 5. Lower vents for
front seats.
INDEX
45
KNOWING
YOUR CAR
SAFETY
ADJUSTABLE SIDE AND CENTRE VENTS
fig. 45-46
D
E
A
B
C
The vents A and C cannot be adjusted.
Fixed vents for side windows.
Adjustable side vents.
Fixed vents.
Adjustable centre vents.
Air flow adjustment control.
CONTROLS fig. 47
Air temperature adjustment ring nut A
(mixing hot/cold air)
STARTING
AND
DRIVING
Red section = hot air
Blue section = cold air
WARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGES
Knob B activates/adjusts the fan
IN AN
EMERGENCY
4 - = maximum fan speed
p 0 = fan off
1-2-3 = fan speed
fig. 45
F0N0026m
MAINTENANCE
AND CARE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
INDEX
46
fig. 46
F0N0027m
fig. 47
F0N0514m
Air distribution ring nut C
PASSENGER COMPARTMENT HEATING
¶ to direct air to the centre and side vents;
ß to send air to the feet and direct cooler air to the
Proceed as follows:
dashboard vents, in intermediate temperature
conditions;
❒ turn the ring nut A to the red section;
KNOWING
YOUR CAR
❒ turn the ring nut C to the required position;
© for heating when the outside temperature is very
❒ turn the knob B to the required speed.
SAFETY
® to warm the feet and, at the same time, demist the
FAST PASSENGER COMPARTMENT
HEATING
- for quick windscreen demisting.
For the fast heating of the passenger compartment,
proceed as follows:
STARTING
AND
DRIVING
Air recirculation on/off knob D
❒ turn the ring nut A to the red section;
When the knob D is turned to Ò the internal air
recirculation is activated.
❒ switch on the air recirculation by turning the knob D
to Ò ;
When the knob D is turned to Ú the internal air
recirculation is deactivated.
❒ turn the ring nut C to ©;
PASSENGER COMPARTMENT VENTILATION
Then use the controls to maintain the required comfort
conditions and turn the knob D to Ú to turn the air
recirculation off and to prevent misting.
low: to direct as much air as possible to the feet;
windscreen;
To ventilate the passenger compartment well, proceed
as follows:
❒ turn the ring nut A to the blue section;
❒ switch off the air recirculation by turning the knob D
to Ú ;
❒ turn the knob B to 4 - (max. fan speed).
IMPORTANT With cold engine, you have to wait for
a few minutes to let the system fluid reach the operating
temperature.
WARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGES
IN AN
EMERGENCY
MAINTENANCE
AND CARE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
❒ turn the ring nut C to ¶;
❒ turn the knob B to the required speed.
INDEX
47
KNOWING
YOUR CAR
SAFETY
STARTING
AND
DRIVING
WARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGES
IN AN
EMERGENCY
FRONT WINDOW FAST
DEMISTING/DEFROSTING (WINDSCREEN
AND SIDE WINDOWS)
Proceed as follows:
❒ turn the ring nut A to the red section;
❒ switch off the air recirculation by turning the knob D
to Ú ;
❒ turn the ring nut C to -;
❒ turn the knob B to 4 - (max. fan speed).
IMPORTANT To ensure fast demisting/defrosting,
if a supplementary heater is present (under the front or
rear seat for Panorama and Combi versions), if on, turn
off using button F (LED off) located on the control panel
fig. 48.
After demisting/defrosting, operate the controls to
restore the required comfort conditions.
In the event of considerable external moisture and/or rain
and/or large differences in temperature inside and outside
the passenger compartment, perform the following
preventive window demisting procedure:
❒ turn the ring nut A to the red section;
❒ switch off the air recirculation by turning the knob D
to Ú ;
❒ turn the ring nut C to - or to ® if the windows
do not demist;
❒ turn the knob B to the 2nd speed.
HEATED REAR WINDSCREEN AND DOOR
MIRRORS DEMISTING/DEFROSTING fig. 49
(for versions/markets where provided)
Press the button A to activate this function; when this
function is on the warning light in the button comes on.
This function is timed and will turn off automatically
after 20 minutes. Press the button A again to switch the
function off.
MAINTENANCE
AND CARE
IMPORTANT Do not apply stickers to the inside of the
rear window over the heating filaments to avoid damage
that might cause it to stop working properly.
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
INDEX
48
Window demisting
fig. 48
F0N0500m
INTERNAL AIR RECIRCULATION
ACTIVATION
MANUAL CLIMATE CONTROL
SYSTEM
Turn the knob D-fig. 47 to Ò .
(for versions/markets where provided)
It is advisable to switch the internal air recirculation on
while standing in queues or in tunnels to prevent the
introduction of polluted air. Do not use the function for
a long time, particularly if there are many passengers on
board, to prevent the windows from misting up.
IMPORTANT The inside air recirculation system makes
it possible to reach the required heating or cooling
conditions faster.
Do not use the air recirculation function on rainy/cold
days as it would considerably increase the possibility of
the windows misting up.
KNOWING
YOUR CAR
CONTROLS fig. 50
SAFETY
Air temperature adjustment ring nut A
(mixing hot/cold air)
STARTING
AND
DRIVING
Red section = hot air
Blue section = cold air
Knob B activates/adjusts the fan
WARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGES
p 0 = fan off
1-2-3 = fan speed
4 - = maximum fan speed
IN AN
EMERGENCY
MAINTENANCE
AND CARE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
INDEX
fig. 49
F0N0043m
fig. 50
F0N0514m
49
KNOWING
YOUR CAR
SAFETY
Air distribution ring nut C
PASSENGER COMPARTMENT VENTILATION
¶ to direct air to the centre and side vents;
ß to send air to the feet and direct cooler air to the
To ventilate the passenger compartment well, proceed as
follows:
© for heating when the outside temperature is very
❒ switch off the air recirculation by turning the knob D
to Ú ;
dashboard vents, in intermediate temperature
conditions;
low: to direct as much air as possible to the feet;
STARTING
AND
DRIVING
WARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGES
IN AN
EMERGENCY
MAINTENANCE
AND CARE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
INDEX
50
® to warm the feet and, at the same time, demist the
windscreen;
- for quick windscreen demisting.
Air recirculation on/off knob D
Press the button (button LED on) to turn the internal
air recirculation on.
❒ turn the ring nut A to the blue section;
❒ turn the ring nut C to ¶;
❒ turn the knob B to the required speed.
CLIMATE CONTROL SYSTEM (cooling)
For fast cooling of the passenger compartment, proceed
as follows:
❒ turn the ring nut A to the blue section;
Press the button again (button LED off) to turn the
internal air recirculation off.
❒ switch on the air recirculation by turning the knob D
to Ò ;
Climate control system on/off button E
❒ turn the ring nut C to ¶;
Press the button (button LED on) to turn the climate
control system on.
Press the button again (button LED off) to turn the
climate control system off.
❒ press the button E to turn the climate control
system on; the LED in the button E will come on;
❒ turn the ring nut B to 4 - (max. fan speed).
Cooling adjustment
❒ turn the ring nut C to ©;
❒ Turn the ring nut A to the right to increase the
temperature;
❒ turn the knob B to 4 - (max. fan speed).
❒ switch off the air recirculation by turning the knob D
to Ú ;
❒ turn the ring nut B to reduce the fan speed.
IMPORTANT When the air conditioner compressor
button E is pressed, the function is only activated if at
least the first fan speed is selected (knob B).
Then use the controls to maintain the required comfort
conditions and turn the knob D to Ú to turn the
internal air recirculation off (button LED off).
IMPORTANT With cold engine, you have to wait for
a few minutes to let the system fluid reach the operating
temperature.
PASSENGER COMPARTMENT HEATING
FRONT WINDOW FAST DEMISTING/
DEFROSTING (WINDSCREEN AND SIDE
WINDOWS)
Proceed as follows:
Proceed as follows:
❒ turn the ring nut A to the red section;
❒ turn the ring nut A to the red section;
❒ turn the ring nut C to the required symbol;
❒ turn the knob B to 4 - (max. fan speed).
❒ turn the knob B to the required speed.
❒ turn the ring nut C to -;
FAST PASSENGER COMPARTMENT
HEATING
For the fast heating of the passenger compartment,
proceed as follows:
❒ turn the ring nut A to the red section;
❒ turn the air recirculation on by turning the knob D
to Ò;
❒ switch off the air recirculation by turning the knob D
to Ú .
KNOWING
YOUR CAR
SAFETY
STARTING
AND
DRIVING
WARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGES
IN AN
EMERGENCY
MAINTENANCE
AND CARE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
INDEX
51
KNOWING
YOUR CAR
SAFETY
STARTING
AND
DRIVING
IMPORTANT to ensure fast demisting/defrosting, if an
additional heater/air conditioner is present (under the
front or rear seat on Panorama and Combi versions),
if it is activated, turn it off using the button F (LED off)
located on the control panel fig. 51.
Window demisting
After demisting/defrosting, operate the controls to
restore the required comfort conditions.
❒ turn the ring nut A to the red section;
IMPORTANT The climate control system is very useful
for speeding up the demisting because it dehumidifies the
air. Adjust the controls as described above and press the
button E to switch the climate control system on; the
LED in the button will light up.
❒ turn the ring nut C to - or to ® if the windows
do not demist;
WARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGES
❒ switch off the air recirculation by turning the knob D
to Ú ;
❒ turn the knob B to the 2nd speed.
IMPORTANT The climate control system is very useful
for preventing the windows misting up in presence of
high humidity since it dehumidifies the air introduced
into the passenger compartment.
IN AN
EMERGENCY
MAINTENANCE
AND CARE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
INDEX
52
In the event of considerable external moisture and/or rain
and/or large differences in temperature inside and outside
the passenger compartment, perform the following
preventive window demisting procedure:
fig. 51
F0N0500m
HEATED REAR WINDSCREEN AND DOOR
MIRRORS DEMISTING/DEFROSTING fig. 52
(for versions/markets where provided)
Press the button A to activate this function; when this
function is on the warning light in the button comes on.
INTERNAL AIR RECIRCULATION
ACTIVATION
Turn the knob D to Ò.
KNOWING
YOUR CAR
This function is timed and will turn off automatically
after 20 minutes. Press the button A again to switch the
function off.
It is advisable to switch the internal air recirculation on
while standing in queues or in tunnels to prevent the
introduction of polluted air. Do not use the function for
a long time, particularly if there are many passengers on
board, to prevent the windows from misting up.
IMPORTANT Do not apply stickers on the inside of the
rear window over the heating filaments to avoid damage
that might cause it to stop working properly.
IMPORTANT The inside air recirculation system makes
it possible to reach the required heating or cooling
conditions faster.
STARTING
AND
DRIVING
Do not use the air recirculation function on rainy/cold
days as it would considerably increase the possibility of
the windows misting inside.
WARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGES
SYSTEM SERVICING
In winter, the climate control system must be turned on
at least once a month for about 10 minutes. Before
summer, have the system inspected at a Fiat Dealership.
SAFETY
IN AN
EMERGENCY
MAINTENANCE
AND CARE
The system uses R134a refrigerant fluid
which does not pollute the environment
in the event of accidental leakage. Under
no circumstances should R12 fluid be used as it is
incompatible with the system components.
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
INDEX
fig. 52
F0N0043m
53
KNOWING
YOUR CAR
SAFETY
STARTING
AND
DRIVING
WARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGES
IN AN
EMERGENCY
MAINTENANCE
AND CARE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
INDEX
54
AUTOMATIC CLIMATE CONTROL
SYSTEM
(for versions/markets, where provided)
GENERAL INFORMATION
The automatic climate control system adjusts the
temperature, the quantity and the distribution of the air
in the passenger compartment.
The temperature control is based on the “equivalent
temperature”: in other words, the system continuously
works to keep the comfort level inside the vehicle
constant and to compensate for possible variations in
outside conditions, including the sun’s rays detected by
a dedicated sensor. The automatically controlled
parameters and functions are:
❒ air temperature at the vents;
❒ air distribution at the vents;
❒ fan speed (continuous air flow variation);
❒ compressor activation (to cool/dehumidify the air);
❒ air recirculation.
All functions may be changed manually. In other words,
you may select one or more functions and change the
parameters as required. Automatic control of the
manually changed functions will be suspended: the
system will override your settings only for safety-related
reasons (e.g. risk of misting up). Manual selections will
always take priority over automatic settings and will be
stored until the user switches the system back to
automatic operation by pressing the AUTO button again
expect for the cases in which the system will intervene
for particular, safety-related reasons. You can adjust one
function manually without affecting the automatic
control of the others.
The intake air temperature is always automatically
controlled according to the temperature set on the display
(except for when the system is off or in certain conditions
when the compressor is not running).
The system allows the following parameters and
functions to be set or altered manually: air temperature,
fan speed (continuous variation); air distribution in
seven positions; compressor enablement, fast
defrosting/demisting function; air recirculation; switching
off of the system;
CONTROLS fig. 53
A AUTO button for automatic control of all functions.
B Air distribution selection button.
C Display.
D MAX DEF function control button.
fig. 53
F0N0831m
E
F
G
H
I
System off button.
Compressor enabling/disabling button.
Air recirculation control button.
Fan speed increase/decrease control buttons.
Temperature increase/decrease control knob.
USING THE CLIMATE CONTROL SYSTEM
The system can be started in different ways, but it is
advisable to start by pressing the AUTO button and
then turning the knob to set the temperature required
on the display. The system will start running
automatically in this way and the set temperature will be
reached as quickly as possible. The system will adjust
the temperature, the quantity and the distribution of the
air introduced into the passenger compartment and, by
managing the recirculation function, the activation of the
compressor. During fully automatic operation, the only
manual intervention required is the possible activation
of the following functions:
❒ Ò air recirculation, to keep it always on or off;
❒ Z to speed up demisting/defrosting of the front
windows, rear window and door mirrors.
During fully automatic system operation, you can change
the set temperature, air distribution and fan speed at
any time by using the relevant buttons or knobs: the
system will automatically change its settings to adjust to
the new requirements. During fully automatic operation
(FULL AUTO), the word FULL will disappear if the air
distribution and/or flow rate and/or engagement of the
compressor and/or recirculation settings are changed.
In this way, the functions will switch from automatic to
manual control until the AUTO button is pressed again.
With one or more functions turned on manually, the
adjustment of the intake air temperature continues to
be managed automatically, except with the compressor
switched off: if this is the case, the temperature of the
air introduced into the passenger compartment cannot
be lower than that of the outside air.
KNOWING
YOUR CAR
SAFETY
STARTING
AND
DRIVING
WARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGES
CONTROLS
Air temperature adjustment knob
air (l)
Turn the knob either clockwise or
anticlockwise to increase or lower the
requested temperature in the passenger
compartment.
The temperature set is shown on the display.
Turn the knob either fully to the right or fully to the left
to the extreme HI or LO position to turn the maximum
heating or maximum cooling functions on:
❒ HI Function (maximum heating):
select by turning the temperature knob clockwise
beyond the maximum value (32 °C).
IN AN
EMERGENCY
MAINTENANCE
AND CARE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
INDEX
55
KNOWING
YOUR CAR
SAFETY
STARTING
AND
DRIVING
This function may be used to heat up the passenger
compartment by exploiting the system’s potential to the
full. In this event, the system stops controlling the
temperature automatically and sets the air mixing to
maximum heating. The air speed and distribution are
fixed.
In particular, if the heating fluid is not sufficiently hot,
the maximum fan speed does not come on straight away
in order to limit the intake of insufficiently hot air to the
passenger compartment.
All manual settings will be allowed when this function
is on.
WARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGES
To switch the function off, simply turn the temperature
knob anticlockwise and set the required temperature.
IN AN
EMERGENCY
select by turning the temperature knob anticlockwise
beyond the minimum value (16 °C).
MAINTENANCE
AND CARE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
INDEX
56
❒ LO function (maximum cooling):
This function may be used to cool down the passenger
compartment by exploiting the system’s potential to the
full. In this event, the system stops controlling the
temperature automatically and sets the air mixing to
maximum cooling. The air speed and distribution are
fixed. All manual settings will be allowed when this
function is on.
To switch the function off, simply turn the temperature
knob clockwise and set the required temperature.
Air distribution buttons (B)
Press these buttons to manually set one
of the seven air distribution settings:
▲ Air flow to the windscreen and front side window
vents to demist or defrost the windows.
˙ Air flow to the central and side dashboard vents to
ventilate the chest and the face in hot weather.
▼ Air flow to the front and rear footwell vents. Thanks
to the natural tendency of hot air to rise, this
distribution pattern allows the passenger
compartment to warm up as quickly as possible,
providing an immediate feeling of warmth.
˙ Air flow distribution split between footwell vents
▼ (hotter air) and central and side dashboard vents
(cooler air). This distribution mode is particularly
useful in spring and autumn on sunny days.
▲ Air flow distribution split between the footwell vents
▼ and the windscreen and front side windows
defrosting/demisting vents. This allows an adequate
warming of the passenger compartment and
prevents the windows from steaming up.
▲ Air flow distribution split between the windscreen
˙ and front side windows defrosting/demisting vents
and the central and side dashboard vents. This
distribution makes it possible to maintain good levels
of comfort and keep the passenger compartment
sufficiently cool (useful in the summer).
▲ Air flow distribution split between the windscreen
˙ and front side windows defrosting/demisting vents,
▼ the central and side dashboard vents and the
footwell vents. This distribution allows good air
diffusion and maintains a good level of comfort both
in summer and winter.
The fan speed is shown by the bars lit up on the display:
❒ Max. fan speed = all bars lit;
❒ Min. fan speed = one bar lit.
The fan can be disabled only if the climate control
compressor has been switched off by pressing button
F-fig. 53.
IMPORTANT To restore automatic fan speed control
after a manual adjustment, press the AUTO button.
The distribution set is shown by the corresponding
LEDs on the selected buttons coming on.
IMPORTANT At high vehicle speeds, the dynamic effect
may increase the flow of air into the passenger
compartment, which in this case will not directly
correspond to the fan speed bar display.
To restore automatic control of the air distribution
after a manual selection, press the AUTO button.
AUTO button (A)
(automatic operation)
Speed adjustment buttons
fan (H)
Press the ends of button H to increase
or to decrease the fan speed and
therefore the amount of air introduced
into the passenger compartment, whilst
keeping the required temperature set.
When the AUTO button is pressed the
system automatically regulates the
quantity and the distribution of the air
introduced into the passenger
compartment cancelling all the previous
manual adjustments.
The message FULL AUTO will appear on the front
display in this condition.
By manually adjusting at least one of the functions
automatically managed by the system (air recirculation,
air distribution, fan speed or switching off the
compressor), the word FULL will disappear from the
display, indicating that the system is no longer
automatically controlling all the functions (the
temperature will still be controlled automatically).
KNOWING
YOUR CAR
SAFETY
STARTING
AND
DRIVING
WARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGES
IN AN
EMERGENCY
MAINTENANCE
AND CARE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
INDEX
57
KNOWING
YOUR CAR
SAFETY
STARTING
AND
DRIVING
WARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGES
IN AN
EMERGENCY
MAINTENANCE
AND CARE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
INDEX
58
IMPORTANT Should the system (after manual
intervention) no longer be able to guarantee the target
temperature for the passenger compartment, the set
temperature value will start flashing to indicate the
difficulties the system is experiencing and then the word
AUTO will go out.
To restore system automatic control at any time, after
one or more manual adjustments, press the AUTO
button.
Air recirculation on/off button (G)
The Air recirculation works according to
the following operating logics:
❒ override on (air recirculation always on), indicated
by the LED on the button G coming on and the
symbol í on the display;
❒ override off (air recirculation always off and
introduction of outside air), indicated by the LED
on the button going off and the symbol ê
appearing
on the display.
These operating conditions are obtained by pressing air
recirculation button G in sequence.
IMPORTANT The engagement of the air recirculation
system makes it possible to reach the required heating
or cooling conditions faster.
It is however not advised to use it on rainy/cold days as
it would considerably increase the possibility of the
windows steaming up, especially if the climate control
compressor is off.
To prevent steaming up, the recirculation is forced off
(i.e. air is introduced from the outside) when the the
outside temperature is cold.
It is advisable not to use the air recirculation function
when the outside temperature is low to prevent the
windows from rapidly misting up.
Climate control compressor on/off
button (F)
Pressing the √ button switches the
climate control compressor off, it if was
on previously and the logo in the display
goes out.
Press the button when the LED is off to restore
automatic system control of compressor activation.
The icon will light up on the display.
The system will switch recirculation off when the
compressor is switched off to prevent misting up.
Although the system is capable of maintaining the
required temperature, the word FULL will disappear
from the display. If the system is no longer able to
maintain the temperature, the figures will flash and the
word AUTO will go out.
IMPORTANT With the compressor off, it is not
possible to introduce air into the passenger
compartment at a temperature lower than that of the
outside air. In certain weather conditions, the windows
could mist up rapidly due to the non-dehumidified air.
The system remembers that the compressor has been
switched off, even after the engine has stopped.
To restore automatic compressor activation control,
press the √ button again (in this case, the system will
work only as a heater) or press the AUTO button.
With the compressor switched off, if the outside
temperature is higher than the one set, the system is
not capable of satisfying this request. This is signalled by
the target temperature flashing, after which the word
AUTO goes out.
With the climate control compressor off, the fan speed
can be set to zero manually (no bar shown).
With the compressor enabled and the engine started,
the fan speed may be reduced to the minimum setting
(only one bar shown).
Button for rapid window demisting/
defrosting (D)
When this button is pressed, the climate
control automatically activates all the
functions necessary to speed up the
demising/defrosting of the windscreen
and the side windows:
❒ turns on the climate control compressor when
weather conditions are suitable;
❒ air recirculation switching-off;
❒ sets the maximum temperature for the HI air in both
zones;
❒ sets the fan speed set according to the engine
coolant temperature to limit the flow of air that is
insufficiently warm to demist the windows;
❒ directs the air flow to the windscreen and front side
windows vents;
❒ switches on the heated rear window.
KNOWING
YOUR CAR
SAFETY
STARTING
AND
DRIVING
IMPORTANT The rapid demisting/defrosting function
for the windows remains on for about 3 minutes from
when the engine coolant reaches the appropriate
temperature for a rapid demisting of the windows.
WARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGES
When this function is active, the LED on the
corresponding button and the one on the heated rear
window button switch on. The message FULL AUTO
goes off on the display.
IN AN
EMERGENCY
You can only adjust the fan speed and switch off the
heated rear windscreen manually when this function is
active.
MAINTENANCE
AND CARE
To restore the operating conditions, prior to activation,
simply press button B, air recirculation button G, the
compressor button F or the
AUTO button A.
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
INDEX
59
KNOWING
YOUR CAR
IMPORTANT To ensure rapid demisting/defrosting,
if there is an additional heater/air conditioner (under the
front or rear seat on Panorama and Combi versions),
if activated, deactivate it by pressing button F (LED off)
located on the control panel fig. 54.
SAFETY
Switching off the system OFF (E)
(for versions/markets where provided)
On some versions, an additional heater is also present
beneath the driver’s seat. The fan for this heater is
operated by means of the button F located on the
control panel fig. 54.
The climate control system is switched
off by pressing button E and
the display switches off as a result.
STARTING
AND
DRIVING
WARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGES
ADDITIONAL HEATER
The following climate control conditions will be present
when the system is off:
❒ display off;
❒ set temperature not shown;
IN AN
EMERGENCY
❒ air recirculation on, passenger compartment isolated
from the outside (recirculation LED on);
❒ air conditioner compressor off;
MAINTENANCE
AND CARE
❒ fan off.
Press the AUTO button to switch the climate control
system back on in full automatic mode.
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
INDEX
60
fig. 54
F0N0500m
SUPPLEMENTARY HEATER
INDEPENDENT
PROGRAMMABLE VERSION
(for markets/versions, where provided)
The additional heater operates completely
independently of engine operation and allows the
following:
The vehicle is available, on request, with two different
independent heaters: one fully automatic, the other
which can be programmed.
❒ heating the vehicle passenger compartment with the
engine off;
AUTOMATIC VERSION
❒ heating the engine coolant and consequently the
engine itself prior to starting.
The additional heater is turned on in automatic mode
when the engine is started and the required outside
temperature and coolant conditions are present.
Deactivation is always automatic.
IMPORTANT During periods with low outdoor
temperatures when the device cuts in, check that the
fuel level is always higher than the reserve level.
Otherwise the device could lock and require the
assistance of a Fiat Dealership.
WARNING
The heater burns fuel in the same way
as the engine, though to a lesser extent.
To prevent poisoning and asphyxiation, the
supplementary heater must never be turned on,
even for short periods, in closed environments
such as a garage or workshops without
extraction fans for the exhaust gases.
KNOWING
YOUR CAR
SAFETY
❒ defrosting the windows;
The system consists of:
❒ a diesel burner to heat the water with an exhaust
silencer for the combustion gases;
❒ a metering pump connected to the vehicle tank
pipes, to supply the burner;
❒ a heat exchanger connected to the engine cooling
system pipes;
❒ a control unit connected to the passenger
compartment heating/ventilation system to allow
automatic operation;
❒ an electronic control unit for control and operation
of the burner in the heater;
❒ a digital timer A-fig. 55 for turning the heater on
manually or programming the time it comes on.
STARTING
AND
DRIVING
WARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGES
IN AN
EMERGENCY
MAINTENANCE
AND CARE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
INDEX
61
KNOWING
YOUR CAR
SAFETY
STARTING
AND
DRIVING
WARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGES
(In winter) the additional heater provides heat,
maintains the temperature and circulates the engine
coolant for the preset time in order to ensure the
optimum temperature conditions of the engine and the
passenger compartment when the engine is started up.
The heater can operate automatically when
programmed with a digital timer or manually by pressing
the “immediate heating” button on the timer.
After heater activation, either programmed or manual,
the electronic control unit operates the liquid
circulation pump and ignites the burner in accordance
with the preset, controlled procedures.
The circulation pump output is also controlled by the
electronic control unit in order to minimise the initial
heating time.
IN AN
EMERGENCY
When the system operates, the control unit turns on
the passenger compartment heater unit fan at the
second speed.
The thermal power of the boiler is regulated
automatically by the electronic control unit depending
on the temperature of the engine coolant.
IMPORTANT The heater is equipped with a thermal
limiter that cuts off combustion in the case of
overheating due to insufficient coolant/coolant leaks. In
this case, after repairing the fault in the cooling system
and/or topping up the fluid, press the program selection
button before turning the heater back on.
The heater can turn off spontaneously due to misfiring
after start-up or because the flame goes out during
operation. In this case, carry out the turning off
procedure and try to turn the heater back on. If it still
does not work, consult a Fiat Dealership.
Activation of the heating system
When an automatic climate control system is present,
the control unit sets the air temperature and
distribution when the heater is turned on from the park
position. When a manual heater/climate control is
present, to obtain maximum heater efficiency, check
that the passenger compartment heating/ventilation
temperature adjustment knob is in the ‘hot air’ position.
MAINTENANCE
AND CARE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
To prioritise passenger compartment pre-heating, set
the air distribution knob to the © position.
INDEX
62
fig. 55
F0N0150m
To prioritise windscreen demisting, set the air
distribution knob to the - position.
Immediate activation of heating fig. 57
To obtain both functions, set the air distribution knob
to the ® position.
To switch the system on manually, press the button 8 of
the timer: the display and warning light 1 will light up
and remain on the entire time the system is working.
Digital timer fig. 56
Programmed activation of heating
1) Heating cycle warning light
Before programming system activation, it is essential to
set the time.
2) Display lighting
SAFETY
3) Clock preselection recall number
Setting the current time
4) Clock button
❒ Press button 4: the display and the warning light
9-fig. 58 will come on.
5) Hour forward adjustment button
6) Program selection button
❒ Within 10 seconds, press buttons 5 or 7 until the
correct time is selected.
7) Hour back adjustment button
When the display goes off, the current time is stored.
8) Activation button for immediate heating
Continuing to press the buttons 5 or 7 will move the
digits on the clock forwards or backwards faster.
9) Time adjustment/reading warning light
KNOWING
YOUR CAR
STARTING
AND
DRIVING
WARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGES
IN AN
EMERGENCY
MAINTENANCE
AND CARE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
INDEX
fig. 56
F0N0151m
fig. 57
F0N0152m
63
Reading the current time fig. 58
KNOWING
YOUR CAR
SAFETY
STARTING
AND
DRIVING
WARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGES
To read the current time, press the button 4: the time
will appear on the display for about 10 seconds and
warning light 9 will come on at the same time.
Programming the activation time fig. 59
Activation can be programmed with an advance of
between 1 minute and 24 hours. Three different
activation times may be selected, but only one one can
be activated for each pre-heating cycle.
IMPORTANT If you wish to recall other preselected
times, press button 6 from time to time within
10 seconds.
– within 10 seconds, press the buttons 5 or 7 to select
the desired switching on time.
IMPORTANT Confirmation that the time has been
stored is given by:
❒ the disappearance of the activation time;
❒ the presence of preselection number 3;
To program the activation time:
❒ the lighting of the display.
❒ press the button 6: the symbol 10 or the time set
previously and the number 3 corresponding to the
preselection recalled will light up in the display for
10 seconds.
IMPORTANT When the boiler turns on:
❒ the flame warning light 1 lights up in the display;
❒ the preselection number 3 goes out.
IN AN
EMERGENCY
MAINTENANCE
AND CARE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
INDEX
64
fig. 58
F0N0153m
fig. 59
F0N0154m
Deactivation of the programmed activation time
fig. 59
To delete the programmed activation time, press button
6 briefly: the display lighting will go off and the number 3
relating to the preselected time will disappear.
Recall of one of the programmed activation
times fig. 60
Press the button 6 as many times as necessary until the
number 3 corresponding to the desired programmed
activation time appears on the display. After 10 seconds,
the time will disappear from the display and remain
stored and the number 3 will light up in the display.
IMPORTANT The preselected activation time can be
changed or deleted by following the above instructions.
Switching the heating system off
Deactivation of the system, depending on the type of
activation (automatic or manual), may be:
The fluid circulation pump continues to work for
around two minutes to dissipate as much heat as
possible from the heater; the heater can be turned back
on during this stage.
KNOWING
YOUR CAR
SAFETY
WARNING
The heater burns fuel in the same way
as the engine, though to a lesser extent.
To prevent poisoning and asphyxiation, the
supplementary heater must never be turned on,
even for short periods, in closed environments
such as a garage or workshops without
extraction fans for the exhaust gases.
IMPORTANT When parked the heater switches off
when the battery voltage is low to allow the engine to
be started up.
❒ automatic, at the end of the preset activation time
(60 minutes with lighting of the red display);
STARTING
AND
DRIVING
WARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGES
IN AN
EMERGENCY
MAINTENANCE
AND CARE
❒ manual pressing the “immediate heating” button on
the timer again (flame button 1).
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
In both cases the heating warning light and the display
lighting go out and the passenger compartment heater
unit fan and the combustion stop.
INDEX
fig. 60
F0N0155m
65
KNOWING
YOUR CAR
SAFETY
STARTING
AND
DRIVING
WARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGES
IN AN
EMERGENCY
MAINTENANCE
AND CARE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
IMPORTANT Before switching the device on, check
that the fuel level is higher than the reserve level.
Otherwise the device could lock and require the
assistance of a Fiat Dealership.
❒ Always turn off the heater when refuelling and near
service stations to avoid the risk of explosion or fire
hazards.
MAINTENANCE
Have the additional heater checked regularly at a Fiat
Dealership (and always at the start of every winter).
This will guarantee safe and economic operation of the
heater as well as a long duration.
❒ Do not park the vehicle on inflammable material
such as paper, grass or dry leaves: fire hazard!
ADDITIONAL REAR HEATING
(Panorama and Combi)
(for versions/markets, where provided)
❒ The temperature near the heater should not exceed
120 °C (e.g. during stove painting in a body shop).
The electronic control unit components may be
damaged at higher temperatures.
The Panorama and Combi versions have a main heating
system plus an additional one (on request) with the
controls in the roof lining above the second row of
seats, fig. 61.
❒ Whilst the heater is operating with the engine
switched off, it absorbs energy from the battery; the
engine should therefore be left running for a while to
make sure that the battery is properly recharged.
❒ To check the coolant level, follow the instructions in
the “Vehicle maintenance” chapter in the “Engine
coolant system fluid” paragraph. The water in the
heating circuit must contain a minimum percentage
of 10% antifreeze.
❒ For maintenance and repairs, only contact Fiat
Dealerships and only use genuine spare parts.
INDEX
66
fig. 61
F0N0233m
Operation must be enabled using the button F-fig. 62 in
the control panel.
❒ Turn the knob D to the maximum cold position (ring
nut at blue sector) and air at ambient temperature
will come out of the rear footwell vents (located
under the seats in the 2nd–3rd row for Panorama
versions and the grille on the left wheel arch side for
Combi versions);
❒ Turn the knob D to the maximum heating position
(ring nut at red sector) and warm air will emerge
(with the engine warmed up), from the rear footwell
outlets (located under the seats in the 2nd–3rd row
for Panorama versions and the grille on the left wheel
arch side for Combi versions).
ADDITIONAL REAR CLIMATE CONTROL
(Panorama and Combi)
(for versions/markets, where provided)
The Panorama and Combi versions are equipped with
a main heating/air conditioning system plus an additional
system (available on request) with controls in the roof
lining above the second row of seats, fig. 61.
Button F-fig. 62 in the control panel must be enabled for
operation; the air conditioning only works if the main air
conditioner is on.
❒ When the knob D is placed in the fully cold position
(ring nut in blue sector) cold air comes out of the
vents in the ceiling.
❒ Turn the knob D to the maximum heating position
(ring nut at red sector) and warm air will emerge
(with the engine warmed up), from the rear footwell
outlets (located under the seats in the 2nd–3rd row
for Panorama versions and the grille on the left
wheel arch side for Combi versions).
❒ When the knob D is in an intermediate position, air
will be distributed between the vents in the roof and
the rear footwell outlets to alter the temperature.
IMPORTANT If the compressor on the main air
conditioner control is turned on (operation of button
E), even if the additional air conditioner fan is in position
0, the 1st speed will automatically be activated to
prevent ice formation, with possible damage to the
component.
fig. 62
F0N0500m
KNOWING
YOUR CAR
SAFETY
STARTING
AND
DRIVING
WARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGES
IN AN
EMERGENCY
MAINTENANCE
AND CARE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
INDEX
67
KNOWING
YOUR CAR
EXTERNAL LIGHTS
WARNING
The left lever includes the controls for the exterior lights.
The exterior lights can only be switched on when the
ignition key is in the ON position.
SAFETY
STARTING
AND
DRIVING
WARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGES
IN AN
EMERGENCY
LIGHTS OFF fig. 63
Ring nut turned to position O.
DAYTIME RUNNING LIGHTS (DRL) fig. 63
(for versions/markets where provided)
With the ignition key turned to MAR and the twist switch
turned to position O the daytime running lights are
automatically activated; the other lights and interior
lighting remain off. The automatic operation of the
daytime running lights can be activated/deactivated via the
display menu (see “Digital/multifunction display” in this
section). If the daytime running lights are deactivated, no
light comes on when the twist switch is turned to O.
The daytime running lights are an
alternative to the dipped headlamps for
driving during the daytime in countries where it is
compulsory to have lights on during the day, and
they are also permitted in those countries where
this not obligatory. Daytime running lights cannot
replace dipped headlamps when driving at night or
through tunnels. The use of daytime running lights
is governed by the highway code of the country in
which you are driving. Keep to the rules.
DIPPED HEADLAMPS/SIDE LIGHTS fig. 64
With the ignition key turned to MAR, turn the twist switch
to 2. If dipped headlamps are activated, the daytime lights
go out and the side lights and dipped headlamps come on.
The warning light 3 in the instrument panel comes on. When
the ignition key is turned to STOP or removed and the twist
switch is turned from O to 2, all the side lights and number
plate lights come on. The warning light 3 in the instrument
panel comes on.
MAINTENANCE
AND CARE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
INDEX
68
fig. 63
F0N0501m
fig. 64
F0N0502m
MAIN BEAM HEADLIGHTS fig. 65
DIRECTION INDICATORS fig. 67
When the ring nut is in position 2 pull the lever
towards the steering wheel (2nd unstable position).
The warning light 1 on the instrument panel will come on.
To turn the main beam headlights off, pull the lever
again towards the steering wheel (the dipped beams will
turn on again).
Place the lever in the (stable) position:
❒ up (position 1): activation of right direction indicator;
❒ down (position 2): activation of left direction
indicator.
KNOWING
YOUR CAR
SAFETY
STARTING
AND
DRIVING
FLASHING fig. 66
Pull the lever towards the steering wheel (1st unstable
position) regardless of the position of the ring nut. The
warning light 1 on the instrument panel will come on.
PARKING LIGHTS
WARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGES
These lights can only be turned on with ignition key in
the STOP position or removed, by moving the left lever
ring nut first to O and then to 6 or 2.
IN AN
EMERGENCY
The warning light 3 in the instrument panel comes on.
fig. 66
F0N0504m
MAINTENANCE
AND CARE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
INDEX
fig. 65
F0N0503m
fig. 67
F0N00505m
69
KNOWING
YOUR CAR
SAFETY
STARTING
AND
DRIVING
WARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGES
Warning light F or D start flashing in the instrument
panel.
Direction indicators are switched off automatically when
the steering wheel of the vehicle is straightened.
Lane change function
If you wish to signal a lane change, place the left lever in
the unstable position for less than half a second. The
direction indicator on the side selected will flash five
times and then switch off automatically.
“FOLLOW ME HOME” DEVICE
This device allows the illumination of the space in front
of the vehicle for a preset time.
IN AN
EMERGENCY
Activation fig. 68
With the ignition key in the OFF position or extracted,
pull the lever towards the steering wheel and operate
the lever within 2 minutes of switching the engine off.
Each time the lever is operated the lights will stay on
another 30 seconds, up to a maximum of 210 seconds;
when this time has elapsed, the lights will go out
automatically.
The warning light 3 on the instrument panel will light
up and the corresponding message will appear in the
display (see “Warning lights and messages”) for as long
as the function is activated. The warning light comes on
when the lever is operated and stays on until the
function is automatically deactivated. Each movement of
the lever only increases the amount of time the lights
stay on.
Deactivation
Keep the lever pulled towards the steering wheel for
more than 2 seconds.
MAINTENANCE
AND CARE
AUTOMATIC HEADLIGHT SENSOR
(dusk sensor)
(for versions/markets, where provided)
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
It detects variations in brightness outside the vehicle
depending on the light sensitivity setting: the greater the
sensitivity, the less outside light needed to activate the
exterior lights being turned on. The sensitivity of the
dusk sensor is adjusted by means of the “Setup menu”
for the display.
INDEX
70
fig. 68
F0N0506m
WINDOW WASHING
Activation fig. 69
Turn the ring nut to position 2: this turns the side
lights and the dipped headlights on automatically
depending on the exterior brightness conditions.
WINDSCREEN WASHER/WIPER
KNOWING
YOUR CAR
The device can operate only when the ignition key is in
the MAR-ON position. There are five different positions
for the right lever fig. 70:
SAFETY
A
Deactivation
The main beam headlights will go out followed by
the side lights after approximately 10 seconds, when
the sensor is deactivated.
STARTING
AND
DRIVING
The sensor cannot detect the presence of fog: switch
the lights on manually in this case.
WARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGES
IN AN
EMERGENCY
MAINTENANCE
AND CARE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
INDEX
fig. 69
F0N0507m
fig. 70
F0N0038m
71
KNOWING
YOUR CAR
SAFETY
STARTING
AND
DRIVING
WARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGES
IN AN
EMERGENCY
MAINTENANCE
AND CARE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
INDEX
72
A: windscreen wipers off;
“Smart washing” function
B: intermittent operation.
With the lever in position B, turn ring nut F to select
one of four different speeds for the intermittent
operation mode:
, = very slow intermittent operation
-- = slow intermittent operation
--- = medium intermittent operation
---- = fast intermittent operation
C: continuous slow operation;
D: continuous fast operation;
E: temporary fast operation (unstable position).
Temporary fast operation in position E is limited to the
time that the lever is manually held in this position. The
lever returns to position A when it is released,
automatically stopping the windscreen wipers.
IMPORTANT Replace the wiper blades as specified in
the “Maintenance and care” section.
Pull the lever towards the steering wheel (unstable
position) to operate the windscreen washer jet, fig. 71.
Keeping the lever pulled for more than half a second,
with just one movement it is possible to operate the
washer jet and the wiper at the same time.
The wipers stop operating four strokes after releasing
the lever.
A stroke 5 seconds later completes the wiping
operation.
Never use the windscreen wipers to
remove layers of snow or ice from the
windscreen. In such conditions, the
windscreen wipers may be subjected to excessive
stress and the motor protection which prevents
operation for a few seconds may trip. If the
operation is not restored, contact a Fiat
Dealership.
fig. 71
F0N0039m
RAIN SENSOR
(for versions/markets where provided)
The rain sensor is located behind the rear view mirror
in contact with the windscreen and has the purpose of
automatically adjusting the frequency of the windscreen
wiper strokes depending on the intensity of the rain
during intermittent operation.
IMPORTANT Keep the glass in the sensor area clean.
Activation fig. 70
Move the right lever down by one click (position B).
Deactivation fig. 70
Move the lever from position B or turn the ignition key
to OFF. The next time the vehicle is started (ignition
key in ON position), the sensor is not reactivated even
if the lever is still in position B. To activate the sensor,
move the lever to position A or C and then back to
position B or turn the ring nut for adjusting the
sensitivity. Rain sensor activation will be indicated by at
least one wiper “stroke” even if the windscreen is dry.
The rain sensor is capable of recognising the difference
between day and night and making the necessary
adjustments automatically.
The activation of the sensor is signalled by a “stroke” to
show that the command has been acquired.
Turn the control F to increase the rain sensor
sensitivity.
The increasing of the rain sensor sensitivity is signalled
by a “stroke” to show that the command has been
acquired.
If the windscreen washer is used with the rain sensor
activated, the normal washing cycle is performed, after
which the rain sensor resumes its normal automatic
operation.
WARNING
Streaks of water may cause unnecessary
blade movements.
KNOWING
YOUR CAR
SAFETY
STARTING
AND
DRIVING
WARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGES
IN AN
EMERGENCY
HEADLIGHT WASHERS
(for versions/markets where provided)
MAINTENANCE
AND CARE
The headlight washers are “retractable”, i.e.: they are
located inside the front bumper and they are activated
when (with dipped beams on) the windscreen washer is
operated.
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
IMPORTANT Check the correct operation and
cleanliness of the jets at regular intervals.
INDEX
73
KNOWING
YOUR CAR
SAFETY
STARTING
AND
DRIVING
CRUISE CONTROL
(for versions/markets where provided)
This is an electronic driving aid that allows you to drive
at a speed of above 30 km/h on long and straight dry
roads with few driving changes (e.g. motorways) at
a preset speed without having to press the accelerator
pedal. It is therefore not recommended to use this
device on country roads with traffic.
Do not use it in town.
DEVICE ACTIVATION fig. 72
WARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGES
Turn the ring nut A to the ON position.
The Cruise Control cannot be engaged in 1st or reverse
gear. It is advisable to engage it in 4th or higher gears.
IN AN
EMERGENCY
STORING VEHICLE SPEED
Proceed as follows:
❒ turn ring nut A to ON and press the accelerator
pedal so that the vehicle reaches the desired speed;
❒ move the lever upwards (+) for at least one second,
then release it. The car speed is memorised and it is
therefore possible to release the accelerator pedal.
If necessary (when overtaking for instance) acceleration
is possible by simply pressing the accelerator pedal:
releasing the accelerator pedal, the car will return to the
speed memorised previously.
RESTORING THE MEMORISED SPEED
If the device has been switched off, for example by
depressing the brake or clutch pedal, the memorised
speed can be restored as follows:
❒ accelerate gradually until reaching a speed
approaching the memorised speed;
❒ engage the gear selected at the time of speed
memorising;
❒ press the button B-fig. 72.
MAINTENANCE
AND CARE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
INDEX
74
When travelling downhill with the device engaged, the
vehicle speed may slightly exceed the memorised one.
When the device is activated the warning light Ü comes
on together with the relevant message on the
instrument panel.
fig. 72
F0N0508m
INCREASING THE MEMORISED SPEED
SWITCHING THE DEVICE OFF
This can be done in two ways:
The device can be switched off by the driver in the
following ways:
❒ by pressing the accelerator and then memorising the
new speed reached;
❒ turning the ring nut A to the OFF position;
or
❒ turning the engine off;
❒ by moving the lever upwards (+).
❒ pressing the brake pedal or operating the handbrake;
Each operation of the lever will correspond to a slight
increase in speed of about 1 km/h, while keeping the
lever upwards will correspond to a continuous speed
increase.
❒ pressing the clutch pedal;
REDUCING THE MEMORISED SPEED
❒ by pressing the accelerator pedal; in this case the
system is not really switched off but the request for
acceleration takes priority over the system. The
cruise control is, however, active and it will not be
necessary to press the RES button to restore the
previous conditions after the acceleration is over.
This can be done in two ways:
❒ by turning the device off and then storing a new
speed;
or
❒ by moving the stalk downwards (–) until reaching the
new speed which will be memorised automatically.
Each movement of the lever will correspond to a slight
reduction in speed of about 1 km/h, while keeping the
lever held downwards will correspond to a continuous
speed reduction.
❒ requesting a gear change with an automatic gearbox
in sequential mode;
❒ with vehicle speed below the set limit;
The device is automatically switched off in the following
cases:
❒ if the ABS or ESP systems cut in;
KNOWING
YOUR CAR
SAFETY
STARTING
AND
DRIVING
WARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGES
IN AN
EMERGENCY
MAINTENANCE
AND CARE
❒ if there is a system failure.
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
INDEX
75
KNOWING
YOUR CAR
WARNING
While travelling with the device
engaged, do not place the gear lever in
neutral.
SAFETY
STARTING
AND
DRIVING
WARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGES
WARNING
In case of malfunctioning or if the device
is faulty, turn the ring nut A to OFF and
contact a Fiat Dealership, after checking that
the protective fuse has not blown.
CEILING LIGHTS
FRONT CEILING COURTESY LIGHT WITH
SPOT LIGHTS
Switch A-fig. 73 is used to switch the ceiling courtesy
lights on/off. With the switch A in the middle position,
the lights C and D go on/off when front doors are
opened/closed. With switch A pressed to the left, the
lights C and D are always off. With switch A pressed to
the right, the lights C and D are always on. Lights switch
on/off progressively.
The switch B is a spot light; when the ceiling light is off,
it switches the following on individually:
❒ light C if pressed on the left side;
❒ light D if pressed on the right side.
IN AN
EMERGENCY
MAINTENANCE
AND CARE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
INDEX
76
fig. 73
F0N0041m
IMPORTANT Before getting out of the car, make sure
both switches are in the middle position; when the
doors are closed, the lights switch off preventing the
battery from being run down.
❒ when opening one of the side doors for about
3 minutes;
❒ when one of the doors is closed for a period of
about 10 seconds.
KNOWING
YOUR CAR
In any case, if the switch is left in on position, the
courtesy light switches off automatically 15 minutes
after the engine switching off.
The timed delay period ends automatically when the
doors are locked.
SAFETY
Courtesy light timing
On some versions, to facilitate getting in/out of the
vehicle at night or with poor lighting, 2 different timed
switching on modes are available.
LOAD COMPARTMENT REAR COURTESY
LIGHT fig. 74
This is located above the rear door. Press the cover at
the point shown in the figure to turn it on.
STARTING
AND
DRIVING
WARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGES
TIMED OPERATION FOR GETTING INTO
THE VEHICLE
The courtesy lights switch on according to the following
modes:
❒ for about 10 seconds when unlocking the front
doors;
❒ for about 3 minutes when opening one of the side
doors;
❒ for about 10 seconds when closing the doors.
IN AN
EMERGENCY
MAINTENANCE
AND CARE
The timed period is interrupted when the ignition is
turned to “MAR-ON“.
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
TIMED OPERATION FOR GETTING OUT OF THE
VEHICLE
After removing the key from the ignition, the courtesy
lights switch on according to the following modes:
❒ within 2 minutes from turning the engine off for
about 10 seconds;
INDEX
fig. 74
F0N0042m
77
KNOWING
YOUR CAR
LOAD COMPARTMENT SIDE COURTESY
LIGHT fig. 75
(for versions/markets where provided)
Press the cover at the point shown in the figure to turn
it on.
SAFETY
STARTING
AND
DRIVING
REMOVABLE COURTESY LIGHT fig. 76
(for versions/markets where provided)
It is used as both a fixed light and a portable electric
torch. When the removable light is secured to its fixed
support, the electric torch battery is automatically
recharged. The courtesy light is recharged with the
vehicle stationary and the ignition key either in the
STOP position (OFF) or extracted for a limit of
15 minutes.
WARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGES
IN AN
EMERGENCY
MAINTENANCE
AND CARE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
INDEX
78
fig. 75
F0N0219m
fig. 76
F0N0220m
CONTROLS
HAZARD WARNING LIGHTS fig. 77
They are turned on by pressing switch A, regardless of
the position of the ignition key.
With the device on, warning lights Î and ¥ light up in
the instrument panel.
Press the switch again to turn the lights off.
The use of hazard lights is governed by the Highway
Code of the country you are in. Comply with legal
requirements.
Emergency braking
During emergency braking, the hazard warning lights
come on automatically and warning lights Î and ¥ in
the panel come on at the same time.
The function switches off automatically when emergency
braking ceases.
This function complies with the relevant legislations
currently in force.
KNOWING
YOUR CAR
SAFETY
FOG LIGHTS fig. 78
(for versions/markets where provided)
To turn the front fog lights on, press the button 5 with
the side lights on.
The warning light 5 in the instrument panel will come on.
Press the button again to turn the lights off.
The use of fog lights is governed by the highway code of
the country you are in. Comply with legal requirements.
STARTING
AND
DRIVING
WARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGES
IN AN
EMERGENCY
MAINTENANCE
AND CARE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
INDEX
fig. 77
F0N0044m
fig. 78
F0N0045m
79
KNOWING
YOUR CAR
SAFETY
STARTING
AND
DRIVING
REAR FOG LAMPS fig. 79
These lights come on, with the dipped headlights on or
with the side lights and fog lights on (for versions/markets
where provided) by pressing the button 4. The warning
light 4 in the instrument panel will come on. Press the
button again to turn the lights off, or turn off the dipped
beams and/or the front fog lights (where provided). The
use of rear fog lamps is governed by the Highway Code of
the country you are in. Comply with legal requirements.
HEATED REAR WINDSCREEN fig. 80
(for versions/markets where provided)
Press button A to turn this function on. It will turn off
automatically after about 20 minutes.
BATTERY DISCONNECTION FUNCTION
(DISCONNECT SWITCH)
(for versions/markets where provided)
WARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGES
IN AN
EMERGENCY
fig. 79
F0N0046m
MAINTENANCE
AND CARE
The battery disconnection function is enabled with the
ignition key in the BATT position, as illustrated on the
dedicated plate located in the area illustrated in fig. 81.
To turn the ignition key to the BATT position, press the
button A (red) fig. 82. The battery will be disconnected,
by interrupting the earth lead, about 45 seconds after
the key is turned to the BATT position.
This 45 second period is necessary to:
❒ allow the driver to get out of the vehicle and lock
the doors using the remote control;
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
❒ guarantee that all the vehicle electrical systems have
been deactivated.
With the battery disconnected, access to the vehicle will
only be possible by unlocking the driver’s door using the
mechanical lock.
INDEX
80
PARKING LIGHTS
These lights can only be turned on with ignition key in
the STOP position or removed, by turning the control
on the left lever first to O and then to position 6 or
2. The warning light 3 on the instrument panel
comes on.
fig. 80
F0N0043m
To restore the battery connection, insert the ignition
key and turn it to the MAR-ON position, the vehicle can
be started normally at this point.
The battery may have to be disconnected to set up
certain new electric devices (e.g. clock, date, etc.).
DOOR LOCK fig. 83-84
To lock all doors at the same time, press button A,
located on the centre console control panel, regardless
of the position of the ignition key. To unlock the doors,
press button B. There is a button D on the window
opening panel that controls the independent
unlocking/locking of the load compartment.
KNOWING
YOUR CAR
SAFETY
STARTING
AND
DRIVING
WARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGES
IN AN
EMERGENCY
fig. 81
F0N0811m
fig. 83
F0N0047m
MAINTENANCE
AND CARE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
INDEX
fig. 82
F0N0810m
fig. 84
F0N0132m
81
KNOWING
YOUR CAR
ELECTRICAL POWER SUPPLY AND
FUEL CUT OFF SWITCH
WARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGES
The vehicle is fitted with a safety switch that, in the
event of a crash, comes into operation by cutting off the
fuel supply and turning off the engine as a consequence.
When the inertia switch cuts in, this cuts off the fuel
supply and also activates the hazard warning lights, side
lights and courtesy lights while releasing all the doors
and displaying a message; they are deactivated by
pressing button A. An additional safety switch is also
present that is activated in the event of impact to cut off
the electrical supply. In this way, fuel is prevented from
escaping if the pipes are broken as well as the formation
of sparks or electrical discharges following damage to
the vehicle electrical components.
IN AN
EMERGENCY
IMPORTANT After an accident, remember to remove
the key from the ignition device to avoid draining the
battery. If no fuel leaks or damage to vehicle electrical
SAFETY
STARTING
AND
DRIVING
MAINTENANCE
AND CARE
WARNING
If, after a crash, you smell fuel or see
leaks from the fuel system, do not reset
the switches to avoid the risk of fire.
Reactivating the fuel cut-off switch fig. 85
Press the button A to reactivate the fuel cut off switch.
devices (e.g. headlights) are detected after the impact and the
vehicle is able to set off again, reactivate the automatic fuel
cut off and electrical supply switches (for versions/markets
where provided) following the procedure described below.
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
INDEX
82
fig. 85
F0N0048m
Reactivating the electrical supply cut-off switch
(School bus/Minibus) fig. 86
The switch is located on the positive battery terminal.
To reactivate the electrical supply switch, proceed as
follows:
WARNING
Before reactivating the electricity supply
switch, carefully check for fuel leaks
or damage to the vehicle electrical devices
(e.g. headlights).
KNOWING
YOUR CAR
SAFETY
❒ press the button A to reset the fuel cut off switch;
❒ press button B to reset the electrical supply switch.
WARNING
Before reactivating the fuel cut off
switch, carefully check for fuel leaks
or damage to vehicle electrical devices
(e.g. headlights).
IMPORTANT On versions other than the School
bus/Minibus, button B is replaced by a dedicated fuse;
to replace it contact a Fiat Dealership.
STARTING
AND
DRIVING
WARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGES
IN AN
EMERGENCY
MAINTENANCE
AND CARE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
INDEX
fig. 86
F0N0127m
83
KNOWING
YOUR CAR
SAFETY
STARTING
AND
DRIVING
INTERIOR FITTINGS
GLOVE COMPARTMENT fig. 88
UPPER GLOVE COMPARTMENT
– REFRIGERATED COMPARTMENT fig.87
(for versions/markets where provided)
To open the glove compartment, operate the opening
handle A.
To use, lift the flap as shown in the figure.
If air conditioned, the compartment, equipped with
a bottle holder, may be cooled/heated by means of an
outlet connected to the climate control system.
WARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGES
IN AN
EMERGENCY
MAINTENANCE
AND CARE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
INDEX
84
fig. 87
F0N0049m
fig. 88
F0N0050m
LOCKABLE GLOVE COMPARTMENT fig. 89
GLOVE COMPARTMENT
Turn the key clockwise/anticlockwise to lock/unlock the
lock. To open the glove compartment, use the opening
handle. The compartment is big enough to hold a laptop
The glove compartment A-fig. 90 is located in the
middle of the dashboard.
computer.
The glove compartment B-fig. 91 is located on the right
of the dashboard above the glove compartment.
KNOWING
YOUR CAR
SAFETY
STARTING
AND
DRIVING
WARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGES
IN AN
EMERGENCY
fig. 90
F0N0511m
MAINTENANCE
AND CARE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
INDEX
fig. 89
F0N0051m
fig. 91
F0N0053m
85
DOOR POCKETS fig. 92
KNOWING
YOUR CAR
There are oddment/map pockets located in each of the
door panels.
COMPARTMENT BENEATH
PASSENGER SIDE FRONT SEAT fig. 93
Proceed as follows to use the compartment:
❒ open the flap A and remove it as illustrated;
❒ turn the lock knob B anticlockwise and remove it to
allow the removal of the compartment.
SAFETY
STARTING
AND
DRIVING
WARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGES
IN AN
EMERGENCY
MAINTENANCE
AND CARE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
INDEX
86
fig. 92
F0N0128m
fig. 93
F0N0134m
REAR PARTITION fig. 94
CUP HOLDER – CAN HOLDER fig. 95
The vehicle may be equipped with a solid rear partition
or with a sliding glass partition.
The cup – can holder is located in the middle of the
dashboard.
KNOWING
YOUR CAR
To open/close the sliding glass partition use the knob A.
Certain versions are equipped with a protective grille on
the glass partition inside the load compartment.
SAFETY
STARTING
AND
DRIVING
WARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGES
IN AN
EMERGENCY
MAINTENANCE
AND CARE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
INDEX
fig. 94
F0N0218m
fig. 95
F0N0054m
87
KNOWING
YOUR CAR
SAFETY
STARTING
AND
DRIVING
WARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGES
CIGAR LIGHTER fig. 96
ASHTRAY fig. 97
It is located in the centre of the dashboard.
The ashtray is a removable plastic container that can be
fitted in the cup/can holders in the middle of the
dashboard.
Press the button on the cigar lighter to switch it on
when the ignition key is turned to MAR-ON.
After about 15 seconds the button will return to its
original position and the cigar lighter is ready for use.
IMPORTANT Do not use the container as an ashtray
and a waste paper basket at the same time: it might
catch fire in contact with cigarette stubs.
IMPORTANT Always check that the cigar lighter has
turned off.
WARNING
The cigar lighter gets very hot. Handle it
carefully and make sure children don’t
touch it: risk of fire and/or burning.
IN AN
EMERGENCY
MAINTENANCE
AND CARE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
INDEX
88
fig. 96
F0N0055m
fig. 97
F0N0146m
SUN VISORS fig. 98
They are located at the sides of the internal rear view
mirror.
They can be adjusted forwards and sideways.
A vanity mirror is fitted on the passenger side sun visor
on all versions.
POWER SOCKET fig. 99
(for versions/markets where provided)
The cigar lighter and the power socket are located in
the centre console.
To use it, open cap A.
KNOWING
YOUR CAR
SAFETY
STARTING
AND
DRIVING
WARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGES
IN AN
EMERGENCY
MAINTENANCE
AND CARE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
INDEX
fig. 98
F0N0056m
fig. 99
F0N0057m
89
KNOWING
YOUR CAR
SAFETY
STARTING
AND
DRIVING
WARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGES
DESK/BOOKREST fig. 100
(for versions/markets where provided)
SHELF ABOVE THE CAB fig. 101
(for versions/markets where provided)
There is a desk A in the middle of the dashboard above
the sound system compartment; on some versions this
desk can be used as a bookrest by raising the back
section and resting it on the dashboard as illustrated in
the figure.
This is located above the driver’s cab and is designed to
store light objects.
On versions with passenger side air bags, the desk is
fixed.
Maximum permitted load:
– localised .........................................................................10 kg
– distributed over the entire surface of the shelf ....20 kg
WARNING
Do not use the desk in a vertical position
with the vehicle in motion.
IN AN
EMERGENCY
MAINTENANCE
AND CARE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
INDEX
90
fig. 100
F0N0058m
fig. 101
F0N0190m
CAB GLOVE COMPARTMENT fig. 102
(for versions/markets where provided)
The storage compartment is fitted above the sun visors
and is designed for the quick storage of light objects
(e.g. documents, road maps etc.).
Portable navigators to be fitted in the seat
in figure 104 have a mechanical release
device activated by pressing the two side
buttons on the stem. The failed operation of the
release may damage the seat of the navigator.
KNOWING
YOUR CAR
SAFETY
FLAP ON BENCH fig. 103
(for versions/markets where provided)
STARTING
AND
DRIVING
To use, the pull tab A and lower the flap.
The flap is equipped with two cup holders and a support
surface with a paper holder clip.
WARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGES
SATELLITE NAVIGATOR CAPABILITY fig. 104
(for versions/markets where provided)
This is located in the dashboard area illustrated in the
diagram for connecting the navigator.
IN AN
EMERGENCY
fig. 103
F0N0149m
MAINTENANCE
AND CARE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
INDEX
fig. 102
F0N0191m
fig. 104
F0N0512m
91
TV CAMERA SYSTEM
AND REAR VISIBILITY DISPLAY
(for versions/markets where provided)
The rear view display is adjusted in mirror mode. When
not in use, it must be closed in the upper oddments
compartment console area.
ACTIVATION
SAFETY
The parking TV camera system fig. 105 allows the driver
a view of the scene behind the vehicle by means of
a display A-fig. 106 in the passenger compartment.
STARTING
AND
DRIVING
The system consists of a TV camera installed in a plastic
casing on the rear roof crossmember, which also
includes a third brake light and a display in a plastic
casing housed in the upper glove compartment console
area.
KNOWING
YOUR CAR
WARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGES
The display has buttons (On/Off, brightness, backlight);
to use them, operate the release button and move to
the open position.
The system is activated with the ignition on and reverse
engaged or by means of a dedicated button. If the
vehicle is in motion, e.g. during a reversing manoeuvre,
the system will operate up to a speed of 15 km/h and go
off when a speed of approximately 18 km/h is exceeded.
When reverse is deactivated, the image will appear on
the display for a further 5 seconds.
IN AN
EMERGENCY
MAINTENANCE
AND CARE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
INDEX
92
fig. 105
F0N0217m
fig. 106
F0N0214m
GENERAL WARNINGS
Notes on use
Area of visibility
To clean the TV camera, it is advisable to use a nonabrasive cloth when the protective glass is dirty or iced
over (on the outside). It is absolutely necessary to avoid
using any tool for cleaning as this could scratch the glass.
The area of visibility may vary according to the vehicle
position (full load condition included), according to the
vehicle specification and according to weather
conditions (high brightness, rain, snow and fog). Visibility
may be reduced during poor lighting or full load
conditions.
The area covered by the TV camera is approximately
3 m in length and approximately a maximum of 5.5 m in
width fig. 107.
It is also advisable to use a dry non-abrasive cloth when
cleaning the display. The dust that settles on the display
may be removed with special brushes. Avoid using any
detergent for cleaning.
The display glass could break in the event of impact. In
this case, do not touch the liquid crystal that emerges
from the display. If this occurs, quickly wash the
contaminated parts with soap and water.
KNOWING
YOUR CAR
SAFETY
STARTING
AND
DRIVING
WARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGES
IN AN
EMERGENCY
MAINTENANCE
AND CARE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
INDEX
fig. 107
F0N0215m
93
KNOWING
YOUR CAR
USER INTERFACE
MESSAGES ON THE SCREEN
The display user interface consists of fig. 108:
Messages are shown on the display under the following
conditions:
❒ Brightness adjustment: 2 buttons;
❒ Backlight adjustment: 2 buttons;
SAFETY
STARTING
AND
DRIVING
WARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGES
❒ ON/OFF button: this allows images from the TV
camera to be seen even with reverse gear not
engaged.
The system makes it possible to return to the initial
configuration, keeping the ON/OFF button pressed for
approximately 3 seconds with the system deactivated.
In this case, the ON/OFF button flashes twice to
confirm the operation.
❒ When a speed of approximately 18 km/h is exceeded
and only the activation button is ON, the image
disappears and a message reporting that the system
has gone into stand-by mode is displayed for
approximately 5 seconds.
❒ When a speed of approximately 18 km/h is exceeded
and reverse gear is engaged, the image disappears
and an alert message is displayed that remains until
the speed drops to approximately 15 km/h. In this
case, the image is displayed again.
The system makes it possible to change the language in
which the text messages are displayed. For this
selection, with the system deactivated, press the
ON/OFF button and any other button simultaneously
and then select the language by scrolling through the
menu using the ON/OFF button. When the desired
language is reached, wait for about 3 seconds so that it
is programmed.
IN AN
EMERGENCY
MAINTENANCE
AND CARE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
INDEX
94
❒ An alert message is displayed during the 5 seconds
following reverse engagement.
fig. 108
F0N0216m
TACHOGRAPH
For tachograph operation and use, consult the owner
handbook supplied by the device manufacturer.
The tachograph must be installed on the vehicle when
the vehicle weight (with or without trailer) exceeds
3.5 tons.
IMPORTANT Anyone making changes to the
monitoring device or signal transmission system that
affects recording by the monitoring instrument,
particularly if this is done for purposes of fraud, may be
in breach of criminal or administrative state regulations.
The tachograph is installed and sealed by authorised
personnel: do not try and access the device or the
supply and recording leads in any way. It is the
responsibility of the owner of the vehicle on which the
tachograph is installed to check the device regularly.
The check must be carried out at least every two years
and a test must be carried out to ensure that it is
working properly. Ensure that the data label is renewed
after every check that that the label contains the
specified data.
KNOWING
YOUR CAR
SAFETY
STARTING
AND
DRIVING
IMPORTANT If a tachograph is fitted, if the vehicle is
parked for more than 5 days, it is advisable to
disconnect the negative battery terminal to maintain its
charge.
WARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGES
IMPORTANT NOTES
Do not use abrasive detergents or solvents to clean the
device. To clean the outside of the device, use a damp
cloth or special products for the care of synthetic
materials.
IN AN
EMERGENCY
MAINTENANCE
AND CARE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
INDEX
95
KNOWING
YOUR CAR
SAFETY
STARTING
AND
DRIVING
WARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGES
IN AN
EMERGENCY
SPEED BLOCK
DOORS
(for versions/markets where provided)
CENTRAL DOOR LOCKING/UNLOCKING
SYSTEM
The vehicle is equipped with a function that limits the
speed that can be set, when requested by the user,
to one of 4 preset values: 90, 100, 110, 130 km/h.
This function must be activated/deactivated by a Fiat
Dealership. Following the operation, a sticker will be
applied to the windscreen showing the top speed
setting.
WARNING The speedometer could show a higher top
speed than the effective one set by the Dealership in
accordance with the regulations in force.
Locking the doors from the outside
With the doors shut, press button Á on the remote
control fig. 109-110 or slide the metal insert A into the
lock of the door on the driver’s side and turn it
clockwise. The doors will only be locked if all doors are
shut.
To extract the metal insert, press button B.
If one or more doors are open after pressing button Á
on the remote control, the direction indicators and the
LED in the button A-fig. 112 flash quickly for
approximately 3 seconds. The Buttons A and B fig. 112
are disabled with the function activated. Pressing button
Á on the remote control twice in quick succession
activates the dead lock device (see “Dead lock”).
MAINTENANCE
AND CARE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
INDEX
96
fig. 109
F0N0800m
Door unlocking from the outside
Press the button Q fig. 109 or Ë fig. 110 briefly,
depending on the version, to release the front doors
remotely, for timed activation of the interior courtesy
lights and a double signal from the direction indicators.
All the doors can be unlocked by turning the metal
insert anticlockwise in the door lock on the driver’s side
fig. 111. With the battery disconnected, access to the
vehicle will only be possible by unlocking the driver’s
door using the mechanical lock.
KNOWING
YOUR CAR
SAFETY
STARTING
AND
DRIVING
WARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGES
IN AN
EMERGENCY
MAINTENANCE
AND CARE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
INDEX
fig. 110
F0N0801m
fig. 111
F0N0059m
97
Door locking/unlocking from the inside
KNOWING
YOUR CAR
SAFETY
STARTING
AND
DRIVING
WARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGES
IN AN
EMERGENCY
Press the button A-fig. 112 to lock the doors, press
button B to unlock the doors. The locking/unlocking
actions take place centrally (front and rear). When the
doors are locked, the LED in the button A is on and
pressing button B brings about central unlocking of all
the doors and turns off the warning light. When the
doors are unlocked, the LED is off and pressing the
button brings about central locking of all the doors.
The doors will be locked only if all the doors are
properly shut.
IMPORTANT With the central locking engaged, pulling
the opening lever for one of the front doors switches
off the central locking function. Individual doors can be
unlocked by pulling the opening handle of one of the
rear doors.
If a power supply is not present (blown fuse, battery
disconnected, etc.) it is, however, possible to lock the
doors manually.
Following the locking of the doors using:
After exceeding 20 km/h, all the doors will be locked
automatically if the setup menu function has been
selected (see “Multifunction display” paragraph in this
section).
❒ remote control;
LOAD COMPARTMENT BUTTON fig. 113
❒ door locking mechanism;
Lock activation is indicated by the LED in the button.
it will not be possible to unlock the doors using button
A-fig. 112 located in the controls in the dashboard.
MAINTENANCE
AND CARE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
INDEX
98
fig. 112
F0N0047m
fig. 113
F0N0132m
The LED comes on in the following cases:
❒ after each door lock command generated by the
button D or by button Á in the dashboard;
❒ when the instrument panel is activated;
❒ upon opening of one of the front doors;
❒ when the door is locked at 20 km/h (if activated
from the menu).
The lock is turned off when one of the load
compartment doors is opened or on a door release
request (load compartment or centralised) or an
unlocking request from the remote control/door catch.
DEAD LOCK
(for versions/markets where provided)
This safety device inhibits the operation of:
❒ interior handles;
❒ locking/unlocking buttons A-B fig. 112;
thereby preventing the opening of the doors from inside
the passenger compartment if there has been a break-in
attempt (e.g. a window has been broken).
The dead lock device therefore offers the best possible
protection against break in attempts. We recommend
engaging it whenever the vehicle is parked and left
unattended.
WARNING
Once the dead lock system is engaged it
is impossible to open the doors from
inside the vehicle. Therefore, before engaging
the system check that there is no one left inside.
If the remote control battery is flat, the system
can only be disengaged by using the metal insert
in either of the door locks as described
previously: in this case the device only remains
on for the rear doors.
Device activation
The dead lock device is automatically activated on every
door when pressing the remote control button Á briefly
twice, fig. 109.
Device activation is indicated by 3 flashes of the
direction indicators and the flashing of the LED on
button A-fig. 112 on the dashboard.
If one of the doors is not perfectly shut, the dead lock
device will not be activated, thus preventing a person
getting into the car through the open door and, on
shutting it, remaining stuck inside the passenger
compartment.
KNOWING
YOUR CAR
SAFETY
STARTING
AND
DRIVING
WARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGES
IN AN
EMERGENCY
MAINTENANCE
AND CARE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
INDEX
99
Device deactivation
KNOWING
YOUR CAR
WARNING
The system is disabled automatically on every door in
the following cases:
Do not move the vehicle with the side
doors open.
❒ opening the driver’s door using the mechanical key;
SAFETY
STARTING
AND
DRIVING
❒ when unlocking doors using the remote control;
❒ when turning the ignition key to the MAR-ON
position.
IN AN
EMERGENCY
The sliding side door is equipped with a stop that
prevents it sliding beyond the end of its travel when
opening. To close, operate the exterior handle A (or
the corresponding interior handle) and push to closed.
SLIDING SIDE DOOR fig. 114
WARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGES
In any case, make sure that the door is correctly
hooked to the device which keeps the door fully open.
WARNING
Before leaving the vehicle parked with
the sliding doors open, always check
that the lock is engaged.
SLIDING SIDE GLASS fig. 115
(for versions/markets where provided)
To open, keep the two handles B pressed toward one
another and slide the glass.
When the two handles are released, the sliding glass
may stop in intermediate positions.
MAINTENANCE
AND CARE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
INDEX
100
To open the sliding side door, lift handle A and slide the
door open.
fig. 114
F0N0061m
MOVING FOOTBOARD fig. 116
(for versions/markets where provided)
REAR SWING DOORS (TWO)
When the side door of the passenger compartment or
luggage compartment is opened, a footboard emerges
from the lower part of the floorpan to make it easier to
board the vehicle.
Manual opening of the first swing door from the
outside
WARNING
Before setting off after parking or before
moving the vehicle in any way, ensure
that the footboard is fully stowed away.
Because the movement of the footboard is
controlled by that of the sliding side door,
incomplete stowing of the footboard or nonclosure of the rear doors is indicated by
a warning light ´ in the instrument panel.
KNOWING
YOUR CAR
Turn the key anticlockwise fig. 111 or press button ∞
on the remote control and operate the handle
A-fig. 117 in the direction of the arrow.
SAFETY
Manual opening of the first swing door
from the inside fig. 118
(for versions/markets, where provided)
STARTING
AND
DRIVING
Pull handle B in the direction of the arrow.
Manual closure of the first swing door
from the outside
WARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGES
Turn the key clockwise or press button Á on the key
with remote control. Close the left door first, followed
by the right door.
IN AN
EMERGENCY
MAINTENANCE
AND CARE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
INDEX
fig. 115
F0N0240m
fig. 116
F0N0176m
101
KNOWING
YOUR CAR
SAFETY
Manual opening of the second swing door,
fig. 119
Pull handle C in the direction of the arrow.
The rear swing doors are equipped with a spring loaded
system that locks them at an approx. angle of
90 degrees during opening.
Electrical closure from inside fig. 120
Close the two rear swing doors (first the left, then the
right) and press button D located in the window control
panel.
STARTING
AND
DRIVING
WARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGES
IN AN
EMERGENCY
fig. 117
F0N0129m
fig. 119
F0N0131m
MAINTENANCE
AND CARE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
INDEX
102
fig. 118
F0N0130m
fig. 120
F0N0132m
POWER WINDOWS
WARNING
This spring loaded system has activation
forces that were designed for optimum
comfort. Accidental knocks or a strong gust of
wind may release the springs and close the
doors spontaneously.
MECHANISM fig. 122
KNOWING
YOUR CAR
Switches on the inner armrest of the driver’s door
control the following with the ignition key in the
MAR-ON position:
SAFETY
A to open/close the front left window;
The opening angle of the two doors may be increased
for more convenient loading and unloading. To carry out
this operation, press the button A-fig. 121; this allows
the doors to be opened to about 180 degrees.
STARTING
AND
DRIVING
B front right window opening/closing.
Continuous automatic operation
All versions are equipped with automatic raising and
lowering of the front, driver’s side window.
WARNING
With the doors opened to 180 degrees,
no locking system is effective. Do not
use this opening with the vehicle parked on
a gradient or when it is windy.
Keep one of the buttons pressed for longer than half
a second to operate the automatic continuous window
operation function. The window stops when it reaches
the end of travel position or when the button is pressed
again.
WARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGES
IN AN
EMERGENCY
MAINTENANCE
AND CARE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
INDEX
fig. 121
F0N0188m
fig. 122
F0N0062m
103
KNOWING
YOUR CAR
IMPORTANT With the ignition key in the STOP
position or extracted, the electric windows remain
activated for about 3 minutes and are then deactivated
immediately when one of the doors is opened.
BONNET
OPENING
Proceed as follows:
SAFETY
STARTING
AND
DRIVING
WARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGES
WARNING
Incorrect use of the electric windows
may be dangerous. Before and during
operation, always check that no-one is exposed
to the risk of being injured either directly by the
moving window or through objects getting
caught and being dragged. When leaving the
vehicle, always remove the key from the ignition
to avoid the risk of injury to anyone remaining
in the car due to accidental operation of the
electric windows.
IN AN
EMERGENCY
❒ open the driver’s door to gain access to the bonnet
release;
❒ pull the lever fig. 123 in the direction of the arrow;
❒ pull the lever A-fig. 124 as shown in the figure;
❒ lift the bonnet and, at the same time, release the
bonnet stay fig. 125 from its locking device D, then
insert the end C-fig. 126 of the stay into the bonnet
housing E.
IMPORTANT Before opening the bonnet, check that
windscreen wiper arms are not lifted from the
windscreen.
Front passenger side door
MAINTENANCE
AND CARE
A dedicated switch for operating the window is located
on the inner armrest of the passenger side front door.
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
INDEX
104
fig. 123
F0N0063m
CLOSURE
Proceed as follows:
WARNING
❒ hold the bonnet up with one hand and with the
other remove the rod C-fig. 126 from the housing E
and fit it back into its locking device D-fig. 125;
❒ lower the bonnet to approximately 20 centimetres
from the engine compartment, then let it drop. Make
sure that the bonnet is completely closed and not
fastened only by the safety catch. If it is not perfectly
closed, do not try to press the bonnet lid down but
open it and repeat the procedure.
The bonnet must always be perfectly
closed while travelling for safety reasons.
Make sure that the bonnet is properly closed
and that the lock is engaged. If you notice
whilst driving that the lock is not perfectly
engaged, stop at once and close the bonnet
properly.
KNOWING
YOUR CAR
SAFETY
STARTING
AND
DRIVING
IMPORTANT Always check that the bonnet is closed
properly to avoid it opening while the car is travelling.
WARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGES
IN AN
EMERGENCY
MAINTENANCE
AND CARE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
INDEX
fig. 124
F0N0323m
fig. 125
F0N0065m
105
KNOWING
YOUR CAR
ROOF RACK/SKI RACK
WARNING
The incorrect positioning of the bonnet
stay could cause the bonnet to fall
suddenly.
Long wheelbase vehicles are equipped with 8 pins; short
or medium wheelbase vehicles are equipped with 6 pins;
vehicles with extra-long wheelbases are equipped with
10 pins.
SAFETY
STARTING
AND
DRIVING
To fit the roof/ski rack, with provision for versions H1
and H2, use the pins A provided on the edges of the
roof fig. 127.
WARNING
Only carry out these operations with
the vehicle stationary.
WARNING
WARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGES
Check that the attachment fixing screws
are tight after a few kilometres.
IN AN
EMERGENCY
MAINTENANCE
AND CARE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
INDEX
106
fig. 126
F0N0066m
fig. 127
F0N0138m
Respect the regulations in force
concerning maximum clearance.
HEADLIGHTS
KNOWING
YOUR CAR
HEADLIGHT BEAM AIMING
IMPORTANT Follow the instructions contained in the
assembly kit carefully. Assembly must be performed by
qualified personnel.
WARNING
Distribute the load evenly and when
driving, bear in mind the increased
sensitivity of the vehicle to side wind.
The correct direction of the headlights is essential for
the comfort and safety of the driver and other road
users. To ensure the best visibility when travelling with
the headlights on, the headlight alignment must be
correct. Contact a Fiat Dealership to have the
headlights properly adjusted.
HEADLIGHT ALIGNMENT CORRECTOR
This device works with the ignition key in the MAR-ON
position and the dipped headlights on. The vehicle tilts
backwards when it is laden, raising the beam. The beams
must therefore be aimed again in this case.
SAFETY
STARTING
AND
DRIVING
WARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGES
IN AN
EMERGENCY
Never exceed the permitted weight (see
“Technical data” section).
MAINTENANCE
AND CARE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
INDEX
fig. 128
F0N0516m
107
Headlight alignment adjustment fig. 128
KNOWING
YOUR CAR
SAFETY
STARTING
AND
DRIVING
WARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGES
IN AN
EMERGENCY
MAINTENANCE
AND CARE
Press buttons Ò and in the control panel to adjust.
The display located on the instrument panel provides
a visual indication of the adjusted position.
IMPORTANT Check the beam alignment every time the
weight of the load transported changes.
ABS SYSTEM
If you have never driven a vehicle with ABS before, it is
advisable to perform a few tests on slippery ground,
always in safe conditions and respecting the highway
code of the country where you are driving. Read the
following information carefully.
Contact a Fiat Dealership to have the headlights
properly adjusted.
This is an integral part of the braking system, which
prevents one or more wheels from locking or slipping
regardless of the road surface conditions and braking
intensity, ensuring control of the vehicle even during
emergency braking.
ADJUSTING THE HEADLIGHTS WHEN
ABROAD
The system is completed by EBD (Electronic Braking
Force Distribution), which distributes the braking action
between the front and rear wheels.
The dipped headlights are adjusted to work in the
country where the vehicle was originally purchased.
In countries where vehicles are driven on the other side
of the road, the beams are aligned by applying a specially
designed adhesive film in order not to dazzle the
vehicles travelling in the opposite direction.
IMPORTANT For the maximum efficiency of the
braking system, a bedding in period of about 500 km is
needed (with the vehicle new or after having replaced
the brake pads/discs): during this period it is better to
avoid sharp, repeated and prolonged braking.
FRONT FOG LIGHTS ALIGNMENT
(for versions/markets where provided)
WARNING
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
INDEX
108
The ABS system gets the most out of the
available grip but it cannot improve it.
Therefore, you should take great care when
driving on slippery surfaces: don’t take
unnecessary risks.
SYSTEM INTERVENTION
EBD failure
The driver can tell the ABS system has come into action
because the brake pedal pulsates slightly and the system
gets noisier: it means that the vehicle speed should be
altered to suit the type of road surface.
ABS Failure is indicated by the > and x warning lights
in the instrument panel together with the dedicated
message in the multifunction display (for versions/
markets where provided) coming on (see “Warning
lights and messages” section).
WARNING
If the ABS cuts in, it is a sign that the
grip between tyre and the road surface
has reached the limit: you must slow down to
match the speed to the road grip available.
In this case, the rear wheels may suddenly lock and the
vehicle may swerve when braking sharply. Drive
carefully to the nearest Fiat Dealership to have the
system checked.
WARNING
FAILURE WARNING
ABS failure
ABS Failure is indicated by the > warning light in the
instrument panel together with the dedicated message
in the multifunction display (for versions/markets where
provided) coming on (see “Warning lights and
messages” section).
In this case, the braking system will still be effective,
although without the extra capacity offered by the ABS
system. Drive carefully to the nearest Fiat Dealership to
have the system checked.
If only the x warning light in the
instrument panel lights up (together with
a message in the multifunction display, for
versions/markets where provided) stop the
vehicle immediately and contact the nearest Fiat
Dealership. Fluid leaking from the hydraulic
system will compromise the operation of the
braking system, whether it is of the conventional
type or with ABS.
KNOWING
YOUR CAR
SAFETY
STARTING
AND
DRIVING
WARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGES
IN AN
EMERGENCY
MAINTENANCE
AND CARE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
INDEX
109
KNOWING
YOUR CAR
SAFETY
STARTING
AND
DRIVING
WARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGES
BRAKE ASSIST (emergency braking assistance
integrated in ESP)
(for versions/markets where provided)
This system (which cannot be deactivated) recognises
emergency braking conditions according to the speed of
operation of the brake pedal and provides an additional
hydraulic braking pressure to support that provided by
the driver. This allows faster and more powerful
operation of the braking system.
The Brake Assist is deactivated on versions equipped
with ESP, in the event of an ESP system failure (indicated
by warning light á switching on together with the
message in the multifunction display, for
versions/markets where provided).
ESP SYSTEM
(Electronic Stability Program)
(for versions/markets where provided)
This is an electronic system that controls vehicle
stability in the event of tyre grip loss, helping to maintain
directional control.
The ESP system is therefore particularly useful when
grip conditions of road surfaces change.
The MSR system (adjustment of the engine braking
torque during gear changes) and the HBA system
(automatic increase in the braking pressure during
emergency braking) are present with ESP, ASR and Hill
Holder systems (for versions/markets where provided).
SYSTEM INTERVENTION
IN AN
EMERGENCY
MAINTENANCE
AND CARE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
INDEX
110
WARNING
When the ABS intervenes and you notice
the brake pedal pulsating, do not be
afraid to keep the pedal pushed down. This will
help you to stop in the shortest distance
possible, depending on the road conditions.
This is signalled by the flashing of warning light á in the
instrument panel, to inform the driver that the vehicle is
in critical stability and grip conditions.
SYSTEM ACTIVATION
The ESP system is automatically activated when the
vehicle is started and cannot be de-activated.
FAILURE WARNING
In the event of a failure, the ESP will be automatically
switched off and the á warning light will come on
constantly in the instrument panel along with a message
in the multifunction display (for versions/markets where
provided) (see “Warning lights and messages” section).
The LED in the ASR OFF button will light up. Contact
a Fiat Dealership as soon as possible if this happens.
WARNING
Do not take unnecessary risks, even if
your vehicle is fitted with an ESP system.
Your driving style must always be suited to the
road conditions, visibility and traffic. The driver
is ultimately responsible for road safety.
HILL HOLDER SYSTEM
This system is an integral part of the ESP system and it is
provided to facilitate starting on hills.
❒ downhill: vehicle stationary on a road with a gradient
higher than 5%, engine running, clutch and brake
pedal pressed and reverse gear engaged.
At pickup the ESP system control unit will maintain the
braking pressure at the wheels until the necessary torque
for starting is reached or, in any case, for a maximum of
2 seconds in order to move easily from the brake pedal
to the accelerator pedal. When two seconds have
elapsed, without starting, the system is automatically
deactivated, gradually releasing the braking pressure.
During this release stage, the typical brake
disengagement noise indicating that the vehicle is going
to move imminently will be heard.
KNOWING
YOUR CAR
SAFETY
STARTING
AND
DRIVING
Failure warning
WARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGES
The á warning light in the instrument panel will come
on in the event of a failure (see “Warning lights and
messages” section).
IN AN
EMERGENCY
IMPORTANT The Hill Holder system is not a parking
brake; therefore, never leave the vehicle without having
engaged the handbrake, turned the engine off and
engaged first gear.
MAINTENANCE
AND CARE
It is automatically activated in the following conditions:
❒ uphill: vehicle stationary on a road with a gradient
higher than 5%, engine running, clutch and brake
pedal pressed, gearbox in neutral or gear other than
reverse engaged;
WARNING
For the correct operation of the ESP and
ASR systems, the tyres must absolutely be
the same make and type on all wheels, in perfect
condition and, above all, of the type, make and
size specified.
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
INDEX
111
KNOWING
YOUR CAR
SAFETY
STARTING
AND
DRIVING
WARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGES
IN AN
EMERGENCY
MAINTENANCE
AND CARE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
INDEX
112
ASR SYSTEM (Antislip Regulator)
This is a traction control system that cuts in
automatically every time one or both drive wheels slip.
Depending on the slipping conditions, two different
control systems are activated:
❒ if the slipping involves both drive wheels, the ASR
function intervenes by reducing the power
transmitted by the engine;
❒ if the slipping only involves only one driving wheel,
the ASR system cuts in by automatically braking the
wheel that is slipping.
The action of the ASR is particularly helpful in the
following circumstances:
❒ slipping of the inner wheel when cornering due to
the effect of dynamic load changes or excessive
acceleration;
❒ too much power transmitted to the wheels also in
relation to the conditions of the road surface;
❒ acceleration on slippery, snowy or icy surfaces;
❒ loss of grip on a wet surface (aquaplaning).
WARNING
For the correct operation of the ESP and
ASR systems, the tyres must absolutely be
the same make and type on all wheels, in perfect
condition and, above all, of the type, make and
size specified.
MSR system
(engine braking torque control)
This is an integral part of the ASR system that, in the
event of a sudden gear down shift, cuts in and provides
torque to the engine thus preventing excessive drive
wheel drive which, especially in poor grip conditions,
can lead to a loss of stability.
Switching the system on/off fig. 129
The ASR system switches on automatically each time
the engine is started.
When travelling on snowy roads with snow chains,
it may be helpful to turn the ASR off: in fact, in these
conditions, the driving wheels skidding when moving
off gives you better traction.
The ASR can be turned off and then turned back on
again whilst driving by pressing the switch A located in
the dashboard.
The switching off is shown by the LED in the switch
itself coming on together with a message shown in the
multifunction display, for versions/markets where
provided.
If the ASR is switched off when driving, it is
automatically switched on again when the vehicle is
started up.
WARNING
Do not take unnecessary risks, even if
your vehicle is fitted with this system.
Your driving style must always be suited to the
road conditions, visibility and traffic. The driver
is ultimately responsible for road safety.
KNOWING
YOUR CAR
SAFETY
STARTING
AND
DRIVING
WARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGES
FAILURE WARNING
In the event of a failure, the ASR will be automatically
switched off and the á warning light will come on
constantly in the instrument panel along with a message
in the multifunction display (for versions/markets where
provided) (see “Warning lights and messages” section).
The LED in the ASR OFF button will light up. Contact
a Fiat Dealership as soon as possible if this happens.
IN AN
EMERGENCY
MAINTENANCE
AND CARE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
INDEX
fig. 129
F0N0077m
113
KNOWING
YOUR CAR
SAFETY
TRACTION PLUS SYSTEM
Traction Plus operation
(for versions/markets, where provided)
The system is deactivated when starting up. To activate
the “Traction Plus” system, press the button
(T+ fig. 130): the LED on the button switches on.
Traction Plus is a help with driving and setting off in
poor grip conditions (snow, ice, mud, etc.) which allows
the drive force to be evenly distributed over the same
axle when both wheels are slipping.
STARTING
AND
DRIVING
In effect, Traction Plus acts by braking the wheels with
poor grip (or those slipping more than the others),
thereby transferring the drive force to those which have
more grip on the ground.
WARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGES
This function can be turned on manually by pressing the
T+ button fig. 130 on the dashboard and works below a
level of 30 km/h. Over this speed, it is automatically
deactivated (the LED on the button is still on) and it is
reactivated again when the speed is below 30 km/h.
IN AN
EMERGENCY
MAINTENANCE
AND CARE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
INDEX
114
fig. 130
F0N0509m
The activation of the Traction Plus system involves the
following functions being switched on:
❒ inhibition of the ASR function, in order to fully
exploit the engine torque;
❒ the differential locking effect on the front axle,
through the braking system, to improve traction on
irregular grounds.
If the “Traction Plus” system is faulty, the “general
failure” instrument panel warning light á comes on
steady.
EOBD SYSTEM
The EOBD system (European On Board Diagnosis)
allows continuous diagnosis of emission-related
components on the vehicle.
It also alerts the driver, by turning on the U warning
light on the instrument panel (together with a relevant
message in the multifunction display, for versions/
markets where provided) (see “Warning lights and
messages” section), when these components are no
longer in peak condition.
If, when the ignition key is turned to the
MAR-ON position, the U warning light
either does not come on or, when driving,
it comes on constantly or flashing (along with
a message in the multidirection display, for
versions/markets where provided) contact a Fiat
Dealership as soon as possible. The operation of
the warning light U may be checked by the
traffic control authorities using specific devices.
Always comply with the traffic regulations in
force in the country where you are driving.
KNOWING
YOUR CAR
SAFETY
STARTING
AND
DRIVING
The goal of the system is to:
❒ keep the system efficiency under control;
❒ warn about increased emissions due to a vehicle
malfunction;
WARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGES
❒ warn of the need to replace deteriorated
components.
IN AN
EMERGENCY
The system also has a diagnostic connector that can be
interfaced with appropriate equipment, which makes it
possible to read the error codes stored in the control
unit together with a series of specific parameters for
engine operation and diagnosis. This check can also be
carried out by traffic control authorities.
MAINTENANCE
AND CARE
IMPORTANT After eliminating the problem, to check
the system completely, Fiat Dealerships run a bench test
and, if necessary, road tests which may also call for
a long journey.
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
INDEX
115
KNOWING
YOUR CAR
SAFETY
STARTING
AND
DRIVING
WARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGES
PARKING SENSORS
(for versions/markets where provided)
The parking sensors are located in the rear bumper,
fig. 131 and their function is to inform the driver,
through an intermittent buzzer, about the presence of
obstacles behind the vehicle.
ACTIVATION
The sensors are automatically activated when the
reverse gear is engaged.
As the obstacle behind the vehicle gets closer to the
bumper, the beeping becomes more frequent.
IN AN
EMERGENCY
MAINTENANCE
AND CARE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
INDEX
116
fig. 131
F0N0119m
WARNING BUZZER
When reverse gear is engaged an intermittent beeping is
automatically activated.
The acoustic signal:
❒ increases as the distance between the vehicle and
the obstacle decreases;
❒ becomes continuous when the distance between the
vehicle and the obstacle is less than 30 cm and stops
immediately if the distance increases;
❒ remains constant if the distance remains unchanged;
if this situation concerns the side sensors, the
buzzer will stop after about 3 seconds to avoid,
for example, warning indications in the event of
manoeuvres along walls.
Detection distances
Central action range:
140 cm ±10 cm
Side action range:
60 cm ±20 cm
If several obstacles are detected by the sensors, only the
nearest one is considered.
OPERATION WITH TRAILER
The sensors are automatically enabled again when the
trailer cable plug is removed.
SAFETY
FAILURE WARNING
IMPORTANT If you wish to leave the tow hook fitted
without towing a trailer, it is advisable to contact a Fiat
Dealership for the relevant system update operations
because the tow hook could be detected as an obstacle
by the central sensors.
STARTING
AND
DRIVING
When using special washing equipment such as high
pressure jets or steam cleaning, clean the sensors very
quickly keeping the jet more than 10 cm away.
WARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGES
Any parking sensor failures will be indicated when
engaging reverse by the t warning light in the instrument
panel together with the message in the multifunction
display coming on for versions/markets where provided
(see “Warning lights and messages” section).
Parking sensor operation is automatically disabled when
the electric cable plug of the trailer is fitted into the
vehicle tow hook socket.
KNOWING
YOUR CAR
IN AN
EMERGENCY
MAINTENANCE
AND CARE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
INDEX
117
KNOWING
YOUR CAR
SAFETY
STARTING
AND
DRIVING
WARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGES
IN AN
EMERGENCY
MAINTENANCE
AND CARE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
INDEX
118
For correct operation, sensors must
always be clean from mud, dirt, snow or
ice. Be careful not to scratch or damage
the sensors while cleaning them. Avoid using dry,
rough or hard cloths. The sensors should be
washed with clean water, possibly with some car
shampoo.
WARNING
The driver always has ultimate
responsibility for parking and other
dangerous manoeuvres. While manoeuvring,
always make sure that no-one is in the area
concerned (especially children) or animals.
The parking sensors are designed to assist
drivers: in any case, you must always pay the
utmost attention during potentially dangerous
manoeuvres, even when carried out at low
speed.
GENERAL WARNINGS
❒ When parking, take the utmost care over obstacles
that may be above or below the sensors.
❒ Objects close to the vehicle, in certain
circumstances are not detected and could therefore
cause damage to the vehicle or be damaged.
The following conditions may influence the performance
of the parking sensor system:
❒ Reduced sensor sensitivity and a reduction in the
parking assistance system performance could be due
to the presence on the surface of the sensor of: ice,
snow, mud, thick paint.
❒ The sensor may detect a non-existent obstacle
(echo noise) due to mechanical noises, for example
when washing the vehicle, in case of rain, strong
wind, hail.
❒ The signals sent by the sensors can also be altered
by the presence of ultrasonic systems (e.g.
pneumatic brake systems or pneumatic drills) near
the vehicle.
❒ The performance of the parking assistance system
may also be affected by the position of the sensors.
For example by a change in the ride setting (caused
by the wear of the shock absorbers, suspension),
changing the tyres, overloading the vehicle and
carrying out specific tuning operations that require
the vehicle to be lowered;
❒ Detection of obstacles in the upper part of the
vehicle (particularly in the case of vans or chassis
cabs) may not be guaranteed because the system
detects obstacles that could strike the lower part
of the vehicle.
SOUND SYSTEM
KNOWING
YOUR CAR
(for versions/markets, where provided)
For radio operation, consult the Supplement attached to
this Owner Handbook.
SAFETY
SOUND SYSTEM CAPABILITY
(for versions/markets where provided)
The system consists of:
❒ sound system power cables
❒ front speaker connection cables
❒ aerial power cable
❒ 2 tweeters A on the front pillars (30 W max power
each), fig. 132;
❒ 2 mid-woofers B in the front doors (165 mm
diameter, 40 W max power each) fig. 133;
❒ radio aerial lead.
STARTING
AND
DRIVING
WARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGES
IN AN
EMERGENCY
MAINTENANCE
AND CARE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
INDEX
fig. 132
F0N0157m
119
KNOWING
YOUR CAR
The sound system must be installed in the place
occupied by the central oddments compartment, where
you will find the wiring.
SAFETY
STARTING
AND
DRIVING
WARNING
For connection to the existing devices
supplied in the vehicle contact a Fiat
Dealership to prevent any problems that could
impair vehicle safety.
WARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGES
ACCESSORIES PURCHASED
BY THE OWNER
If after buying the vehicle, you decide to install electrical
accessories that require a permanent electric supply
(alarm, satellite anti-theft system, etc.) or accessories
that in any case burden the electric supply, contact
a Fiat Dealership, whose qualified personnel, besides
suggesting the most suitable devices from Lineaccessori
Fiat, will also evaluate the overall electric absorption,
checking whether the vehicle’s electric system is able to
withstand the load required, or whether it needs to be
integrated with a more powerful battery.
WARNING
Take care when fitting additional
spoilers, alloy wheels or non-standard
wheel hubs: they could reduce the ventilation
of the brakes and affect efficiency under sharp,
repeated braking or on long descents. Make
sure that nothing obstructs the pedal stroke
(mats, etc.)
IN AN
EMERGENCY
MAINTENANCE
AND CARE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
INDEX
120
fig. 133
F0N0158m
INSTALLING ELECTRICAL/ELECTRONIC
DEVICES
RADIO TRANSMITTERS
AND MOBILE PHONES
Electrical and electronic devices installed after buying
the vehicle and available as after-sales must carry the
following label:
Radio transmission equipment (e.g.: ETACS mobile
phones, CB radio systems and so on) should not be
used inside the vehicle unless a separate aerial roofmounted is fitted.
IMPORTANT The use of similar devices inside the
passenger compartment (without an external aerial)
may, in addition to potential damage to the health of the
passengers, cause malfunctions in the vehicle electronic
systems, compromising the safety of the vehicle.
Fiat Auto S.p.A. authorises the installation of
transceivers provided that installation is carried out at
a specialised shop, in a workmanlike fashion and in
compliance with the manufacturer’s specifications.
IMPORTANT Traffic authorities may not allow the
vehicle on the road if devices are fitted that modify
vehicle specifications. This may also invalidate the
warranty in relation to faults caused by the change or
either directly or indirectly related to it.
Fiat Auto S.p.A. shall not be liable for damage caused
by the installation of accessories either not supplied or
recommended by Fiat Auto S.p.A. and/or not installed
in compliance with the provided instructions.
In addition, transmission and reception of these devices
may be affected by the shielding effect of the vehicle
body.
As far as the use of EC-approved mobile phones is
concerned (GSM, GPRS, UMTS), follow the instructions
for use provided by the mobile phone manufacturer.
KNOWING
YOUR CAR
SAFETY
STARTING
AND
DRIVING
WARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGES
IN AN
EMERGENCY
MAINTENANCE
AND CARE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
INDEX
121
KNOWING
YOUR CAR
SAFETY
PREPARATION FOR TELEPASS DEVICE
IN REFLECTIVE WINDSCREEN
(for versions/markets where provided)
If the vehicle is equipped with a reflective windscreen,
install the Telepass in the appropriate area shown in
fig. 134-135.
OPERATION AT LOW TEMPERATURES
If the outside temperature is very low, diesel thickens
due to the formation of paraffin clots with consequent
defective operation of the fuel supply system.
In order to avoid these problems, different types of
diesel are distributed according to the season: summer
type, winter type and arctic type (cold/mountain areas).
If refuelling with diesel fuel whose specifications are not
suitable for the current temperature, it is advisable to
mix TUTELA DIESEL ART additive in the proportions
shown on the container with the fuel. Pour the additive
into the tank before the diesel fuel.
STARTING
AND
DRIVING
WARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGES
When using or parking the vehicle for a long time in the
mountains or cold areas, it is advisable to refuel using
locally available diesel fuel.
IN AN
EMERGENCY
fig. 134 – Left hand drive versions
F0N0245m
MAINTENANCE
AND CARE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
INDEX
122
REFUELLING THE VEHICLE
fig. 135 – Right hand drive versions
F0N0246m
In this situation it is also advisable to keep the fuel tank
more than 50% full.
Only use diesel fuel that conforms to
European specification EN590. The use
of other products or mixtures may
damage the engine beyond repair and
consequently invalidate the warranty, due to
the damage caused. If you accidentally introduce
other types of fuel into the tank, do not start the
engine and empty the tank. If the engine has run,
even for a very short time, you will need to have
the entire fuel system emptied in addition to
the tank.
REFUELLING CAPACITY
The hermetic seal may cause a slight increase in
pressure in the tank. A little breathing off, while
slackening the cap is absolutely normal.
KNOWING
YOUR CAR
When refuelling, attach the cap to the device inside
the flap as shown in fig. 136.
SAFETY
WARNING
Do not bring naked flames or lit
cigarettes near to the fuel tank opening:
fire risk. Keep your face away from the fuel
filler to avoid breathing in harmful vapours.
To fill the tank completely, top-up twice after the first
click of the fuel delivery gun. Further top-ups could
cause faults in the fuel feeding system.
STARTING
AND
DRIVING
WARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGES
IN AN
EMERGENCY
FUEL TANK CAP fig. 136
When refuelling, open the flap A then undo the cap B
turning the ignition key anticlockwise; the cap has
a device C to prevent it being lost.
MAINTENANCE
AND CARE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
INDEX
fig. 136
F0N0068m
123
KNOWING
YOUR CAR
SAFETY
PROTECTING THE ENVIRONMENT
DIESEL PARTICULATE FILTER (DPF)
The following devices are used for reducing diesel fuel
engine emissions:
The Diesel Particulate Filter is a mechanical filter,
integral with the exhaust system, that physically traps
particulates present in the exhaust gases of diesel
engines.
❒ oxidising catalytic converter;
❒ exhaust gas recirculation system (E.G.R.);
❒ diesel particulate filter (DPF).
STARTING
AND
DRIVING
WARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGES
WARNING
The diesel particulate filter (DPF)
reaches high temperatures during
operation. Therefore do not therefore park the
vehicle on inflammable materials (grass, dry
leaves, pine needles, etc.): fire hazard.
IN AN
EMERGENCY
MAINTENANCE
AND CARE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
INDEX
124
WARNING
The catalytic converter also reaches
high temperatures during normal
operation. Do not park the car on grass, dry
leaves, pine needles or other flammable
material: fire hazard.
The diesel particulate filter has been adopted to
eliminate almost all particulates in compliance with
current/future legal regulations.
During normal use of the vehicle, the engine
management control unit records a set of data (travel
time, type of route, temperatures, etc.) and it will
then calculate how much particulate has been trapped
by the filter.
Since this filter physically traps particulate, it should be
regenerated (cleaned) at regular intervals by burning
carbon particles.
The regeneration procedure is controlled automatically
by the engine management control unit according to the
filter conditions and vehicle use conditions.
There may be a limited increase in the engine idle speed
during the regeneration, a limited increase in fumes and
high temperatures at the exhaust. These are not faults;
they do not impair vehicle performance or damage the
environment.
If the dedicated message is displayed, refer to the
“Warning lights and messages” section.
SAFETY
SAFETY BELTS
Through the reel, the belt automatically adapts to the
body of the passenger wearing it, allowing freedom of
movement.
USING THE SEAT BELTS
fig. 137
The belt should be worn keeping the chest straight and
rested against the seat back.
To fasten the seat belts, hold the tongue A and insert it
into the buckle B, until the locking click is heard.
On removal, if it jams, let it rewind for a short stretch,
then pull it out again without jerking.
To unfasten the seat belts, press button C. Guide the
seat belt with your hand while it is rewinding, to prevent
it from twisting.
The reel may block when the vehicle is parked on
a steep slope: this is perfectly normal. Furthermore,
the reel mechanism locks the belt if it is pulled and in
the event of sudden braking, collisions and on high
speed bends.
WARNING
Do not press button C-ig. 137 when
driving.
HEIGHT ADJUSTMENT fig. 138
WARNING
The height of the seat belts must be
adjusted with the vehicle at a standstill.
To adjust, use button A-fig. 138 and raise or lower
handle B.
Always adjust the seat belt height to the passenger’s
body: This precaution may considerably reduce the risk
of injury in the event of a collision.
fig. 137
F0N0069m
KNOWING
YOUR CAR
SAFETY
STARTING
AND
DRIVING
WARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGES
IN AN
EMERGENCY
MAINTENANCE
AND CARE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
INDEX
125
KNOWING
YOUR CAR
Correct regulation is obtained when the belt passes
approximately half way between the shoulder and the
neck.
WARNING
SAFETY
STARTING
AND
DRIVING
After adjustment, always check that the
cursor to which the ring is fastened is
locked in one of the set positions. Push
downwards to enable the locking device to click
if the grip has not been released in one of the
possible positions.
WARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGES
Seat belt with reel for front central position on
bench seat fig. 139
IN AN
EMERGENCY
The two-seater front bench is equipped with an onboard seat belt (reel on seat) with three anchorage
points for the central position.
S.B.R. SYSTEM
The vehicle is fitted with a Seat Belt Reminder system
(S.B.R.), consisting of a buzzer and a flashing warning
light < on the instrument panel which warns the driver
that the seat belt must be fastened.
The buzzer can be deactivated (until the next engine
stop) as follows:
❒ fasten the driver’s seat belt;
❒ turn the ignition key to MAR-ON;
❒ wait for over 20 seconds and then release one of the
seat belts.
For permanent deactivation, contact the Fiat Dealership.
With digital display, the S.B.R. system can only be reset
at Fiat Dealership.
With multifunction display, the S.B.R. system can also be
reset through the set-up menu.
MAINTENANCE
AND CARE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
INDEX
126
fig. 138
F0N0070m
fig. 139
F0N0156m
PRETENSIONERS
To increase the efficiency of the seat belts, the vehicle is
fitted with pretensioners. These devices, in the event of
a violent frontal impact, rewind the seat belts a few
centimetres. In this way they ensure that the seat belt
adheres perfectly to the wearer before the restraining
action begins.
WARNING
The pretensioner can only be used once.
After it is triggered, have it replaced at
a Fiat Dealership. The device expiry date is
shown on the plate in the glove compartment:
contact the FIAT Dealership when it is time to
replace the device.
The buckle moves downwards to indicate that the
device has intervened; the seat belt cannot be drawn
back up even when guiding it manually.
IMPORTANT To obtain the highest degree of
protection from the action of the pretensioning device,
wear the seat belt keeping it tight to the chest and
pelvis.
A slight amount of smoke may be detected during
operation of the pretensioners. This smoke is not
harmful and does not indicate a fire.
If unusual natural events (floods, sea storms, etc.) have
caused the device to be contaminated by water and
mud, it must be replaced.
SAFETY
STARTING
AND
DRIVING
Operations which lead to knocks,
vibrations or localised heating (over
100 °C for a maximum of 6 hours) in the
area around the pretensioners may cause
damage or trigger them. These devices are not
affected by vibrations caused by irregularities of
the road surface or low obstacles such as kerbs,
etc. Contact a Fiat Dealership for any assistance.
The pretensioner does not require any maintenance or
lubrication.
Anything that modifies its original conditions invalidates
its efficiency.
KNOWING
YOUR CAR
LOAD LIMITERS
To increase passenger safety, the front seat belt reels
contain a load limiter which allows controlled sag in
such a way as to dose the force acting on the chest and
shoulders during the belt restraining action in the event
of frontal impact.
WARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGES
IN AN
EMERGENCY
MAINTENANCE
AND CARE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
INDEX
127
KNOWING
YOUR CAR
SAFETY
STARTING
AND
DRIVING
WARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGES
GENERAL INSTRUCTIONS FOR USING
THE SEAT BELTS
The driver is responsible for respecting (and ensuring
that all the other passengers also respect) the local laws
in force regarding the use of seat belts. Always fasten
the seat belts before starting.
Seat belts are also to be worn by expectant mothers:
the risk of injury in the case of accident is greatly
reduced for them and the unborn child if they are
wearing a seat belt.
Of course they must position the lower part of the belt
very low down so that it passes over the pelvis and
under the abdomen, see fig. 140.
IN AN
EMERGENCY
WARNING
The belt must not be twisted. The upper
part must pass over the shoulder and
cross the chest diagonally. The lower part must
adhere to the pelvis fig. 141, not to the
abdomen. Do not use devices (clips, clamps,
etc.) that prevent the belts from being snug to
the passengers’ body.
WARNING
Maximum protection is obtained if the
backrest is kept straight: the passenger’s
back must lean against the backrest and the
seat belt must be adhere firmly to the torso and
pelvis. Always fasten the seat belts on both the
front and the rear seats. Travelling without seat
belts fastened increases the risk of serious
injuries or even death in the event of a crash.
MAINTENANCE
AND CARE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
INDEX
128
fig. 140
F0N0120m
fig. 141
F0N0121m
WARNING
WARNING
Under no circumstances should the seat
belt and pretensioner components be
removed or tampered with. Any operations
must be carried out by qualified and authorised
personnel only. Always go to a Fiat Dealership.
WARNING
If the belt has been subjected to high
levels of stress, for example after an
accident, it should be changed completely
together with the attachments, fixing screws
and the pretensioner. In fact, even if the belt
has no visible defects, it could have lost its
resilience.
Each seat belt must be worn by one
person only; passengers should not have
babies or children on their lap and use the belts
to protect both of them fig 142. In general, do
not use the seat belts to hold any object against
the body.
HOW TO MAINTAIN THE SEAT BELTS
IN EFFICIENT CONDITIONS
For keeping the seat belts in efficient conditions,
observe the following:
❒ always use the belts with the strap well stretched
and never twisted; make sure that it is free to run
without impediments;
❒ after a serious accident, replace the belt even if it
does not appear damaged. Always replace the belt if
the pretensioners were deployed;
❒ to clean the belts, wash by hand with water and mild
soap, rinse and leave to dry in the shade. Never use
strong detergents, bleach, paints or any other
substance which could damage the belt fibres;
❒ prevent the reels from getting wet: their correct
operation is only guaranteed if water does not get
inside;
❒ replace the seat belt when they demonstrate
significant wear or cuts.
fig. 142
F0N0122m
KNOWING
YOUR CAR
SAFETY
STARTING
AND
DRIVING
WARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGES
IN AN
EMERGENCY
MAINTENANCE
AND CARE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
INDEX
129
KNOWING
YOUR CAR
SAFETY
STARTING
AND
DRIVING
WARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGES
IN AN
EMERGENCY
MAINTENANCE
AND CARE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
INDEX
130
CARRYING CHILDREN SAFELY
For optimal protection in the event of a collision, all
passengers must be seated and wearing adequate
restraint systems. This is even more important for
children. This prescription is compulsory in all EU
countries pursuant to Directive 2003/20/EC.
Compared with adults, a child’s head is proportionally
larger and heavier than the rest of the body, while
muscles and bone structure are not fully developed.
Therefore, correct restraint systems are necessary
which are different from adult seat belts. The results of
research in relation to the best protection for children
is summarised in European Regulation EEC-R44, which
divides the restraint systems into five groups in addition
to making their use compulsory:
Group 0
up to 10 kg of weight
Group 0+
up to 13 kg of weight
Group 1
9–18 kg in weight
Group 2
15–25 kg in weight
Group 3
22–36 kg of weight
As you can see, the groups overlap partly and, in fact,
there are devices on sale that cover more than one
weight group. All child restraint devices must bear the
certification data, together with the control mark,
on a label solidly fixed to the seat which must never be
removed.
Over 1.50 m in height, from the point of view of
restraint systems, children are considered as adults and
wear the seat belts normally.
WARNING
Do not place a cradle seat facing
backwards on the front seat if the
passenger side airbag is on. Deployment of the
airbag in an accident could cause fatal injuries
to the baby regardless of the severity of the
collision. It is advisable to always carry children
in dedicated child seats on the rear seat, which
is the most protected position in the event of an
accident.
WARNING
SERIOUS DANGER Should it be
absolutely necessary to carry a child on
the front seat in a backwards-facing
child seat, the passenger’s front and side
airbags must be deactivated through the
setup menu. Deactivation can be verified by
checking the F warning light on the
instrument panel. Move the passenger’s seat as
far back as possible to avoid contact between
the child seat and the dashboard.
GROUP 0 and 0+
WARNING
Babies up to 13 kg must be carried facing backwards on
a cradle seat, which, supporting the head, does not
induce stress on the neck in the event of sharp
decelerations.
The cradle is restrained by the vehicle seat belts fig. 143
and it in turn must restrain the child with its own belts.
Some child restraint systems for weight
group 0 and 1 have a rear attachment
to the car seat belts and its own seat belts for
securing the child. Due to their weight, they
may be dangerous if incorrectly mounted
(e.g. if fastened to the vehicle seat belts placing
a cushion in between). Follow the assembly
instructions carefully.
WARNING
The figures are indicative for assembly
purposes only. To install the child
restraint, refer to the instructions supplied with
the same.
GROUP 1
From 9 kg to 18 kg in weight, children may be carried
facing forwards seated on child seats fitted with a front
cushion. With these seats the vehicle seat belt is used to
restrain both child and seat, fig. 144.
KNOWING
YOUR CAR
SAFETY
STARTING
AND
DRIVING
WARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGES
IN AN
EMERGENCY
MAINTENANCE
AND CARE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
INDEX
fig. 143
F0N0123m
fig. 144
F0N0124m
131
KNOWING
YOUR CAR
SAFETY
STARTING
AND
DRIVING
WARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGES
GROUP 2
GROUP 3
From 15 kg to 25 kg, children may be restrained directly
by the vehicle seat belts fig. 145. The only function of
the seat is to position the child correctly in relation to
the belts, so that the diagonal part fits over the chest
and not the neck, and that the horizontal part fits over
the pelvis and not the abdomen.
For children from 22 kg to 36 kg the size of the child’s
chest no longer requires a support to space the child’s
back from the backrest.
Fig. 146 shows a child correctly positioned on the rear
seat.
Children taller than 1.50 m can wear seat belts like
adults.
WARNING
The figure is indicative for fitting
purposes only. Fit the child seat referring
to the instructions supplied with the child
restraint.
WARNING
The figure is indicative for fitting
purposes only. Fit the child seat referring
to the instructions supplied with the child
restraint.
IN AN
EMERGENCY
MAINTENANCE
AND CARE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
INDEX
132
fig. 145
F0N0125m
fig. 146
F0M0126m
SUITABILITY OF PASSENGER SEATS FOR THE USE OF CHILD SEATS
The vehicle complies with the new European Directive 2000/3/EC which governs the arrangement possibilities for
child restraints on the seats of a vehicle as shown in the following table.
KNOWING
YOUR CAR
Group
SAFETY
Weight groups
VAN, COMBI and PANORAMA versions
1st and 2nd REAR SEATS ROW
CAB
Single seat
or two-seater
(1 or 2 passengers)
Passenger
rear
left side
Passenger
rear
right side
Passenger
central
up to 13 kg
U
U
U
U
Group 1
9–18 kg
U
U
U
U
Group 2
15–25 kg
U
U
U
U
Group 3
22–36 kg
U
U
U
U
Group 0, 0+
STARTING
AND
DRIVING
WARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGES
IN AN
EMERGENCY
Key:
U = suitable for child restraint systems of the “Universal” category, according to European Standard EEC-R44 for the specified
“Groups”.
MAINTENANCE
AND CARE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
INDEX
133
KNOWING
YOUR CAR
SAFETY
STARTING
AND
DRIVING
WARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGES
IN AN
EMERGENCY
Below is a summary of the rules of safety to be
followed for carrying children:
1) The recommended position for installing child seats
is on the rear seat, as it is the most protected area in
the event of a crash.
2) If the passenger’s air bag is deactivated always check
the amber warning light on the control panel to make
sure that it has actually been deactivated.
3) Carefully follow the instructions supplied with the
child restraint system which are mandatory by law.
Keep the instructions in the vehicle along with the other
papers and this handbook. Do not use second-hand
child seats without instructions.
4) Always check that the seat belt is well fastened by
pulling on it.
5) Only one child is to be strapped into each retaining
system; never carry two children using one child seat.
6) Always check that the seat belts do not restrain the
child’s throat.
MAINTENANCE
AND CARE
7) While travelling, do not let the child sit incorrectly
or release the belts.
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
8) Never carry children on your lap, even newborns.
No-one, however strong, can restrain a child in the
event of an accident.
9) In the event of an accident, replace the child’s seat
with a new one.
INDEX
134
WARNING
Do not place a cradle seat facing
backwards on the front seat if the
passenger side airbag is on. Deployment of the
airbag in an accident could cause fatal injuries
to the baby regardless of the severity of the
collision. It is advisable to carry children in an
appropriate restraint system on the rear seat
which is the most protected position in the
event of an accident.
“UNIVERSAL ISOFIX”
CHILD RESTRAINT ASSEMBLY SETUP
Provision has been made on the vehicle to fit
a Universal Isofix child restraint system, a new European
standardised system for carrying children safely. An
example of a child seat is shown in fig. 147. Due to its
different anchoring system, the Universal Isofix child’s
seat must be secured using the special lower metal rings
A-fig. 148, positioned between rear backrest and
cushion. The upper belt (provided with the child’s seat)
must be then secured to ring B-fig. 149 located in the
lower part of the seat. It is possible to have a mixed
assembly of traditional child seats and Universal Isofix
seats.
Remember that, in the case of Universal Isofix child
seats, you can use all those seats bearing the marking
ECE R44/03 Universal Isofix.
WARNING
WARNING
Fit the child seat only when the vehicle is
stationary. The child seat is correctly
anchored to the brackets when you hear the
click.
Follow the instructions for assembly,
disassembly and positioning that the
manufacturer must supply with the child seat.
KNOWING
YOUR CAR
SAFETY
STARTING
AND
DRIVING
WARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGES
IN AN
EMERGENCY
fig. 148
F0N0234m
MAINTENANCE
AND CARE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
INDEX
fig. 147
F0N0236m
fig. 149
F0N0235m
135
KNOWING
YOUR CAR
SAFETY
STARTING
AND
DRIVING
WARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGES
PASSENGER SEAT COMPLIANCE WITH REGULATIONS
ON UNIVERSAL ISOFIX CHILD SEAT USE
The table below shows the different installation possibilities of Isofix restraint systems on seats fitted with Universal
Isofix fasteners in compliance with European standard ECE 16.
Weight group
Portable cradle
Group 0 up to 10 kg
Group 0+ up to 13 kg
IN AN
EMERGENCY
MAINTENANCE
AND CARE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
Group I from 9
up to 18 kg
Child seat
seat
Class
Isofix size
Isofix positions
rear side 1st row
PANORAMA
COMBI
Facing forwards
F
IUF
IUF
Facing forwards
G
IUF
IUF
Facing forwards
E
IUF
IUF
Facing forwards
E
IUF
IUF
Facing forwards
D
IUF
IUF
Facing forwards
C
IUF
IUF(*)
Facing forwards
D
IUF
IUF
Facing forwards
C
IUF(*)
IUF(*)
Facing forwards
B1
IUF
IUF
Facing forwards
A
IUF
IUF
(*) Not with two-seater front bench.
IUF: suitable for Isofix child restraint systems to be fitted facing forwards, universal class (fitted with third upper fastener),
approved for the weight group.
INDEX
136
FRONT AIR BAGS
The front air bags may not be activated in the following
situations:
The vehicle is provided with front airbags for the driver
and the passenger.
❒ during collisions against highly deformable objects
that do not affect the vehicle front surface (e.g.
bumper collision against guard rail, heaps of gravel,
etc.);
The front driver/passenger air bags have been designed
to protect the occupants in the event of head-on
crashes of medium-high severity, by placing the cushion
between the occupant and the steering wheel or
dashboard.
Therefore non-activation in other types of collisions
(side collisions, rear shunts, roll-overs, etc.) is not
a system malfunction.
An electronic control unit causes the bag to inflate in
the event of a head-on crash. The bag will inflate
instantaneously placing itself between the front
occupants body and the structures which could cause
injury. It will deflate immediately afterwards.
Driver and passenger front airbags are not
a replacement of but complementary to the belts, which
you are recommended to always wear, as specified by
law in Europe and most non-European countries.
The volume of the front airbags at maximum inflation
fills most of the space between the steering wheel and
the driver and between the dashboard and the
passenger.
In the event of an impact, someone not wearing a seat
belt could move forward and come into contact with
a bag which is still in the opening phase. The protection
offered by the bag is reduced in such a case.
❒ jamming of the vehicle underneath other vehicles or
protective barriers (e.g. underneath a truck or
a guard rail); in this case, the bags would offer no
additional protection with respect to the seat belt
and their deployment is unnecessary. Failure to
deploy in such cases does not consequently indicate
a system fault.
KNOWING
YOUR CAR
SAFETY
STARTING
AND
DRIVING
WARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGES
WARNING
Do not apply stickers or other objects to
the steering wheel, to the passenger’s
side air bag cover or on the roof side lining.
Do not place objects on the passenger side
dashboard because these could interfere with
the correct opening of the airbag (e.g. mobile
phones) and cause severe injury to occupants.
The airbags are not deployed in the event of minor
collisions (for which the restraining action of the seat
belts is sufficient). For this reason, the seat belt must be
worn at all times. In the event of side collisions, the seat
belts hold occupants in the correct position and prevent
them being thrown out of the car by a very violent
collision.
IN AN
EMERGENCY
MAINTENANCE
AND CARE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
INDEX
137
KNOWING
YOUR CAR
DRIVER’S FRONT AIR BAG
fig. 150
PASSENGER’S FRONT AIR BAG fig. 151
(for versions/markets where provided)
This consists of an instantly inflating bag contained in
a special recess in the centre of the steering wheel.
This consists of an instantly inflating bag contained in
a special recess in the dashboard: this bag has a larger
volume than that of the driver’s.
SAFETY
WARNING
STARTING
AND
DRIVING
WARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGES
IN AN
EMERGENCY
fig. 150
F0N0324m
MAINTENANCE
AND CARE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
INDEX
138
fig. 151
F0N0072m
SEVERE DANGER: do not arrange cradle
child restraints facing backwards if the
passenger’s airbag is on. Deployment of
the airbag in an accident could cause
fatal injuries to the child. Always
deactivate the passenger air bag when
placing a child seat on the front seat. Move
the passenger’s seat as far back as possible to
avoid contact between the child seat and the
dashboard. Even when this is not mandatory
by law, the air bag should be immediately
reactivated when children are no longer carried
to ensure better protection for the adults.
MANUAL DEACTIVATION OF PASSENGER’S
FRONT AIR BAG AND SIDE BAG CHEST
PROTECTION
(for versions/markets where provided)
Whenever a child needs to be carried on the front seat,
the passenger’s front airbag and the Side Bag chest
protection (for versions/markets where provided) must
be deactivated.
The instrument panel warning light F will switch on
constantly until the passenger’s front air bag and Side
Bag (chest protection) are reactivated (for versions/
markets where provided).
WARNING
To deactivate the passenger’s front air
bag and the side bag (chest protection)
(for versions/markets where provided), refer to
paragraphs “Digital display” and “Multifunction
display” in section “Dashboard and controls”.
SIDE BAGS
The vehicle is fitted with front side bags for driver and
passenger (for versions/markets where provided) for
protecting the chest and window bags (for versions/
markets where provided) for protecting front and rear
passengers’ heads.
Side bags (for versions/markets where provided) protect
occupants from side impacts of medium-high severity, by
placing the bag between the occupant and the internal
parts of the side structure of the vehicle. Non-activation
of side bags in other types of collisions (head-on
collisions, rear shunts, roll-overs, etc...) is not an
indication of system malfunction.
An electronic control unit causes the bags to inflate
in the event of a side impact. The bags inflate
instantaneously placing themselves between the
occupants’ bodies and the structures which could cause
injury. They deflate immediately afterwards.
Side bags (for versions/markets where provided) are not
a replacement of but complementary to the belts, which
you are recommended to always wear, as specified by
law in Europe and most non-European countries.
FRONT SIDE BAGS – CHEST AND PELVIS
ZONE fig. 152 (for versions/markets where provided)
Housed in the seats’ backrests, they consist of an
instantly-inflating bag designed to protect the occupants’
chest and pelvis zone in the event of a side impact of
medium-high severity.
KNOWING
YOUR CAR
SAFETY
STARTING
AND
DRIVING
WARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGES
IN AN
EMERGENCY
MAINTENANCE
AND CARE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
INDEX
139
KNOWING
YOUR CAR
SAFETY
STARTING
AND
DRIVING
WARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGES
IN AN
EMERGENCY
SIDE WINDOW BAGS – HEAD PROTECTION
fig. 153 (for versions/markets where provided)
They consist of two curtain bags, one on the right and
the other on the left side of the vehicle, located behind
the side coverings of the roof and covered by special
finishing.
Window bags have been designed for protecting the
head of front occupants in the event of side impact,
thanks to the wide bag inflation surface.
IMPORTANT In the event of side impact, you can
obtain the best protection by the system by maintaining
a correct position on the seat, thus allowing the bags to
unfold correctly.
IMPORTANT The front air bags and/or side bags may
be deployed if the vehicle is subject to heavy knocks or
accidents involving the underbody area, such as for
example violent impacts, against steps, kerbs or low
obstacles, vehicle falling into big pot holes or
depressions in the road.
IMPORTANT A small amount of dust will be released
when the air bags are deployed. The dust is not harmful
and does not indicate the beginning of a fire.
Furthermore, the surface of the deployed bag and the
interior of the vehicle may be covered in a dusty
residue: this may irritate your skin and eyes. Wash with
mild soap and water in the event of exposure.
The expiration dates of the explosive charge and the
clock wire are shown on a label contained in the glove
box. Contact a Fiat Dealership to have the devices
replaced when the expiry date approaches.
IMPORTANT Should an accident occur in which any of
the safety devices is activated, take the car to a Fiat
Dealership to have the activated devices replaced and to
have the system checked.
Every control, repair and replacement operation
concerning the air bags must only be carried out at
a Fiat Dealership.
MAINTENANCE
AND CARE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
INDEX
140
fig. 152
F0N0140m
fig. 153
F0N0133m
If you are having the vehicle scrapped, have the system
deactivated at a Fiat Dealership first. If the vehicle
changes ownership, the new owner must be informed of
how to use the air bags and the above warnings and also
be given this “Owner Handbook”.
IMPORTANT Pretensioners, front airbags and front side
bags are deployed according to different logics on the
basic of the type of collision. Non-deployment of one of
the devices does not necessarily indicate a system
malfunction.
WARNING
Never rest head, arms or elbows on the
door, on the windows or in the window
bag deployment area to prevent possible
injuries during the inflation phase.
GENERAL WARNINGS
WARNING
If when turning the key to MAR-ON the
warning light ¬ does not turn on or if it
stays on when travelling (together with the
message on the multifunction display, for
versions/markets, where provided) there could be
a failure in the safety systems; in this event air
bags or pretensioners may fail to trigger in the
event of impact or, in a lower number of cases,
they could trigger accidentally. Contact a Fiat
Dealership immediately to have the system
checked before driving off.
WARNING
WARNING
Do not cover the front and rear seat
backrest with upholstery or seat covers
that hinder deployment of the side bag.
Never lean head, arms or elbows out of
window.
WARNING
Do not travel with objects in your lap,
in front of your chest, or with pipes,
pencils, etc. between your lips. In the event of
crash with airbag activation, you may be
seriously injured.
KNOWING
YOUR CAR
SAFETY
STARTING
AND
DRIVING
WARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGES
IN AN
EMERGENCY
MAINTENANCE
AND CARE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
INDEX
141
KNOWING
YOUR CAR
SAFETY
STARTING
AND
DRIVING
WARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGES
IN AN
EMERGENCY
MAINTENANCE
AND CARE
WARNING
Always drive keeping your hands on the
rim of the steering wheel so that, in the
event of airbag activation, it can inflate without
meeting obstacles. Do not drive with your body
bent forward. Keep the backrest in an upright
position, resting your back on it firmly.
WARNING
Turning the ignition key to MAR-ON, the
warning light F (airbag on passenger’s
side enabled) goes on and flashes for a few
seconds, thus reminding the passenger that the
airbag on his/her side will deploy in the event of
a collision. After this time, the light goes off.
WARNING
WARNING
With ignition key inserted, on MAR-ON,
even if the engine is off, the air bags can
activate even with the vehicle stopped, if it is hit
by another vehicle. For this reason, children
must never sit on the front seat, even if the
vehicle is not moving. On the other hand,
whenever the key is positioned on STOP,
the safety devices (airbags or pretensioners)
do not deploy after a collision. In this case
non-deployment of these devices does not
indicate a system malfunction.
Do not wash the car seats with water or
pressurised steam (either by hand or at
automatic washing stations).
WARNING
The front airbag is deployed in the event
of collisions with a more severe nature
than those required to activate the
pretensioners. For collisions in the range
between the two activation thresholds, the fact
that only the pretensioners activate is normal.
WARNING
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
INDEX
142
WARNING
If the vehicle has been subject to theft
or a theft attempt or if it has been
affected by vandalism, flooding or inundation,
have the air bag system checked at a Fiat
Dealership.
Do not hook rigid objects to clothes
hangers or to the support handles.
The air bag does not replace seat belts but
increases their efficiency. Furthermore, since
front air bags are not deployed in low speed
collisions, side collisions, rear-end shunts or rollovers, the passengers are only protected by the
seat belts which must be fastened at all times.
STARTING AND DRIVING
STARTING THE ENGINE
The vehicle is fitted with an electronic engine lock
device: if the engine fails to start, see the paragraph
“The Fiat CODE system” in section “Dashboard and
controls”.
In the first period of use, we recommend
avoiding excessive stress on the car (for
instance excessive acceleration, extended
travel at maximum speed, sudden braking etc.).
When the engine is switched off never
leave the key into the ignition switch to
prevent useless current absorption from
draining the battery.
WARNING
It is dangerous to let the engine run in
enclosed spaces. The engine consumes
the oxygen and discharges carbon dioxide,
carbon monoxide and other toxic gases.
KNOWING
YOUR CAR
WARNING
Remember that the brake servo and
power steering are not operational until
the engine has been started, therefore much
effort than usual is required on the brake pedal
and steering wheel.
PROCEDURE FOR
Proceed as follows:
❒ engage the handbrake;
❒ put the gear lever into neutral;
❒ turn the ignition key to MAR-ON: the warning lights
m and Y on the instrument panel will turn on;
❒ wait for the warning lights Y and m to turn off.
The hotter the engine is, the quicker this will happen;
❒ press the clutch pedal all the way down without
touching the accelerator;
❒ turn the ignition key to AVV as soon as the warning
light m turns off. Waiting too long will waste the
work done by the glow plugs. Release the key as
soon as the engine starts.
If the engine does not start at the first attempt, return
the ignition key to STOP before repeating starting.
SAFETY
STARTING
AND
DRIVING
WARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGES
IN AN
EMERGENCY
MAINTENANCE
AND CARE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
INDEX
143
KNOWING
YOUR CAR
SAFETY
If, when the ignition key is at MAR-ON the warning light
Y remains on together with warning light m, turn
the key to STOP and then back to MAR-ON; if the
warning lights remain on, try with the other keys
provided with the car.
IMPORTANT If the instrument panel warning light Y
stays on constantly, contact a Fiat Dealership
immediately.
STARTING
AND
DRIVING
IMPORTANT Never leave the ignition key on MAR-ON
when the engine is off.
WARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGES
The warning light m will flash for
60 seconds after starting or during
prolonged cranking to indicate a fault with
the glow plug preheating system. Use the vehicle
normally if the engine starts, but contact Fiat
Dealership as soon as possible.
IN AN
EMERGENCY
MAINTENANCE
AND CARE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
INDEX
144
Remember that the brake servo and
power steering are not operational until
the engine has been started, therefore
more effort than usual is required on the brake
pedal and steering wheel.
Avoid jump starting the engine by
pushing, towing or driving downhill.
This could cause a flow of fuel into the
catalytic converter and damage it beyond repair.
STOPPING THE ENGINE
Turn the ignition key to STOP while the engine is idling.
IMPORTANT After a taxing drive, you should allow the
engine to “catch its breath” before turning it off by
letting it idle to allow the temperature in the engine
compartment to fall.
HOW TO WARM UP THE ENGINE
AFTER IT HAS JUST STARTED
Proceed as follows:
❒ drive off slowly, letting the engine turn at medium
speed. Do not accelerate abruptly;
❒ do not demand maximum performance for the first
few kilometres. Wait until the engine coolant gauge
starts moving.
A quick burst on the accelerator before
turning off the engine serves absolutely
no practical purpose, it wastes fuel and is
damaging especially to turbocharged engines.
In some cases, when the engine switches off,
the fan could start for max. 120 seconds.
PARKING THE VEHICLE
HANDBRAKE fig. 154
Proceed as follows:
❒ stop the engine and engage the handbrake;
❒ engage a gear (on a slope, engage first gear if the
vehicle is faced uphill or reverse if it is faced
downhill) and leave the wheels steered.
The handbrake lever is located to the left side of the
driver’s seat. Pull the lever upwards to engage the
handbrake and ensure that the vehicle does not move.
Four or five notches are normally sufficient to brake the
vehicle on flat ground, while nine or ten may be
necessary on a steep slope with the vehicle loaded.
If the vehicle is parked on a steep slope, it is advisable
to block the wheels with a wedge or stone. Do not
leave the key in the ignition switch to prevent draining
the battery. Always remove the key when you leave
the vehicle.
IMPORTANT If this is not the case, contact a Fiat
Dealership to have the handbrake adjusted.
WARNING
Never leave children unattended in
the vehicle. Always remove the ignition
key when leaving the vehicle and take it out
with you.
When the handbrake lever is pulled up and the ignition
key is at MAR-ON, the instrument panel warning light
x will turn on. Proceed as follows to release the
handbrake:
❒ slightly lift the handbrake and press the release
button A;
❒ keep button A pressed and lower the lever.
The warning light x on the instrument panel will
turn off.
Press the brake pedal when carrying out this operation
to prevent the vehicle from moving accidentally.
IMPORTANT Apply the handbrake lever only when
the vehicle is at a standstill or with the vehicle in
motion only in the event of a fault in the hydraulic
system. If exceptional use is made of the handbrake
with the vehicle in motion, moderate traction is
advisable in order not to cause locking of the rear end
with consequent swerving of the vehicle.
KNOWING
YOUR CAR
SAFETY
STARTING
AND
DRIVING
WARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGES
IN AN
EMERGENCY
MAINTENANCE
AND CARE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
INDEX
fig. 154
F0N0073m
145
KNOWING
YOUR CAR
SAFETY
STARTING
AND
DRIVING
WARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGES
IN AN
EMERGENCY
USING THE MANUAL GEARBOX
To engage the gears, depress the clutch pedal fully and
shift the gear lever into the required positions (the
diagram is shown on the gear knob fig. 155).
To engage 6th gear (where provided), operate the lever
by pressing it towards the right in order to avoid
engaging 4th gear by mistake. The same applies to the
shift from 6th to 5th gear.
IMPORTANT Reverse may only be engaged when the
vehicle is at a standstill. With the engine running, wait
for at least 2 seconds with the clutch pedal fully pressed
before engaging reverse to prevent damage to the gears
and grating.
To engage reverse R from neutral, proceed as follows:
raise ring A under the knob and at the same time move
the gear lever to the right and then backwards.
MAINTENANCE
AND CARE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
INDEX
146
fig. 155
F0N0074m
WARNING
Press the clutch pedal fully to change
gears correctly. For this reason, there
must be no obstacles on the floor under the
pedals: ensure that rubber mats (if any) are
lying flat and do not interfere with the pedals.
Do not drive with your hand resting on
the gear lever, because this pressure, even
if light, over time can wear out the
internal gearbox components.
LOAD ADVICE
WARNING
The Fiat Ducato version used by you has been designed
and type approved on the basis of certain maximum
weights (see “Weights” table in the “Technical Data”
section): kerb weight, payload, total weight, maximum
weight on front axle, maximum weight on rear axle,
towable weight.
Irregular trajectories and abrupt braking
may cause sudden movements of the
load with consequent situations of hazard for
the driver and passengers: before setting off,
secure the load tightly using the appropriate
hooks on the floor and use steel cables, ropes
or chains strong enough to hold the items to be
secured.
WARNING
Each of these must be strictly observed
and MUST NEVER BE EXCEEDED in
any case. In particular, ensure that you never
exceed the maximum permitted weights on the
front and rear axles when arranging the load on
the vehicle (particularly if the vehicle is
equipped with a specific trim level).
IMPORTANT The maximum permitted load on the
floor fastenings is 500 kg; the maximum permitted load
on the side panel is 150 kg.
WARNING
If a vehicle is parked on a very steep
gradient or with a side gradient, opening
the rear door or side door could cause any
unsecured items to emerge suddenly.
IMPORTANT For versions with right and left side flaps,
it is advisable to reposition the release lever in the
closed position before lowering the sides.
KNOWING
YOUR CAR
SAFETY
STARTING
AND
DRIVING
WARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGES
IN AN
EMERGENCY
MAINTENANCE
AND CARE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
INDEX
147
KNOWING
YOUR CAR
SAFETY
STARTING
AND
DRIVING
WARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGES
IN AN
EMERGENCY
MAINTENANCE
AND CARE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
INDEX
148
WARNING
If you wish to carry petrol in a reserve
tank, observe the legal restrictions and
only use a tank that is type approved and
properly secured to the load anchorage
eyebolts. However, the risk of fire in the event
of an accident increases.
CONTAINING RUNNING COSTS
Here are some suggestions which may help you to keep
the running costs of your vehicle down and lower the
amount of toxic emissions released into the
atmosphere.
GENERAL CONSIDERATIONS
Vehicle maintenance
In addition to these general precautions, some simple
precautions can improve driving safety, travelling
comfort and vehicle durability:
Have checks and adjustments carried out in accordance
with the “Scheduled Servicing Plan”.
❒ distribute the load evenly over the floor: if it is
necessary to concentrate it in a single area, choose
an area mid-way between both axles;
Tyres
❒ remember that the lower the load, the lower the
vehicle’s centre of gravity, making for a safer drive:
therefore always position the heaviest goods lower
down;
❒ lastly, remember that the vehicle’s dynamic
behaviour is affected by the weight transported:
in particular, the stopping distances are longer,
especially at high speed.
Check the pressure of the tyres routinely at an interval
of no more than 4 weeks: if the pressure is too low,
consumption levels increase as resistance to rolling is
higher.
Unnecessary loads
Do not travel with an overloaded boot. The weight of
the vehicle (especially when driving in town) and its
geometry greatly affect fuel consumption and stability.
Roof rack/ski rack
Remove the roof rack or the ski rack from the roof
after use. These accessories decrease aerodynamic
penetration of the vehicle and have a negative effect on
fuel consumption. It is better to use a trailer, particularly
for transporting bulky objects.
Electric devices
Unnecessary actions
Use electric devices only for the amount of time
needed. Rear heated window, additional headlights,
windscreen wipers and heater fan need a considerable
amount of energy, therefore increasing the requirement
of current increases fuel consumption (up to +25% in
the urban cycle).
Avoid accelerating when starting at traffic lights or
before switching off the engine. The latter action, like
doubling the clutch, is unnecessary and causes increase
of consumption and pollution.
Climate control system
Use a higher gear as soon as traffic and road conditions
allow. Using a low gear for faster acceleration will increase
consumption. In the same way improper use of a high gear
increases consumption, emissions an engine wear.
The climate control system is an additional load which
greatly affects the engine leading to higher consumption
(on average up to +20%). When the temperature
outside the car permits it, use the air vents where
possible.
Devices for aerodynamic control
The use of non-certified devices for aerodynamic
control may adversely affect air drag and consumption
levels.
DRIVING STYLE
Starting
Do not warm the engine with the vehicle at a standstill or
at idle or high speed: under these conditions the engine
warms up much more slowly, increasing consumption and
emissions. It is therefore advisable to move off
immediately, slowly, avoiding high speeds. This way the
engine will warm faster.
Gear selection
Max. speed
Fuel consumption considerably increases with speed.
Keep your speed as even as possible, avoiding unnecessary
braking and acceleration, which cause excessive fuel
consumption and increased emissions.
Acceleration
Accelerating violently will greatly affect consumption and
emissions: acceleration should therefore be gradual and
should not exceed the maximum torque.
KNOWING
YOUR CAR
SAFETY
STARTING
AND
DRIVING
WARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGES
IN AN
EMERGENCY
MAINTENANCE
AND CARE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
INDEX
149
KNOWING
YOUR CAR
SAFETY
STARTING
AND
DRIVING
WARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGES
IN AN
EMERGENCY
MAINTENANCE
AND CARE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
INDEX
150
CONDITIONS OF USE
Cold starting
Short journeys and frequent cold starts will prevent the
engine from reaching optimal running temperature.
Consequently, both consumption (from +15 to +30% on
urban cycle ) and emissions will increase.
Traffic and road conditions
TOWING TRAILERS
IMPORTANT NOTES
The vehicle must be provided with a type-approved tow
hook and adequate electrical system to tow caravans or
trailers. Installation should be carried out by specialised
personnel who will issue the required papers for
travelling on roads.
Rather high consumption levels are linked to situations
with heavy traffic, for instance when travelling in queues
with frequent use of the lower gears or in cities with
many traffic lights. Winding mountain roads and rough
road surfaces also adversely affect consumption.
Install any specific and/or additional rear view mirrors as
specified by the Highway Code.
Traffic hold-ups
Engage a low gear when driving downhill, rather than
constantly using the brake.
During prolonged hold-ups (e.g. level crossings) the
engine should be switched off.
Remember that when towing a trailer, steep hills are
harder to climb, the braking spaces increase and
overtaking takes longer depending on the overall weight.
The weight of the trailer on the vehicle tow hook will
reduce the loading capacity of the vehicle by the same
amount. Consider the weight of the trailer fully laden,
including accessories and luggage, to make sure you do
not exceed the maximum towable weight (shown on
the vehicle registration document).
Do not exceed the speed limits specific for each country
you are driving in, in the case of vehicles towing trailers.
In any case, the top speed must not exceed 100 km/h.
Fit a suitable towing stabiliser to the trailer to be towed.
WARNING
The ABS device with which the vehicle
may be equipped will not control the
braking system of the trailer. Particular caution
is required on slippery roads.
INSTALLING THE TOW HOOK
The towing device should be fastened to the body by
specialised personnel according to any additional and/or
integrative information supplied by the Manufacturer of
the device.
The towing device must meet current regulations with
reference to Directive 94/20/EEC and subsequent
amendments.
WARNING
Never modify the braking system of the
vehicle to control the trailer brake. The
trailer braking system must be fully independent
from the hydraulic system of the vehicle.
For any version the towing device used must match the
towable weight of the vehicle on which it is to be
installed.
For the electric connection a standard connector should
be used which is generally placed on a special bracket
normally fastened to the towing device, and a special
ECU for external trailer light control must be installed
on the vehicle. For the electrical connection, 7 or 13 pin
12 V DC connections are to be used (CUNA/UNI and
ISO/DIN Standards). Follow the instructions provided by
the vehicle manufacturer and/or the tow hitch
manufacturer.
An electric brake or other device should be supplied
directly by the battery through a cable with a cross
section of no less than 2.5 mm2.
KNOWING
YOUR CAR
SAFETY
STARTING
AND
DRIVING
WARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGES
IN AN
EMERGENCY
MAINTENANCE
AND CARE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
INDEX
151
KNOWING
YOUR CAR
SAFETY
STARTING
AND
DRIVING
WARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGES
IN AN
EMERGENCY
MAINTENANCE
AND CARE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
INDEX
152
IMPORTANT The engine must be running to use the
electric brake or a winch.
In addition to the electrical branches, the vehicle’s
electric system can only be connected to the supply
cable for an electric brake and to the cable for an
internal light, though not above 15 W. For connections
use the preset control unit with battery cable no less
than 2.5 mm2.
IMPORTANT The trailer tow hook contributes to the
length of the vehicle. When installing on long wheelbase
versions, it is only possible to install removable tow
hooks because the total vehicle length limit of 6 metres
is exceeded.
If no trailer is fitted, the hook must be removed from
the attachment base and it must not exceed the
vehicle’s original length.
IMPORTANT If you wish to leave the tow hook fitted
without towing a trailer, it is advisable to contact a Fiat
Dealership for the relevant system update operations
because the tow hook could be detected as an obstacle
by the central sensors.
Installation diagram for Van
versions – fig. 156
The tow hook structure must be
fastened in the points shown by the
symbol Ø using a total of 6
M10x1.25 screws and 4 M12 screws.
M12
Existing hole
The internal back plates must be at
least 5 mm thick.
M12
Existing hole
laden
MAX LOAD ON BALL: 100/120 kg
according to the payload (see
“Weights” table in the “Technical
data” section).
M10 (3x)
Existing nut
WARNING
After fitting, the screw
holes must be sealed to
prevent exhaust gas leaks.
Standard ball
To install a tow hook, the bumpers
must be trimmed as described in the
supplier’s installation kit.
M10 (3x)
Existing nut
SAFETY
STARTING
AND
DRIVING
WARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGES
IN AN
EMERGENCY
MAINTENANCE
AND CARE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
INDEX
M12
Existing hole
fig. 156
KNOWING
YOUR CAR
F0N0189m
153
Installation diagram for Truck
and Chassis Cab versions
– fig. 157
KNOWING
YOUR CAR
Another tow hook specific to Truck
and Chassis Cab versions is shown
in fig. 157.
The structure Ø must be fastened in
the points shown using a total of
6 M10x1.25 screws and 4 M12
screws.
SAFETY
Existing hole
STARTING
AND
DRIVING
laden
Existing hole
WARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGES
MAX LOAD ON BALL: 100/120 kg
according to the payload (see
“Weights” table in the “Technical
data” section).
Existing hole
IN AN
EMERGENCY
WARNING
After fitting, the screw
holes must be sealed to
prevent exhaust gas from
entering.
Standard ball
MAINTENANCE
AND CARE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
INDEX
154
fig. 157
F0N0250m
SNOW TYRES
SNOW CHAINS
Fiat Dealerships will be happy to provide advice
concerning the most suitable type of tyres for the
customer’s requirements. The performance of these
tyres is considerably reduced when the tread depth is
less than 4 mm. Replace them in this case. Due to snow
tyre features, under normal conditions of use or on long
motorway journeys, the performance of these tyres is
much lower than that of standard tyres. Limit
performance according to the use for which they were
certified.
IMPORTANT When using snow tyres with a maximum
speed index below the one that can be reached by the
vehicle (increased by 5%), place a notice in the
passenger compartment, plainly in view, which states the
maximum speed allowed by the snow tyres (as per EC
Directive).
All four tyres should be the same (brand and track) to
ensure greater safety when driving and braking and better
driveability. Remember that it is inappropriate to change
the rotation direction of tyres.
The use of snow chains should be in compliance with
local regulations. The snow chains may be applied only
onto the front wheel tyres (drive wheels). Use of
Lineaccessori Fiat snow chains is recommended. Check
the tension of the snow chains after the first few metres
have been driven.
WARNING
The max speed for snow tyres with “Q”
marking is 160 km/h; 190 km/h for tyres
with “T” marking and 210 km/h for tyres with H
marking. The Highway Code speed limits must
however be always strictly observed.
IMPORTANT With snow chains, use the accelerator
with extreme care to prevent or to limit as much as
possible slipping of the drive wheels which could cause
the chains to break resulting in damage to the car body
or mechanical components.
IMPORTANT Use reduced-size snow chains.
WARNING
Keep your speed down when snow
chains are fitted. Do not exceed
50 km/h. Avoid potholes, steps and
pavements and also avoid driving long
distances on roads not covered with
snow in order to prevent damaging the vehicle
and the roadbed.
KNOWING
YOUR CAR
SAFETY
STARTING
AND
DRIVING
WARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGES
IN AN
EMERGENCY
MAINTENANCE
AND CARE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
INDEX
155
CONOSCENZA
DEL
VEICOLO
SICUREZZA
AVVIAMENTO
E GUIDA
SPIE E
MESSAGGI
IN EMERGENZA
MANUTENZIONE
E CURA
DATI TECNICI
If the vehicle needs to be off the road for longer than
one month, the following precautions must be taken:
❒ cover the vehicle with a piece of fabric or perforated
plastic sheet. Do not use compact plastic tarpaulins,
which prevent humidity from evaporating from the
surface of the vehicle;
❒ park the vehicle indoors in a dry and, possibly, wellventilated place;
❒ inflate tyres to a pressure of +0.5 bar above the
normal specified pressure and check it at intervals;
❒ engage a gear;
❒ if you don’t disconnect the battery from the electric
system, check its charge every month and recharge it
if the optical indicator shows a dark colour without
the central green area;
LONG VEHICLE INACTIVITY
❒ check that the handbrake is not engaged;
❒ disconnect the negative battery terminal and check
battery charge. Repeat this check once every three
months during storage. Recharge if the optical
indicator shows a dark colour without the central
green area (see “Battery recharging” in the section
“Dashboard and controls”); If the vehicle is equipped
with a battery disconnection function (disconnector),
see the description of the procedure in the
“Controls” paragraph in the “Dashboard and
controls” section;
❒ clean and protect the painted parts using protective
wax;
❒ clean and protect the shiny metal parts using special
commercially-available compounds;
❒ sprinkle talcum powder on the rubber windscreen
and rear window wiper blades and lift them off
the glass;
❒ slightly open the windows;
INDICE
156
❒ do not drain the engine cooling system.
IMPORTANT If the vehicle is equipped with an alarm
system, switch off the vehicle alarm with the remote
control.
WARNING LIGHTS AND MESSAGES
WARNING LIGHTS AND MESSAGES
GENERAL WARNINGS
The turning on of the warning light is accompanied by
a specific message and/or buzzer sound where provided
by instrument panel. These indications are brief and
precautionary and as such must not be considered as
exhaustive and/or an alternative to the information
contained in the Owner Handbook, which you are
recommended to read carefully in all cases. Always refer
to the information in this chapter in the event of
a failure indication.
IMPORTANT Failure indications displayed are divided
into two categories: very serious and less serious
failures.
Very serious failures prompt a prolonged cycle of
signals.
LOW BRAKE FLUID LEVEL (red)
HANDBRAKE ENGAGED (red)
x When the key is turned to the MAR-ON
position the warning light comes on but should
go out after a few seconds.
Low brake fluid level
The warning light comes on when the level of the brake
fluid in the reservoir falls below the minimum level due
to a possible leak in the circuit.
On some versions the display shows the dedicated
message.
WARNING
If the warning light x turns on when
Less serious failures prompt a shorter cycle of signals.
travelling (on certain versions together
with the message on the display) stop the car
immediately and contact a Fiat Dealership.
Press MODE to stop the warning cycle in both cases.
The instrument panel warning light will stay on until the
cause of the failure is eliminated.
Handbrake engaged
For messages relevant to the versions equipped with
Dualogic gearbox, see the attached Supplement.
The warning light turns on when the handbrake is
engaged.
On certain versions, if the vehicle is moving the buzzer
will also sound.
IMPORTANT If the warning light turns on when
travelling, check that the handbrake is not engaged.
KNOWING
YOUR CAR
SAFETY
STARTING
AND
DRIVING
WARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGES
IN AN
EMERGENCY
MAINTENANCE
AND CARE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
INDEX
157
KNOWING
YOUR CAR
SAFETY
STARTING
AND
DRIVING
WARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGES
IN AN
EMERGENCY
MAINTENANCE
AND CARE
¬
When the key is turned to the MAR-ON
position the warning light comes on but should
go out after a few seconds.
The warning light stays on constantly if there is a failure
in the air bag system.
On some versions the display shows the dedicated
message.
The warning light ¬ for airbag fault comes on if the
warning light F for passenger’s bag deactivation is
faulty.
WARNING
If when turning the key to MAR-ON
the warning light ¬ does not turn on
or if it stays on when travelling, there could be
a failure in the safety systems; in this event air
bags or pretensioners may not be deployed in
the event of impact or, in a lower number of
cases, they deploy accidentally. Contact a Fiat
Dealership immediately to have the system
checked.
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
ç
INDEX
158
AIRBAG FAILURE (red)
HOT ENGINE COOLANT (red)
When the key is turned to the MAR-ON
position the warning light comes on but should
go out after a few seconds.
The warning light turns on when the engine is
overheated.
If the warning light comes on, proceed as follows:
❒ when driving normally: stop the vehicle, switch off
the engine and check that the water level in the
reservoir is not below the MIN mark. If it is not, wait
for a few minutes for the engine to cool down then
slowly and carefully open the cap, top up with
coolant and check that the level is between the MIN
and MAX marks. Also check for any fluid leaks.
If, when restarting, the warning light should come on
again, contact a Fiat Dealership.
❒ heavy duty use of vehicle (e.g.: towing trailer uphill
or fully laden car): decrease speed and if the warning
light stays on, stop the vehicle. Wait for 2 or
3 minutes with the engine running and slightly
accelerated to further accelerate the coolant
circulation. Then stop the engine. Check the correct
liquid level as described above.
IMPORTANT Over demanding routes, it is advisable to
keep the engine on and slightly accelerated for a few
minutes before switching it off.
On some versions the display shows the dedicated
message.
w
LOW BATTERY CHARGE (red)
The warning light comes on when the ignition
key is turned to MAR-ON, but it should go
out as soon as the engine has started (with the
engine running at idle speed a brief delay before going
out is acceptable).
If the warning light stays on constantly or keeps flashing:
contact immediately Fiat Dealership.
LIGHT STAYS ON: LOW ENGINE OIL
v PRESSURE (red)
FLASHING: EXHAUSTED ENGINE OIL
(red)
(only Multijet versions with DPF)
When the ignition key is moved to MAR-ON, the
warning light switches on, and should go out as soon as
the engine is started.
1. Low engine oil pressure
The warning light turns on and stays on constantly
along with a message on the display (for versions/
markets where provided) when the system detects that
engine oil pressure is low.
WARNING
If the warning light v turns on when
the car is travelling (on certain versions
together with the message on the display) stop
the engine immediately and contact a Fiat
Dealership.
2. Exhausted engine oil
(only Multijet versions with DPF)
The warning light v blinks along with a message on
the display (for versions/markets, where provided)
when the system detects that engine oil pressure is low.
If the warning light flashes, this does not mean that the
vehicle is defective, but simply informs the driver that
the oil needs to be changed as a result of regular
vehicle use. If the oil is not changed, warning light will
also come on and engine operation is limited to 3000
rpm when a second threshold is reached.
If the oil is not changed, the engine is limited to 1500
rpm to prevent damage when a third threshold is
reached.
Engine oil must be replaced when warning
light v starts blinking to avoid damage
to the engine. Contact a Fiat Dealership.
KNOWING
YOUR CAR
SAFETY
STARTING
AND
DRIVING
WARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGES
IN AN
EMERGENCY
MAINTENANCE
AND CARE
Remember that the deterioration of the engine oil is
accelerated by:
– mainly town use of the vehicle which makes the DPF
regeneration process more frequent;
– use of the vehicle for short trips, preventing the
engine from reaching operating temperature;
– repeated interruption of the regeneration process,
signalled by the DPF warning light coming on.
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
INDEX
159
KNOWING
YOUR CAR
SAFETY
STARTING
AND
DRIVING
WARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGES
IN AN
EMERGENCY
MAINTENANCE
AND CARE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
INDEX
160
WARNING
Degraded engine oil should be replaced as
soon as possible after the warning light
comes on, and never more than 500 km after it
first comes on.
If the above instructions are not complied with,
the engine could be severely damaged and it may
invalidate the warranty. Please note also that the
switching on of this warning light does not depend
on the oil quantity in the engine; when the
warning light flashes, never add oil.
´
INCOMPLETE DOOR/LOAD
COMPARTMENT CLOSURE (red)
On some versions the warning light turns on
when one or more doors or the tailgate are not
properly closed.
On some versions, the display shows a dedicated
message that indicates left/right front door or rear/load
compartment door opening.
A buzzer will sound when doors/tailgate are open and
the vehicle is moving.
<
SEAT BELT NOT FASTENED (red)
The warning light on the display will light up
when the vehicle is moving and the driver’s
seat belt is not correctly fastened. The warning
light will flash and a buzzer will sound if the front seat
belts are not correctly fastened with the vehicle in
motion. The SBR (Seat Belt Reminder) system’s audible
warning can be disabled only by a Fiat Dealership. On
some versions the system may be reactivated from the
setup menu.
x >
EBD FAILURE (red)
(amber)
Warning lights x and > lit at the
same time with the engine running,
indicate an EBD system failure or that the system is not
available. Early locking of the rear wheels may occur in
the event of violent braking causing the car to swerve.
Drive very carefully to a Fiat Dealership to have the
system inspected immediately.
On some versions the display shows the dedicated
message.
U
INJECTION SYSTEM FAILURE
(amber)
In normal conditions, when the ignition key is
moved to MAR-ON, the warning light turns on
and should go off after engine start-up.
The warning light staying on or turning on when
travelling, signals a fault in the supply/ignition system
which could cause possible lack of performance, poor
handling and high consumption levels.
On some versions the display shows the dedicated
message.
Under these conditions, you may continue travelling at
moderate speed without demanding excessive effort
from the engine. Contact a Fiat Dealership as soon as
possible.
F
FRONT PASSENGER’S AIR BAG
DEACTIVATED (amber)
(for versions/markets, where provided)
KNOWING
YOUR CAR
The warning light F comes on when the front
passenger’s air bag is deactivated.
With front passenger air bag on, when the ignition key
is turned to MAR-ON the F warning light comes on
constantly for about 4 seconds and then should go out.
If the warning light F flashes to report a failure of the
warning light ¬, the passenger's protection is
deactivated for markets where this feature is available,
otherwise it it remains on.
SAFETY
STARTING
AND
DRIVING
WARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGES
WARNING
Warning light F indicates failure of
warning light ¬. This condition is
indicated by intermittent blinking of warning
light F for longer than 4 seconds. In this case,
the warning light ¬ may not indicate failures in
the retaining system. Before resuming driving,
contact a Fiat Dealership immediately to have
the system checked.
IN AN
EMERGENCY
MAINTENANCE
AND CARE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
INDEX
161
KNOWING
YOUR CAR
SAFETY
STARTING
AND
DRIVING
WARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGES
IN AN
EMERGENCY
>
ABS SYSTEM FAILURE (amber)
When the key is turned to the MAR-ON
position the warning light comes on but should
go out after a few seconds.
The warning light will light up when the system is either
not working or not available. Under these
circumstances the braking system will work as normal
without the extra performance offered by the ABS
system. Drive carefully and contact a Fiat Dealership as
soon as possible.
On some versions the display shows the dedicated
message.
ç
Turning the key to the MAR-ON position
illuminates the warning light, but it should switch
off after a few seconds.
The warning light comes on when there are about
10-12 litres of fuel (for versions with tank capacity
90-120 l) or 10 l (for versions with tank capacity 60 l)
remaining in the tank.
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
IMPORTANT The warning light will flash to indicate
a system failure. If this is the case, contact a Fiat
Dealership to have the system checked.
162
GLOW PLUG HEATING FAILURE
(Multijet versions – amber)
Glow plugs
This warning light comes on when the key is turned to
MAR-ON. It will go out as soon as the heater plugs
have reached a preset temperature. Start the engine as
soon as the warning light goes out.
IMPORTANT At high ambient temperatures the
warning light may stay on for an extremely short time.
Glow plug warming failure
FUEL RESERVE (amber)
MAINTENANCE
AND CARE
INDEX
m
GLOW PLUG PRE-HEATING
(Multijet versions – amber)
The warning light flashes if there is a fault in the
preheating system. Contact a Fiat Dealership as soon
as possible.
On some versions the display shows the dedicated
message.
c
WATER IN DIESEL FILTER (Multijet
versions – amber)
When the key is turned to the MAR-ON
position the warning light comes on but should
go out after a few seconds.
The warning light turns on when there is water in the
diesel fuel filter.
On some versions the display shows the dedicated
message.
The presence of water in the supply
circuit may cause severe damage to the
injection system and irregular engine
operation. If warning light c lights up (on some
versions with the message on the display),
contact a Fiat Dealership as soon as possible to
have the system bled. If the same message is
displayed immediately after refuelling, water may
have entered the tank: turn the engine off
immediately and contact a Fiat Dealership.
Y
VEHICLE PROTECTION SYSTEM
FAILURE – FIAT CODE (amber)
Turning the key to MAR-ON the warning light
will flash only once and then go off.
When the warning light comes on constantly, with key
in MAR-ON, this indicates:
❒ a potential fault (refer to “The Fiat CODE system”
paragraph in the section “Dashboard and controls”);
❒ a possible theft attempt with an alarm; in this case
the warning light goes off after approximately
10 seconds.
KNOWING
YOUR CAR
SAFETY
STARTING
AND
DRIVING
If with the engine running the warning light Y flashes,
the vehicle is not protected by the engine inhibitor
device (see “Fiat Code system” in section “Dashboard
and controls”).
WARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGES
Contact a Fiat Dealership to have all the keys
reprogrammed.
IN AN
EMERGENCY
MAINTENANCE
AND CARE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
INDEX
163
KNOWING
YOUR CAR
SAFETY
W
EXTERNAL LIGHT FAILURE
(amber)
(for versions/markets, where provided)
The warning light will come on (some versions
only) when a failure to one of the following lights is
detected:
– side lights
STARTING
AND
DRIVING
– brake lights
– rear fog lights
– direction indicators
WARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGES
– reversing lights.
IN AN
EMERGENCY
On some versions the display shows the dedicated
message.
MAINTENANCE
AND CARE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
The failure relating to these lights could be: one or
more blown bulbs, a blown protection fuse or a break
in the electrical connection.
4
REAR FOG LIGHTS (amber)
The warning light comes on when the rear fog
lights are turned on.
è
GENERIC FAILURE INDICATION
(amber)
The warning light turns on in the following
circumstances.
Engine oil pressure sensor failure
The warning light turns on when failure is detected in
engine oil pressure sensor. Contact a Fiat Dealership to
have the failure fixed as soon as possible.
Fuel cut-off switch tripped
The warning light comes on when the inertial fuel
cut-off switch is triggered.
The display will show the dedicated message.
Parking sensor fault
The warning light comes on when a rain sensor failure is
detected. Go to a Fiat Dealership.
The display shows the dedicated message.
Rain sensor fault
See what is described for warning light t.
Daylight failure (with multifunction display)
The warning light comes on when a daylight failure is
detected.
The display shows the dedicated message.
INDEX
164
DPF (PARTICULATE FILTER)
h CLEANING IN PROGRESS
(amber)
(only Multijet versions with DPF)
When the key is turned to the MAR-ON position the
warning light comes on but should go out after a few
seconds.
The warning light turns on constantly when the DPF
system needs to eliminate the trapped pollutants
through the regeneration process.
The warning light does not come on every time the
DPF is being regenerated, rather only when the driving
conditions are such that the driver needs to know it.
The warning light will go off if the vehicle stays in
motion until regeneration has been completed. As an
average, the process lasts fifteen minutes.
Optimum conditions for completing the process are
achieved by travelling at 60 km/h with engine revs
above 2000 rpm.
If this warning light comes on, it does not mean the
vehicle is defective, so there is no need to take it to
a garage.
For versions/markets where provided, the display
shows the dedicated message and the warning light
comes on.
During regeneration, the fan could be
operated.
WARNING
Always drive at a speed appropriate to
the traffic conditions, the weather and
speed limits. The engine can also be switched off
if the DPF warning light is on; nevertheless,
repeated interruptions of the regeneration
process could cause an early decay of engine oil.
For this reason, always wait until the warning
light switches off before stopping the engine as
described above. It is not advisable to complete
DPF regeneration with the vehicle stationary.
á
ESP-ASR SYSTEM
FAILURE/TRACTION PLUS
(amber)
(for versions/markets, where provided)
KNOWING
YOUR CAR
SAFETY
STARTING
AND
DRIVING
WARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGES
IN AN
EMERGENCY
HILL HOLDER FAILURE (amber)
(for versions/markets, where provided)
When the key is turned to the MAR-ON position the
warning light comes on but should go out after a few
seconds.
MAINTENANCE
AND CARE
ESP-ASR system failure/TRACTION PLUS
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
If the warning light does not go off or stays on together
with the LED on the ASR button when travelling,
contact a Fiat Dealership.
On certain versions the dedicated message is displayed.
INDEX
N.B. The warning light flashing when driving indicates
that the ESP system has been activated.
165
KNOWING
YOUR CAR
SAFETY
STARTING
AND
DRIVING
WARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGES
IN AN
EMERGENCY
MAINTENANCE
AND CARE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
INDEX
166
Hill Holder failure
The warning light will turn on when the Hill Holder
system is faulty. In this case, contact a Fiat Dealership as
soon as possible.
On certain versions the dedicated message is displayed.
d
WORN BRAKE PADS
(amber)
The warning light on the dial turns on if the
front brake pads are worn; in this case have
them changed as soon as possible.
3
DIPPED LOW HEADLAMPS (green)
FOLLOW ME HOME (green)
Dipped beam headlights
The warning light switches on when the dipped beams
are turned on.
Follow me home
The warning light will turn on when this device is active
(see “Follow me home” in section “Dashboard and
controls”).
The display will show a dedicated message.
On certain versions the dedicated message is displayed.
t
PARKING SENSOR FAILURE (amber)
(for versions/markets, where provided)
The warning light turns on when failure is
detected in the parking sensors.
On some versions warning light è turns on as an
alternative.
Contact a Fiat Dealership.
On certain versions the dedicated message is displayed.
5
F
FRONT FOG LIGHTS (green)
The warning light turns on when the front fog
lights are turned on.
LEFT-HAND DIRECTION
INDICATOR (green – blinking)
The warning light turns on when the direction
indicator control lever is moved downwards or,
together with the right indicator, when the hazard
warning light button is pressed.
D
RIGHT-HAND DIRECTION
INDICATOR (green – blinking)
The warning light turns on when the direction
indicator control lever is moved upwards or,
together with the left indicator, when the hazard light
button is pressed.
Ü
CRUISE CONTROL
(where provided) (green)
When the key is turned to the MAR-ON
position the warning light comes on but should
go out after a few seconds.
The warning light is lit up on the display by rotating the
Cruise Control selector wheel to ON. On certain
versions the dedicated message is displayed.
1
g
POWER STEERING FAILURE (red)
Turning the ignition key to MAR-ON the
warning light on the dial turns on, but it should
go off after a few seconds.
If the warning light stays on together with the message
shown on the display and a buzzer, the power steering
is ineffective and the effort on the steering wheel
increases significantly even though the vehicle can be
steered. Contact a Fiat Dealership.
KNOWING
YOUR CAR
SAFETY
STARTING
AND
DRIVING
WARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGES
IN AN
EMERGENCY
MAIN BEAM HEADLIGHTS (blue)
The warning light comes on when the main
beams are turned on.
MAINTENANCE
AND CARE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
INDEX
167
KNOWING
YOUR CAR
SAFETY
STARTING
AND
DRIVING
WARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGES
IN AN
EMERGENCY
MAINTENANCE
AND CARE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
INDEX
168
Œ
SELF-LEVELLING SUSPENSION
FAILURE (red)
(for versions/markets where provided)
The warning light comes on when the ignition
key is turned to MAR-ON, but it should switch off after
a few seconds.
The warning light goes on when a fault is present in the
self-levelling suspension system.
t
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION
FAILURE/MAXIMUM TRANSMISSION
OIL TEMPERATURE
(red)
(for versions/markets where provided)
Turning the ignition key to MAR-ON the warning light
on the dial turns on, but it should go off after a few
seconds.
The warning light on the dial comes on flashing (along
with the display of the message and a buzzer) when
a transmission failure is detected.
The warning light on the dial comes on constantly
(along with the display of the message and a buzzer) to
indicate that the automatic transmission oil
temperature is too high.
POSSIBLE ICE ON ROAD
This indication starts flashing when the outside
temperature reaches or falls below 3°C to warn the
driver of the possible presence of ice on the road.
The display will show the dedicated message (only for
versions with a multifunction display).
LIMITED RANGE
The display will show the dedicated message to warn
the driver that the vehicle’s range is less than 50 km.
SPEED LIMIT EXCEEDED
The display shows the dedicated message when the
vehicle exceeds the set speed limit (see “Multifunction
Display” in section “Dashboard and controls”).
SCHEDULED MAINTENANCE
(for versions/markets where provided)
The display shows the dedicated message next to the
scheduled servicing warning and stays on until the deadline
is reached. The warning light goes off after the service has
been carried out at a Fiat Dealership or after 1000 km
have been covered at the service deadline.
DAYLIGHT FAILURE (with reconfigurable
multifunction display)
The display shows the dedicated message along with the
external light fault icon when a daylight failure is found.
IN AN EMERGENCY
In an emergency we recommend that you call the freephone number found in the Warranty Booklet.
You can go to our web site at www.fiat.com to find the Fiat Dealership nearest to you.
STARTING THE ENGINE
SAFETY
WARNING
EMERGENCY STARTING
Go to a Fiat Dealership immediately if instrument panel
warning light Y remains on constantly.
JUMP STARTING fig. 157-158
If the battery is flat, the engine may be started using an
auxiliary battery with the same capacity or a little higher
than the flat one. It is advisable to contact a Fiat
Dealership to check/replace the battery.
KNOWING
YOUR CAR
This procedure must be performed by
expert personnel because incorrect
actions may cause electrical discharge of
considerable intensity. Furthermore, battery
fluid is poisonous and corrosive: avoid contact
with your skin and eyes. Keep naked flames
away from the battery. No smoking. Do not
cause sparks.
STARTING
AND
DRIVING
WARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGES
IN AN
EMERGENCY
MAINTENANCE
AND CARE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
INDEX
fig. 157
F0N0075m
fig. 158
F0N0076m
169
KNOWING
YOUR CAR
SAFETY
STARTING
AND
DRIVING
WARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGES
IN AN
EMERGENCY
MAINTENANCE
AND CARE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
INDEX
170
Proceed as follows to start the car:
❒ raise the flap A to gain access to the positive battery
terminal fig. 157.
❒ connect the positive terminals (+ sign near the
terminal) of the two batteries with a jump lead;
❒ connect the negative terminal (–) of the auxiliary
battery to the earth point with a second cable as
shown in fig. 158;
❒ Start the engine;
❒ when the engine has been started, follow the
sequence above in reverse order to remove the
leads.
If after a few attempts the engine does not start, do not
persist but contact the nearest Fiat Dealership.
IMPORTANT Do not directly connect the negative
terminals of the two batteries: any sparks may ignite the
explosive gas which could come out of the battery.
If the auxiliary battery is installed on another vehicle,
prevent any metal parts on the latter and the vehicle
with the flat battery from accidentally coming into
contact.
BUMP STARTING
Never bump start the engine by pushing, towing or
driving downhill. This could cause a flow of fuel into the
catalytic converter and damage it beyond repair.
IMPORTANT Remember that the brake servo and the
power steering system are not activated until the engine
is started, a greater effort will therefore be required to
press the brake pedal or turn the steering wheel.
REPLACING A WHEEL
GENERAL INSTRUCTIONS
Wheel changing and correct use of the jack and spare
wheel (for versions/markets where provided) call for
some precautions, which are listed below.
WARNING
Indicate that the vehicle is stationary
according to the regulations in force:
emergency lights, refracting warning triangle,
etc. Passengers should leave the vehicle,
particularly if it is very loaded, and wait for the
wheel to be changed away from on-coming
traffic. Apply the handbrake.
WARNING
The spare wheel (for versions/markets
where provided) is specific for your
vehicle. Therefore, it must not be used on
vehicles of a different model. Do not use spare
wheels of different models on your vehicle. The
wheel bolts are specific to your vehicle: do not
use them on other models and do not use bolts
of other models.
WARNING
Repair and refit the standard wheel as
soon as possible. Do not apply grease to
the bolt threading before assembly: they might
come unscrewed.
WARNING
The jack may only be used to replace
wheels on the car which it equips or
other cars of the same model. Never use the
jack for other purposes, such as lifting other car
models. Never use the jack to carry out repairs
under the vehicle. Incorrect positioning of the
jack may cause the lifted vehicle to fall. Do not
use the jack for loads higher than those shown
on the label.
WARNING
Never tamper with the inflation valve.
Never introduce tools of any kind
between rim and tyre. Check tyre and spare
wheel pressure regularly referring to the values
shown in the “Technical Specifications” section.
Please note that:
❒ the jack weight is 4.5 kg;
❒ the jack requires no adjustment;
❒ the jack cannot be repaired. If it breaks it must be
replaced with a new jack;
❒ no tool other than its cranking device may be fitted
on the jack.
WARNING
No tools other than the crank provided
should be used with the spare wheel
lifting device; it should be operated by hand
only.
KNOWING
YOUR CAR
SAFETY
STARTING
AND
DRIVING
WARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGES
IN AN
EMERGENCY
To change a wheel proceed as follows:
❒ stop the vehicle in a position where it does not pose
a danger for on-coming traffic and where you can
replace the wheel safely. The ground must be flat
and sufficiently compact;
❒ turn the engine off and pull up the handbrake;
❒ engage first gear or reverse;
❒ wear the reflecting safety jacket (compulsory by law
in certain countries) before getting out of the
vehicle;
MAINTENANCE
AND CARE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
INDEX
171
KNOWING
YOUR CAR
SAFETY
STARTING
AND
DRIVING
WARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGES
IN AN
EMERGENCY
❒ indicate that the vehicle has broken down using the
devices required by the regulations in the current
country (e.g. warning triangle, hazard lights etc.);
❒ take the extension arm and the wrench from the
tool kit under the passenger seat (see
“Compartment under front passenger seat” in the
“Dashboard and Controls” section);
❒ for versions with alloy jacks, remove the press-fitted
hub cap;
❒ loosen the bolts on the wheel to be replaced by one
turn;
❒ turn the wheel to extend the jack partly;
❒ arrange the jack near the lift support closest to the
wheel to be replaced at the points shown in fig. 159.
For short wheelbase versions with retractable
footboard, the jack must be positioned at the lift
point shown in fig. 160 aligned (45°) so that it does
not interfere with the retractable footboard;
❒ warn anybody nearby that the vehicle is about to be
lifted. They must stay clear and not touch the vehicle
until it is back on the ground. Lift the vehicle.
After lifting the vehicle:
❒ for all versions, when gaining access through the
vehicle’s rear right wheel arch, adjust the screw
A-fig. 161 for the spare wheel retaining device, using
the spanner provided with the extension/adaptor B;
MAINTENANCE
AND CARE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
INDEX
172
fig. 159
F0N0193m
fig. 160
F0N0194m
❒ turn wrench C-fig. 162 anticlockwise 1 to allow the
lowering of the spare wheel.
❒ continue turning anticlockwise until the stop point,
signaled by the stiffening of the manoeuvre or a click
from the clutch present in the device.
WARNING
The device should only be operated by
hand, without using any type of tool
other than the crank provided like pneumatic or
electrical screwers.
KNOWING
YOUR CAR
SAFETY
❒ use the wheel dismantling spanner to remove the
wheel from the vehicle fig. 163;
❒ undo the retaining knob D-fig. 164 and release the
wheel releasing the support E.
WARNING
fig. 161
F0N0835m
The moving components of the jack
(screws and joints) can also cause
injuries: avoid touching them. In the event of
soiling with the lubricating grease, clean
thoroughly;
STARTING
AND
DRIVING
WARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGES
IN AN
EMERGENCY
MAINTENANCE
AND CARE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
INDEX
fig. 162
F0N0836m
fig. 163
F0N0165m
173
KNOWING
YOUR CAR
SAFETY
STARTING
AND
DRIVING
WARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGES
IN AN
EMERGENCY
❒ fully unscrew the bolts using wrench F-fig. 165 and
remove the wheel;
❒ fit the spare wheel, aligning holes G-fig. 166 with the
pins H. When fitting the spare wheel, ensure that the
wheel support surfaces are clean and free of
impurities that could later cause the bolts to loosen;
❒ introduce the supplied wrench C-fig. 162 with the
suitable extension B-fig. 161 on the screw A-fig. 161
of the spare wheel housing manoeuvring device and
turn clockwise 2 to lift the spare wheel back up until
it is fully supported in its housing beneath the floor
pan, checking that the attachment reference
D-fig. 162 appears in the window on the device.
❒ tighten the 5 fixing bolts;
❒ use the wheel removal wrench to lower the vehicle
and remove the jack;
❒ fully tighten the bolts, passing alternately from one
bolt to the opposite one, following the order
illustrated in fig. 166.
After tyre replacement:
❒ take the removed wheel, re-attach to the mount
E-fig. 164 and tighten the knob D;
fig. 165
F0N0167m
MAINTENANCE
AND CARE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
INDEX
174
fig. 164
F0N0370m
fig. 166
F0N0168m
WARNING
At the end of the operation of
raising/locking the spare wheel, the key
must be extracted, taking care not to turn it in
the wrong direction to facilitate the extraction
of the key itself, to prevent the attachment
device from being released and the wheel
assembly not being securely retained fig. 167.
❒ refit the wheel to the mounting, turn to the
end of the slot (as shown in fig. 169) and tighten the
knob D;
KNOWING
YOUR CAR
SAFETY
STARTING
AND
DRIVING
For vehicles with alloy rims, proceed as follows:
❒ take the kit from the tool box;
WARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGES
❒ fit plate A-fig. 168 to the alloy wheel, securing with
screws B provided, using the supplied wrench;
IN AN
EMERGENCY
fig. 168
F0N0251m
MAINTENANCE
AND CARE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
INDEX
fig. 167
F0N0837m
fig. 169
F0N0371m
175
KNOWING
YOUR CAR
SAFETY
STARTING
AND
DRIVING
WARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGES
IN AN
EMERGENCY
MAINTENANCE
AND CARE
❒ introduce the supplied wrench C-fig. 162 with the
suitable extension B-fig. 161 on the screw A-fig. 161
of the spare wheel housing manoeuvring device and
turn clockwise 2 to lift the spare wheel back up until
it is fully supported in its housing beneath the floor
pan, checking that the attachment reference
D-fig. 162 appears in the window on the device.
❒ Check the correct position of the replaced wheel
under the floor (the lifting system is supplied with
a clutch to limit the end of the stroke). Incorrect
positioning may jeopardise safety.
❒ place the removal spanner back in the tool box;
❒ place the tool box in its housing under the passenger
seat.
WARNING
Each time the spare wheel is moved,
check that it is correctly positioned in its
housing under the floor. If it is not correctly
positioned, this could adversely affect safety.
Automatic FIX&GO QUICK TYRE
REPAIR KIT
(for versions/markets where provided)
The automatic tyre Fix & Go repair kit is positioned at
the front of the vehicle passenger compartment and
includes:
❒ cylinder A containing sealer and fitted with:
– a transparent filler pipe B;
– a black pressure restoring pipe E;
– an adhesive label C with the message “max.
80 km/h” to be applied in a position clearly visible
by the driver (on the dashboard) after repairing
the tyre;
❒ instruction brochure (see fig. 171), to be used for
prompt and proper use of the quick repair kit and
then to be handed to the personnel charged with
handling the treated tyre;
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
E
INDEX
176
fig. 170
F0N0825m
❒ compressor D-fig. 171 including pressure gauge and
connections;
❒ adapters for inflating various elements;
❒ protective gloves.
WARNING
The kit cannot be used to repair damage
to the tyre sidewall. Do not use the quick
repair kit if the tyre is damaged as the vehicle has
run on a flat tyre.
KNOWING
YOUR CAR
SAFETY
WARNING
Hand the leaflet over to the staff who
have to manage the tyre treated using
the tyre repair kit.
In the case of a puncture, caused by
a foreign body, tyres that have suffered
damage up to a maximum diameter of
4 mm on the tread or the shoulder can be
repaired.
WARNING
If the wheel rim is damaged (bad groove
distortion causing air leakage) it cannot
be repaired. Do not remove the foreign body
(screw or nail) from the tyre.
IMPORTANT INFORMATION:
The sealing fluid of the quick tyre repair kit is
effective at external temperatures of between −20 °C
and +50 °C.
The sealing fluid will expire.
WARNING
Do not operate the compressor for
longer than 20 consecutive minutes. Risk
of overheating. The quick repair kit is not
suitable for definitive repairs. Tyres may only be
repaired temporarily.
fig. 177
F0N0178m
STARTING
AND
DRIVING
WARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGES
IN AN
EMERGENCY
MAINTENANCE
AND CARE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
INDEX
177
KNOWING
YOUR CAR
SAFETY
STARTING
AND
DRIVING
WARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGES
WARNING
The cylinder contains ethylene glycol.
Contains latex: may cause an allergic
reaction. Harmful if swallowed. Eye irritant.
May cause sensitisation on inhalation or
contact. Avoid contact with eyes, skin and
clothes. In the event of contact, wash
immediately with plenty of water. Do not
induce vomiting if swallowed. Rinse your mouth
and drink plenty of water. Call a doctor
immediately. Keep away from children.
The product must not be used by asthmatics.
Do not breathe in the vapours during insertion
and suction. Call a doctor immediately if
allergic reactions are noted. Store the bottle in
the specific compartment, away from sources of
heat. The sealant fluid has a limited life.
IN AN
EMERGENCY
MAINTENANCE
AND CARE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
INFLATION PROCEDURE
WARNING
Put on the protective gloves provided
together with quick tyre repair kit.
❒ Apply the handbrake. Unscrew the tyre valve cap,
take out the transparent filler pipe A-fig. 172 and
tighten the ring nut B on the tyre valve;
❒ Insert the pin E-fig. 174 in the nearest 12 V power
socket and start the engine. Turn the selector
D-Fig. 173 anticlockwise to the repair position.
Activate the kit by pressing the on/off switch. Inflate
the tyre to the pressure prescribed in the “Inflation
pressure” paragraph, in the “Technical
Specifications” section.
Replace the bottle containing out of date
sealant fluid. Dispose of the bottle and
the sealant liquid properly. Dispose
according to the national and local regulations in
force.
INDEX
178
fig. 172
F0N0826m
For a more accurate reading, it is advisable to check
the pressure reading on the pressure gauge F-fig. 173
with the compressor off and without moving the
centre selector from the repair position;
❒ if a pressure of at least 3 bar is not reached within
10 minutes, detach the transparent filler pipe from
the valve and switch off the 12 V current pin, then
move the vehicle about 10 metres forward to
distribute the sealant liquid inside the tyre and repeat
the inflation operation;
❒ if after this operation it is still not possible to reach
at least 3 bar after 10 minutes, do not start driving
since the tyre is excessively damaged and the fast
tyre repair kit cannot guarantee adequate hold.
Contact a Fiat Dealership;
❒ if the tyre reaches the pressure specified in the
“Inflation pressure” paragraph in the „Technical
Specifications“ chapter, start driving immediately;
WARNING
Apply the adhesive label in a position
clearly visible by the driver as a reminder
that the tyre has been treated with the quick
repair kit. Drive carefully, particularly on bends.
Do not exceed 80 km/h. Do not accelerate and
brake suddenly.
❒ After driving for about 10 minutes stop and check
the tyre pressure again; pull up the handbrake.
WARNING
If the pressure falls below 3 bars, do not
drive any further: the quick tyre repair kit
Fix & Go automatic cannot guarantee adequate
hold because the tyre is too damaged. Contact
a Fiat Dealership.
KNOWING
YOUR CAR
SAFETY
STARTING
AND
DRIVING
WARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGES
IN AN
EMERGENCY
MAINTENANCE
AND CARE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
INDEX
fig. 173
F0N0827m
fig. 174
F0N0182m
179
KNOWING
YOUR CAR
SAFETY
STARTING
AND
DRIVING
WARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGES
IN AN
EMERGENCY
❒ If at least 3 bar pressure is read, restore the correct
pressure specified in the paragraph „Inflation
pressure“ in the „Technical Specifications“ section
(with engine running and handbrake on) and restart.
❒ drive with the utmost care to the nearest Fiat
Dealership.
WARNING
You must inform the dealership that the
tyre has been repaired using the quick
tyre repair kit. Hand the leaflet over to the staff
who will be dealing with the the tyre treated
using the tyre repair kit.
WARNING
MAINTENANCE
AND CARE
If different tyres from the ones supplied
with the vehicle are used, the repair
cannot be carried out. If the tyres are replaced,
it is advisable to use those approved by the
manufacturer. Contact a Fiat Dealership .
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
FOR CHECKING AND RESTORING
PRESSURE ONLY
❒ Undo the cap for the tyre valve, extract the pipe
C-fig. 175 with the quick connector and connect it
directly to the valve of the tyre to be inflated.
❒ Insert the pin in the nearest 12 V power socket and
start the engine.
❒ Rotate the selector clockwise to the pressure
renewal position.
❒ Activate the kit by pressing the on/off switch. Inflate
the tyre to the pressure specified in the „Inflation
pressure“ paragraph, in the „Technical Data“
chapter.
NOTE If the tyre has to be deflated, press the dedicated
button B illustrated in fig. 176. For a more accurate
reading, it is advisable to check the pressure reading on
the pressure gauge with the compressor off and without
moving the centre selector from the pressure restoring
position.
The compressor can be also used solely for restoring
pressure.
INDEX
180
❒ Engage the handbrake
fig. 175
F0N0828m
CYLINDER REPLACEMENT PROCEDURE
CHANGING A BULB
To replace the bottle, proceed as follows:
❒ press button A-fig. 177 to release the replacement
part;
❒ fit the new cylinder and press until it is automatically
engaged.
GENERAL INSTRUCTIONS
❒ When a light is not working, check that the
corresponding fuse is intact before changing a bulb.
For the location of fuses, refer to the paragraph
“If a fuse blows” in this section;
❒ before changing a bulb check the contacts for
oxidation;
B
❒ burnt bulbs must be replaced by others of the same
type and power;
❒ always check the height of the headlight beam after
changing a bulb for safety reasons.
fig. 176
F0N0830m
Halogen bulbs must be handled holding
the metallic part only. Touching the
transparent part of the bulb with your
fingers may reduce the intensity of the light
emitted and even compromise the life of the bulb
itself. In the event of accidental contact, rub the
bulb with a cloth dampened with alcohol and let
it dry.
KNOWING
YOUR CAR
SAFETY
STARTING
AND
DRIVING
WARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGES
IN AN
EMERGENCY
MAINTENANCE
AND CARE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
INDEX
fig. 177
F0N0829m
181
KNOWING
YOUR CAR
SAFETY
STARTING
AND
DRIVING
WARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGES
IN AN
EMERGENCY
MAINTENANCE
AND CARE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
WARNING
Changes or repairs to the electrical
system (electric control units) carried
out incorrectly and without due consideration
for the technical specifications of the system
can lead to malfunctioning and generate a fire
hazard.
C
Tubular bulbs: release them from their contacts to
remove.
D-E Halogen bulbs: to remove the bulb, release the clip
holding the bulb in place.
WARNING
Halogen lamps contain gas under
pressure. Their breaking can cause
scattering of glass fragments.
IMPORTANT The headlight inner surface might be
slightly misted: this should not be considered irregular
rather a natural phenomenon due to low temperature
and the air humidity level. Misting will disappear as soon
as the headlights are turned on. The presence of drops
inside the headlights indicates infiltration of water.
Contact a Fiat Dealership.
BULB TYPES fig. 178
Various types of bulbs are fitted to your vehicle.
A Glass bulbs: clipped into position. Pull to extract.
INDEX
182
B Bayonet type bulbs: to remove this type of bulb from
its holder, press the bulb and turn it anticlockwise.
fig. 178
F0N0078m
Bulbs
Re. fig. 178
Type
Power
Main beam headlamps
D
H1
55W
Main beam headlamps/daytime lights (❑)
D
H15
15/55W
Dipped headlamps
D
H7
55W
Front sidelights
A
W5W
5W
Front fog lights (❑)
–
H1
55W
Front direction indicators
B
PY21W
21W
Side turn signal indicators
A
W16WF(*)/WY5W(▼)
16W(*)/5W(▼)
Rear direction indicators
B
PY21W
21W
Side marker lights
A
W5W
5W
Side/taillights
B
P21/5W
5W
Brake lights
B
P21/5W
5W
Third brake light (additional brake light)
B
P21W
21W
Reverse lights
–
P21W
21W
Rear fog lights
–
P21W
21W
Rear fog lights (Maxi van)
–
P21W
21W
Number plate lights
A
C5W
5W
Front ceiling light with movable lens
C
12V10W
10W
Rear ceiling light
C
12V10W
10W
(*) XL and recreational versions
(▼) all other versions
(❑) (for versions/markets where provided)
KNOWING
YOUR CAR
SAFETY
STARTING
AND
DRIVING
WARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGES
IN AN
EMERGENCY
MAINTENANCE
AND CARE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
INDEX
183
KNOWING
YOUR CAR
SAFETY
STARTING
AND
DRIVING
WARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGES
REPLACING EXTERIOR BULBS
To replace the main beam bulb/daytime lights, remove
plug C-fig. 180.
For the type of bulb and power rating, see “Changing
a bulb”.
To replace the dipped beam/side light bulb, remove plug
B-fig. 180.
FRONT LIGHT CLUSTERS
To replace the direction indicator bulb, remove bulb
holder A-fig. 180.
The front light clusters contain sidelights, dipped beam,
main beam and direction indicator bulbs.
The bulbs are arranged inside the light cluster as
follows, fig. 179:
After replacement, refit the covers correctly, ensuring
that they are locked in place.
A direction indicators
B side lights/dipped beams (double light)
C main beam headlights/daytime lights
IN AN
EMERGENCY
MAINTENANCE
AND CARE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
INDEX
184
fig. 179
F0N0079m
fig. 180
F0N0080m
SIDE LIGHTS
❒ release the bulb holding clip B;
To change the bulb, proceed as follows:
❒ remove the bulb C and replace it;
❒ remove protective cover B-fig. 180 by turning
anticlockwise;
❒ fit the new bulb, ensuring that the outline of the
metal part coincides with the grooves on the curve
of the headlight. Then reconnect the bulb holder clip
A and reattach electrical connector B;
❒ remove snap-fitted bulb holder A-fig. 181, remove
the bulb B and replace it;
❒ refit the snap-fitted bulb holder A-fig. 181;
❒ refit protective cover B-fig. 180 by turning it
clockwise, making sure to lock it correctly.
❒ refit protective cover C-fig. 180 by turning it
clockwise, making sure to lock it correctly.
MAIN BEAMS/DAYTIME LIGHTS
(for versions/markets where provided)
MAIN BEAM HEADLIGHTS
To change the bulb, proceed as follows:
To change the bulb, proceed as follows:
❒ remove the protection cover C-fig. 180 by turning
counter-clockwise;
❒ remove protective cover C-fig. 180 by turning it
anticlockwise;
❒ disconnect the electrical connector A-fig. 182;
❒ disconnect the electrical connector A-fig. 183;
KNOWING
YOUR CAR
SAFETY
STARTING
AND
DRIVING
WARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGES
IN AN
EMERGENCY
MAINTENANCE
AND CARE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
INDEX
fig. 181
F0N0082m
fig. 182
F0N0083m
185
KNOWING
YOUR CAR
SAFETY
STARTING
AND
DRIVING
❒ rotate the bulb holder B-fig. 183 counter-clockwise
and take out the unit;
DIPPED BEAM HEADLIGHTS
❒ remove the bulb C and replace it;
With incandescent bulbs
To change the bulb, proceed as follows:
❒ remove protective cover B-fig. 180 by turning it
anticlockwise;
❒ disconnect the electrical connector A-fig. 184;
❒ release the bulb holding clip B;
❒ remove the bulb C and replace it;
❒ fit the new bulb, ensuring that the outline of the
metal part coincides with the grooves on the curve
of the headlight. Then reconnect the bulb holder clip
B and reattach electrical connector A;
❒ refit the protective cover by turning it clockwise
making sure to lock it correctly;
❒ refit the bulb holder B and rotate it clockwise to
lock;
❒ reconnect the electrical connector A;
❒ refit the protective cover by turning it clockwise
making sure to lock it correctly.
WARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGES
IN AN
EMERGENCY
MAINTENANCE
AND CARE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
INDEX
186
fig. 183
F0N0517m
fig. 184
F0N0084m
DIRECTION INDICATORS
To change the bulb, proceed as follows:
❒ turn the bulb holder A-fig. 185 anticlockwise and pull
it out;
❒ remove the bulb by pushing it slightly and turning it
anticlockwise (bayonet mount);
❒ using a Philips screwdriver, undo the screws and
extract the bulb holder assembly releasing it from
the teeth.
KNOWING
YOUR CAR
❒ undo the bulb and replace bulb B by turning it
anticlockwise.
SAFETY
❒ replace the bulb;
❒ refit the bulb holder by turning it clockwise making
sure to lock it correctly.
STARTING
AND
DRIVING
Side lights fig. 186-187
To change the bulb, proceed as follows:
❒ move the mirror manually to access the two fixing
screws A;
WARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGES
IN AN
EMERGENCY
MAINTENANCE
AND CARE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
INDEX
fig. 185
F0N0081m
fig. 186
F0N0169m
187
KNOWING
YOUR CAR
SAFETY
STARTING
AND
DRIVING
FRONT FOG LIGHTS
(for versions/markets, where provided)
❒ release the bulb holding clip;
To replace the front fog light bulbs A-fig. 188 proceed as
follows:
❒ fit the new bulb, ensuring that the outline of the
metal part coincides with the grooves on the curve
of the headlight. Then reconnect the bulb holder clip
and reattach the electrical connector;
❒ steer fully to the left;
❒ open the flap on the front wheel compartment
guard, unscrewing the self-tapping screw;
❒ remove the bulb and replace it;
❒ refit the bayonet cap.
❒ remove the bayonet cap;
❒ disconnect the connector;
WARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGES
IN AN
EMERGENCY
MAINTENANCE
AND CARE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
INDEX
188
fig. 187
F0N0170m
fig. 188
F0N0339m
REAR LIGHT CLUSTERS
Proceed as follows to replace a bulb fig. 190:
The bulbs are arranged inside the light cluster as
follows, fig. 189:
❒ open the rear swing door and then undo the two
fixing screws A;
A brake/side lights
❒ disconnect the central electric connector B and pull
the lens unit outwards;
B direction indicators
❒ undo the screws C-fig. 191 using the screwdriver
provided and remove the bulb holder;
C reversing lights
D rear fog lights (for Maxi Van versions, the rear fog
lights are integral with the bumpers, see paragraph
“Maxi Van rear fog lights”).
KNOWING
YOUR CAR
SAFETY
STARTING
AND
DRIVING
WARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGES
IN AN
EMERGENCY
MAINTENANCE
AND CARE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
INDEX
fig. 189
F0N0086m
fig. 190
F0N0087m
189
KNOWING
YOUR CAR
SAFETY
❒ remove the bulb D, E, F, G pushing it gently and
turning it anticlockwise (“bayonet” locking), then
replace it;
For truck and chassis cab versions:
❒ refit the bulb holder and tighten the screws C;
I
❒ reconnect the electric connector B, suitably refit the
unit to the car body and then tighten the fastening
screws A.
L bulb for side light
undo the four screws H-fig. 192 and replace the bulbs:
bulb for rear fog light (left side); bulb for reversing
light (right side).
M bulb for brake light
N bulb for direction indicator.
STARTING
AND
DRIVING
WARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGES
IN AN
EMERGENCY
MAINTENANCE
AND CARE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
INDEX
190
fig. 191
F0N0088m
fig. 192
F0N0239m
REAR FOG LIGHTS (Maxi Van)
❒ remove the bulb holder;
To change the bulb proceed as follows:
❒ turn bulb holder E anticlockwise (1/8 of a turn),
remove the bayonet bulb by pushing gently and
turning anticlockwise, then replace fig. 195.
❒ take up position at the rear of the side bumper;
❒ unscrew the lower fastening A between the central
and side bumpers fig. 193;
KNOWING
YOUR CAR
SAFETY
❒ after removing the tail-light, unscrew upper
fastening B;
❒ unscrew both fastenings C-fig. 194 on the side of the
accessible rear swing door and open the door
slightly;
STARTING
AND
DRIVING
❒ unscrew the three side fastenings D on the panel
side, accessible after removing the side mounting
fig. 194. To remove the moulding, undo the three
lower self-tapping screws and undo the pins with
care to avoid breaking them. If you break one or
more pins, they will have to be replaced;
WARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGES
IN AN
EMERGENCY
fig. 194
F0N0242m
MAINTENANCE
AND CARE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
INDEX
fig. 193
F0N0241m
fig. 195
F0N0243m
191
KNOWING
YOUR CAR
❒ press the tabs in the opposite direction B-fig. 197
and remove the bulb holder;
THIRD BRAKE LIGHT fig. 196-197
To change the bulb proceed as follows:
❒ remove the snap-fitted bulb and replace it.
❒ unscrew both fixing screws A-fig. 196;
❒ remove the lens unit;
NUMBER PLATE LIGHTS fig. 198
SAFETY
To change the bulb proceed as follows:
❒ apply pressure to the point shown by the arrow and
remove lens unit A;
STARTING
AND
DRIVING
❒ change the bulb releasing it from the side contacts
and making sure the new bulb is correctly fastened
between the contacts;
WARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGES
❒ refit the snap-fitted lens unit.
IN AN
EMERGENCY
fig. 196
F0N0141m
MAINTENANCE
AND CARE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
INDEX
192
fig. 197
F0N0142m
fig. 198
AF0N0089m
SIDE LIGHTS
(for versions/markets where available)
CHANGING AN INTERIOR LIGHT
To change the bulb proceed as follows:
For the type of bulb and relevant power rating, see
“Changing a bulb”.
❒ for extra-long van:
– undo both fixing screws C-fig. 199 and remove
the light;
FRONT CEILING LIGHT
– remove the bulb-holder D on the rear of the light,
turning through 1/4 turn;
❒ work in the points shown by the arrows and remove
light A-fig. 200;
KNOWING
YOUR CAR
SAFETY
Proceed as follows to replace the bulbs:
– remove the snap-fitted bulb and replace.
❒ for chassis cabs with platform:
– remove bulb-holder on the rear of the light,
turning through 1/4 turn;
– remove the snap-fitted bulb and replace.
STARTING
AND
DRIVING
WARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGES
IN AN
EMERGENCY
MAINTENANCE
AND CARE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
INDEX
fig. 199
F0N0244m
fig. 200
F0N0090m
193
KNOWING
YOUR CAR
SAFETY
STARTING
AND
DRIVING
WARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGES
IN AN
EMERGENCY
❒ open the protective flap B-fig. 201;
❒ replace bulbs C-fig. 201 releasing them from the side
contacts; make sure that new bulbs are correctly
clamped between the contacts;
❒ re-close the protection lid E-fig. 203 and secure roof
light D-fig. 202 into its housing, locking it correctly.
❒ close the flap B-fig. 201 and secure the ceiling light
A-fig. 200 in its housing locking it properly.
REAR COURTESY LIGHT
Proceed as follows to replace the bulbs:
❒ work in the points shown by the arrows and remove
the ceiling light D-fig. 202;
❒ open the protective flap E-fig. 203;
❒ replace bulb F-fig. 203 by releasing it from the side
contacts and making sure that the new bulb is
correctly clamped between these contacts;
fig. 202
F0N0092m
MAINTENANCE
AND CARE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
INDEX
194
fig. 201
F0N0091m
fig. 203
F0N0093m
REPLACING FUSES
Never replace a blown fuse with metal
wires or other recovered material.
GENERAL INFORMATION
Fuses protect the electric system: they cut in (i.e. they
blow) in the event of a failure or improper action on the
system.
Check the state of the corresponding fuse when
a device does not work: the filament A-fig. 204 must be
intact. If it is not, replace the blown fuse with another
with the same amperage (same colour).
WARNING
Never replace a fuse with another of
higher amp rating; FIRE HAZARD.
KNOWING
YOUR CAR
SAFETY
STARTING
AND
DRIVING
WARNING
B intact fuse;
If a general protection fuse (MEGAFUSE, MIDI-FUSE, MAXI-FUSE) is
blown, contact a Fiat Dealership. Before
replacing a fuse, make sure that the ignition key
has been removed and that all the other
services are switched off and/or disengaged.
C fuse with damaged filament.
WARNING
If the replaced fuse blows again, contact
a Fiat Dealership.
WARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGES
IN AN
EMERGENCY
MAINTENANCE
AND CARE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
INDEX
fig. 204
F0N0094m
195
KNOWING
YOUR CAR
SAFETY
STARTING
AND
DRIVING
WARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGES
IN AN
EMERGENCY
Engine compartment fuse box
WARNING
If a general protection fuse for safety
systems (air bag system, braking system),
power unit systems (engine system, gearbox
system) or steering system blows, contact a Fiat
Dealership.
To gain access to the fuse box, fig. 208, remove the
protective cover fig. 207.
Right central pillar optional fuse box
(for versions/markets, where provided)
To gain access to the fuse box, fig. 210, remove the
protective cover fig. 209.
ACCESSING THE FUSES
The vehicle fuses are grouped in three control units
located on the dashboard, passenger compartment right
pillar and engine compartment.
Fuse box on the dashboard
To access the dashboard fusebox fig. 206, loosen the
screws A-fig. 205 and remove the cover.
MAINTENANCE
AND CARE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
INDEX
196
fig. 205
F0N0095m
fig. 206
F0N0513m
KNOWING
YOUR CAR
SAFETY
fig. 207
F0N0098m
fig. 209
F0N0172m
STARTING
AND
DRIVING
WARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGES
IN AN
EMERGENCY
MAINTENANCE
AND CARE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
INDEX
fig. 208
F0N0097m
fig. 210
F0N0171m
197
KNOWING
YOUR CAR
FUSE SUMMARY TABLE
Dashboard fuse box fig. 205-206
USERS
SAFETY
STARTING
AND
DRIVING
WARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGES
IN AN
EMERGENCY
FUSE
AMPERE
Right dipped headlamp
F12
7.5
Left dipped headlamp
F13
7.5
Engine compartment control unit relay, instrument panel control unit relay (+key)
F31
5
Lighting of roof lights in the passenger compartment (+battery)
F32
7.5
Battery monitoring sensor for Start&Stop versions (+battery)
F33
20
Minibus interior lights (emergency)
F34
20
Radio, A/C control, alarm, tachograph,
Battery disconnecting unit, Webasto timer (+battery)
F36
10
Brake light control (main), third brake light, instrument panel (+key)
F37
7.5
Door lock (+battery)
F38
20
ABS, ASR, ESP, brake light control (secondary) (+key)
F42
5
Windscreen washer (+key)
F43
20
Driver's side electric window
F47
20
MAINTENANCE
AND CARE
Passenger side electric window
F48
20
F49
5
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
Parking sensor control unit, radio, controls on the steering wheel,
centre dashboard, left dashboard, auxiliary dashboard,
battery disconnecting unit (+key)
Airbag (+key)
F50
7.5
Climate control system, power steering control unit, reversing lights,
water in diesel filter sensor, flow meter, tachograph (+key)
F51
5
INDEX
198
FUSE
AMPERE
Instrument panel (+battery)
F53
7.5
Absent
F89
–
Left main beam headlamp
F90
7.5
Right main beam headlamp
F91
7.5
Left fog lights
F92
7.5
Right fog lights
F93
7.5
KNOWING
YOUR CAR
SAFETY
7.5
USERS
STARTING
AND
DRIVING
WARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGES
IN AN
EMERGENCY
MAINTENANCE
AND CARE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
INDEX
199
KNOWING
YOUR CAR
SAFETY
STARTING
AND
DRIVING
WARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGES
IN AN
EMERGENCY
MAINTENANCE
AND CARE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
INDEX
200
Engine compartment fusebox fig. 207-208
USERS
ABS pump (+battery)
Preheating glow plugs (+battery)
Ignition switch (+battery)
Headlamp washer (+battery)
Vaporiser for Puma engine/compartment ventilation with Webasto,
robotised gearbox pump (+battery)
Engine cooling high speed fan (+battery)
Engine cooling low speed fan (+battery)
Passenger compartment fan (+key)
Rear power socket (+battery)
Horn
Electric system (secondary services)
Power socket (+battery)
Cigar lighter (+battery)
Electric system (+key)
Electric system (primary services)
Engine management control unit, robotised gearbox control unit (+battery)
Air conditioning compressor
Windscreen wipers
Fuel pump
Electric system (primary services)
ABS solenoid valves
Auxiliary control panel for mirror movement and folding (+key)
Mirrors demisting
FUSE
AMPERE
F01
F02
F03
F04
F05
40
50
30
30
20/50
F06
F07
F08
F09
F10
F11
F14
F15
F16
F17
F18
F19
F20
F21
F22
F23
F24
F30
40/60
40/50
40
15
15
15
15
10
7.5
10
7.5
7.5
30
15
20
30
15
15
Right central pillar optional control unit fig. 209-210
USERS
Absent
Heated seats
Rear passenger power socket
Additional heater under the seat
Left heated rear window
Right heated rear window
Absent
Absent
Absent
Additional passenger heater control
Absent
Additional passenger heater fan
FUSE
AMPERE
F54
F55
F56
F57
F58
F59
F60
F61
F62
F63
F64
F65
–
15
15
10
15
15
–
–
–
10
–
30
KNOWING
YOUR CAR
SAFETY
STARTING
AND
DRIVING
WARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGES
IN AN
EMERGENCY
MAINTENANCE
AND CARE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
INDEX
201
KNOWING
YOUR CAR
SAFETY
STARTING
AND
DRIVING
WARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGES
IN AN
EMERGENCY
MAINTENANCE
AND CARE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
INDEX
202
BATTERY RECHARGING
IMPORTANT Battery recharging procedure is given as
information only. This operation should be performed at
a Fiat Dealership.
Charging should be slow at a low ampere rating for
approximately 24 hours. Rapid battery charging with
high currents could damage the battery. Charge the
battery as follows:
WARNING
Battery fluid is poisonous and corrosive:
avoid contact with your skin and eyes.
The battery recharging operation must be
performed in a ventilated place, away from
naked flames or possible sources of sparks to
avoid the risk of explosion and fire.
❒ disconnect the negative battery terminal;
❒ connect the charger cables to the battery terminals,
observing the poles;
❒ turn on the charger;
❒ after recharging, turn the battery charger off before
disconnecting the battery itself;
❒ reconnect negative battery terminal.
WARNING
Don’t try to recharge a frozen battery: If
the battery was frozen, have it inspected
by skilled personnel before recharging to check
that the internal elements are not damaged and
that the casing is not cracked, which causes the
risk of leakage of poisonous, corrosive acid.
RAISING THE VEHICLE
WARNING
If the vehicle needs to be lifted, go to a Fiat Dealership
which is equipped with arm hoists or workshop lifts.
The vehicle must only be raised laterally by placing the
ends of the arms or workshop lift in the areas shown in
fig. 211.
TOWING THE VEHICLE
The vehicle is equipped with two rings for attaching the
tow hook.
Before towing, switch off the steering lock
(see „Starting device“ paragraph under the
„Dashboard and controls“ chapter). The brake
servo and power steering will not work while the
vehicle is being towed. More effort on the brake
pedal and steering wheel will therefore be
required. Do not use flexible cables when towing
and avoid jerky movements. During towing
operations, make sure that the fastened joint does
not damage adjoining components. When towing
the vehicle comply with the specific rules of the
Highway Code regarding both the towing device
and the behaviour to maintain on the road.
WARNING
Do not start the engine whilst the
vehicle is being towed.
KNOWING
YOUR CAR
SAFETY
STARTING
AND
DRIVING
WARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGES
IN AN
EMERGENCY
MAINTENANCE
AND CARE
The front ring is located in the tool box beneath the
passenger side seat. On versions with Fix&Go kit and
without spare wheel, the tool box is available only on
request for versions/markets where provided. In the
absence of the tool box the vehicle tow hook is housed
in the on-board documentation container, together with
the Owner Handbook.
fig. 211
F0N0340m
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
INDEX
203
KNOWING
YOUR CAR
SAFETY
For activation / deactivation, proceed as follows:
❒ Open the flap A and remove it as illustrated
in fig. 212;
❒ turn the locking knob B anticlockwise and remove it
fig. 212 to allow the removal of the compartment
fig. 213;
❒ take the screwdriver provided from the box and
prise up at the point shown to raise the cap
C-fig. 214;
❒ take the tow ring D from the box and screw onto
the threaded pin fig. 214.
The rear ring B-fig. 215 is located at the point shown in
the diagram.
STARTING
AND
DRIVING
WARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGES
IN AN
EMERGENCY
fig. 212
F0N0134m
fig. 214
F0N0136m
MAINTENANCE
AND CARE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
INDEX
204
fig. 213
F0N0135m
fig. 215
F0N0117m
MAINTENANCE AND CARE
SCHEDULED SERVICING
Correct servicing is essential for ensuring long vehicle
life under the best conditions.
This is why Fiat has planned a series of checks and
maintenance operations every 48,000 km.
The scheduled maintenance programme does not,
however, cover all the vehicle requirements; during the
initial period, before the 48,000 kilometre service and
later on, between services, routine operations must be
carried out like systematically checking and topping up
fluid levels, checking the tyre inflation pressure, etc.
IMPORTANT Scheduled Servicing coupons are specified
by the Manufacturer. Failure to have them carried out
may invalidate the warranty.
Schedule servicing can be carried out by any Fiat
Dealership, at pre-established times.
If there is a need for further replacements or repairs
during any operation in addition to those planned, prior
consent of the Customer must be obtained first.
KNOWING
YOUR CAR
SAFETY
STARTING
AND
DRIVING
IMPORTANT It is advisable to contact a Fiat Dealership
in the event of any minor operating failure, without
waiting for the next service coupon.
WARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGES
If your vehicle is used frequently for trailer towing, the
interval between scheduled maintenance services must
be reduced.
IN AN
EMERGENCY
MAINTENANCE
AND CARE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
INDEX
205
KNOWING
YOUR CAR
SAFETY
STARTING
AND
DRIVING
WARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGES
IN AN
EMERGENCY
MAINTENANCE
AND CARE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
INDEX
SCHEDULED MAINTENANCE PLAN
Thousands of miles
Thousands of kilometres
Months
Check battery charge status and possibly recharge
Check tyre condition/wear and adjust pressure, if necessary
Check operation of lighting system (headlamps, direction indicators,
hazard warning lights, luggage compartment, passenger compartment,
glove compartment, instrument panel warning lights, etc.)
Check operation of windscreen wiper/washer system and adjust jets, if necessary
Check the position/wear of the windscreen/rear window wiper blades
Check cleanliness of bonnet and tailgate locks and cleanliness
and lubrication of linkages
Visually inspect condition of: exterior bodywork, underbody protection,
pipes and hoses (exhaust, fuel system, brakes), rubber elements
(boots, sleeves, bushes, etc.)
Check condition and wear of front disc brake pads and operation
of pad wear indicator
Check condition and wear of rear disc brake pads and operation
of pad wear indicator (for versions/markets where provided)
Check and, if necessary, top-up fluid levels (engine cooling, hydraulic
clutch/brakes, windscreen washer, battery, etc.)
Visual check of accessory drive belt(s) (versions without automatic tensioner)
(130-150-180 Multijet versions)
Check tension of accessory drive belt (versions without automatic tensioner) (▲)
Check tension of accessory drive belt (versions without automatic tensioner)
(115 MultiJet versions) (▲)
27
48
24
54
96
48
81
144
72
108
192
96
135
240
120
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
(▲) When the engine oil is changed for the first time, check the tension of the accessories drive belt .
206
●
Thousands of miles
Thousands of kilometres
Months
Check condition of toothed timing drive belt (130-150 MultiJet versions)
Check condition of toothed timing drive belt (115 MultiJet versions)
Check handbrake lever travel and adjust, if required
Check exhaust gas emissions/smokiness
Check operation of engine management systems (using diagnosis socket)
Check cleanliness of sliding side door lower guides for versions with S.S.D.
(or every 6 months)
Replace fuel filter cartridge (diesel versions)
Replace accessory drive belt(s)
Replace accessory drive belt(s) (115 MultiJet versions)
Replace toothed timing drive belt (*) (130-150 MultiJet versions)
Replace toothed timing drive belt (*) (115 MultiJet versions)
Replace air filter cartridge (***)
Replace engine oil and oil filter (versions with DPF) (**) ( )
Change brake fluid (or every 24 months)
Replace pollen filter (or every 24 months)
27
48
24
54
96
48
81
144
72
108
192
96
135
240
120
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
SAFETY
STARTING
AND
DRIVING
WARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGES
●
●
IN AN
EMERGENCY
●
MAINTENANCE
AND CARE
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
(*) Regardless of mileage, the timing belt must be replaced every four years in case of particularly demanding use (cold
climate, city traffic, long idling) or at least every five years.
(**) The actual interval for changing the oil and replacing the engine oil filter depends on the vehicle usage conditions and
is signalled by the warning light or message (if present) in the instrument panel (see chapter “Warning lights and
messages”) or every 24 months
( ) If the vehicle is driven mainly in towns, change engine oil and filter every 12 months.
(***) If the vehicle is equipped with a special air cleaner for dusty areas:
- every 20,000 km, check and clean the filter,
- every 40,000 km replace the filter.
KNOWING
YOUR CAR
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
INDEX
207
KNOWING
YOUR CAR
PERIODIC CHECKS
DEMANDING VEHICLE USE
Before long journeys, check and, if necessary, restore:
If the vehicle is mostly used in one of the following
conditions:
❒ trailer or caravan towing;
❒ dusty roads;
❒ short distances (less than 7-8 km) and with external
temperatures below zero;
❒ frequently idling engine or long distance low speed
driving or in the case of long term inactivity;
the following checks must be carried out more often
than indicated in the Scheduled Servicing Plan:
❒ check front disc brake pad conditions and wear;
❒ check cleanliness of bonnet and boot locks and lever
cleanliness and lubrication;
❒ visually inspect the conditions of: engine, gearbox,
transmission, pipes and tubes (exhaust – fuel
– brakes), rubber parts (boots, sleeves, bushes, etc.);
❒ check battery charge and liquid level (electrolyte);
❒ visual check on various drive belt conditions;
❒ check and if necessary change engine oil and oil filter.
❒ engine coolant fluid level;
SAFETY
STARTING
AND
DRIVING
WARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGES
IN AN
EMERGENCY
MAINTENANCE
AND CARE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
INDEX
208
❒ brake fluid level;
❒ windscreen washer fluid level;
❒ tyre pressure and conditions;
❒ operation of lights (headlights, direction indicators,
hazard lights, etc.);
❒ operation of the windscreen wiper/washer system,
position and wear of the windscreen and rear
window wiper blades.
To ensure that the vehicle is always efficient and well
maintained, it is advisable to make sure that you carry
out the above operations regularly (approximately
every 1000 km and every 3000 km for checking and
topping up engine oil is advisable).
CHECKING FLUID LEVELS
KNOWING
YOUR CAR
WARNING
Never smoke while
working in the engine
compartment: gas and
inflammable vapours may be
present, with the risk of fire.
Be careful, when
topping up not to
confuse the various
types of fluids: they are all
incompatible with one another
and could seriously damage the
vehicle.
SAFETY
STARTING
AND
DRIVING
fig. 216 - 115 Multijet versions
F0N0530m
WARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGES
IN AN
EMERGENCY
MAINTENANCE
AND CARE
1. Engine coolant fluid
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
2. Power steering fluid
3. Windscreen washer fluid
4. Brake fluid
INDEX
5. Engine oil
fig. 217 – 130 Multijet – 150 Multijet versions
F0N0100m
209
KNOWING
YOUR CAR
SAFETY
STARTING
AND
DRIVING
WARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGES
IN AN
EMERGENCY
WARNING
Never smoke while
working in the engine
compartment: gas and
inflammable vapours may be
present, with the risk of fire.
Be careful, when
topping up not to
confuse the various
types of fluids: they are all
incompatible with one another
and could seriously damage the
vehicle.
fig. 218 – 180 Multijet Power versions
1. Engine coolant fluid
2. Power steering fluid
MAINTENANCE
AND CARE
3. Windscreen washer fluid
4. Brake fluid
5. Engine oil
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
INDEX
210
F0N0210m
ENGINE OIL fig. 219-220-221
Check the oil level a few minutes (about 5) after the
engine has stopped, with the vehicle parked on level
ground.
Check that the level is within the MIN and MAX marks
on the dipstick B.
The range between the MIN. and MAX. marks
corresponds to about 1 litre of oil.
If the oil level is near or under the MIN line, add oil
through the filler A until it reaches the MAX line.
The oil level should never exceed the MAX line.
KNOWING
YOUR CAR
SAFETY
STARTING
AND
DRIVING
WARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGES
IN AN
EMERGENCY
fig. 219 - 115 Multijet versions
F0N0531m
MAINTENANCE
AND CARE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
INDEX
fig. 220 – 130 – 150 Multijet versions
F0N0102m
fig. 221 – 180 Multijet Power versions
F0N0211m
211
KNOWING
YOUR CAR
SAFETY
STARTING
AND
DRIVING
WARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGES
IN AN
EMERGENCY
MAINTENANCE
AND CARE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
INDEX
212
ENGINE OIL CONSUMPTION
The maximum engine oil consumption is usually
400 grams every 1,000 km.
When the vehicle is new, the engine needs to be run in,
therefore the engine oil consumption can only be
considered stabilised after the first 5,000 – 6,000 km.
IMPORTANT The oil consumption depends on the
driving style and the conditions under which the vehicle
is used.
IMPORTANT After adding or changing the oil, let the
engine run for a few seconds and wait a few minutes
after switching it off before checking the level.
WARNING
When the engine is hot, take care when
working inside the engine compartment
to avoid burns. Remember that when the engine
is hot, the fan may cut in: danger of injury. Pay
attention to scarves, ties and other loose fitting
garments: they might get caught by moving
components.
Do not add any oil with different
specifications to those of the existing
engine oil.
The used engine oil and the replaced oil
filter contain substances that may be
dangerous for the environment. It is
advisable to have oil and filters changed by a Fiat
Dealership where they will be disposed respecting
the environment and according to legal
regulations.
ENGINE COOLANT fig. 222-223
The coolant level must be checked when the engine is
cold and must range between the MIN. and MAX.
marks on the reservoir.
If the level is low, slowly pour a mixture of 50%
demineralised water and 50% PARAFLUUP of
PETRONAS LUBRICANTS through the filler neck A
until the level reaches MAX.
A 50-50 mixture of PARAFLUUP and distilled water
gives freeze protection up to –35°C.
When the vehicle is used under particularly harsh
weather conditions, we recommend using
a 60-40 mixture of PARAFLUUP and demineralised
water.
PARAFLUUP anti-freeze is used in the
engine cooling system. Use the same fluid
as in the cooling system when topping up.
PARAFLUUP may not be mixed with any other
types of fluids. If this accidentally occurs, do not
start the engine and contact a Fiat Dealership.
WARNING
The engine cooling system is pressurised.
If necessary, only replace the cap with
another genuine one or the operation of the
system may be adversely affected. Do not
remove the cap from the reservoir when the
engine is hot: danger of scalding.
KNOWING
YOUR CAR
SAFETY
STARTING
AND
DRIVING
WARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGES
IN AN
EMERGENCY
MAINTENANCE
AND CARE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
INDEX
fig. 222 – 130 – 150 – 180 Multijet versions
F0N0103m
fig. 223 - 115 Multijet versions
F0N0532m
213
KNOWING
YOUR CAR
SAFETY
STARTING
AND
DRIVING
WARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGES
WINDSCREEN/REAR WINDOW WASHER/
HEADLIGHT WASHER FLUID fig. 224-225
To top up, remove the cap A.
Use a mixture of water and TUTELA PROFESSIONAL
SC 35, in the following concentrations:
WARNING
Do not travel with the windscreen
washer reservoir empty: the windscreen
washer is fundamental for improving visibility.
30% TUTELA PROFESSIONAL SC 35 and 70% water in
summer.
50% TUTELA PROFESSIONAL SC 35 and 50% water in
winter.
At temperatures below –20 °C, use undiluted TUTELA
PROFESSIONAL SC 35 fluid.
Check level through the reservoir.
WARNING
Certain commercial additives for
windscreen washers are inflammable.
The engine compartment contains hot parts
which could start a fire if they come into
contact.
IN AN
EMERGENCY
MAINTENANCE
AND CARE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
INDEX
214
fig. 224 – 130 – 150 – 180 Multijet versions
F0N0105m
fig. 225 – 115 Multijet versions
F0N0533m
BRAKE FLUID fig. 226
Undo the cap A and check that the liquid contained in
the reservoir is at the maximum level.
The fluid level in the reservoir must not exceed the
MAX mark.
Use the brake fluid shown in the “Fluids and lubricants”
table (see “Technical Specifications”).
NOTE Thoroughly clean the tank cap A and the
surrounding surface.
Take great care to ensure that impurities do not enter
the reservoir when the cap is opened.
For topping up, always use a funnel with integrated filter
that has a mesh inferior or equal to 0.12 mm.
IMPORTANT Brake fluid absorbs moisture. For this
reason, if the car is mainly used in areas with a high
degree of atmospheric humidity, the fluid should be
replaced at more frequent intervals than specified in the
“Scheduled Servicing Plan”.
KNOWING
YOUR CAR
SAFETY
Prevent brake fluid, which is highly
corrosive, from coming into contact with
painted parts. Should this occur,
immediately wash with water.
WARNING
Brake fluid is poisonous and highly
corrosive. In the event of accidental
contact, immediately wash the affected parts
with water and neutral soap. Then rinse
thoroughly. If swallowed call a doctor straight
away.
STARTING
AND
DRIVING
WARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGES
IN AN
EMERGENCY
MAINTENANCE
AND CARE
WARNING
The symbol π on the container indicates
a synthetic brake fluid, which is different
from a mineral fluid. Use of mineral type fluids
will damage the special rubber seals of the
braking system beyond repair.
fig. 226
F0N0107m
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
INDEX
215
KNOWING
YOUR CAR
SAFETY
STARTING
AND
DRIVING
WARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGES
POWER STEERING FLUID fig. 227-228
Check that the liquid contained in the tank is at the
maximum level. This operation must be carried out with
the vehicle level and with the engine off and cold. Check
that the fluid level is up to the MAX mark on the
dipstick attached to the fuel cap (use the level shown on
the 20°C side of the dipstick to check when cold).
If the level of the fluid in the tank is lower than the
specified level, top up using only one of the products
indicated in the “Fluid and lubricants” table in the
“Technical specifications” section, proceeding as follows:
❒ Start the engine and wait for the level of fluid in the
tank to stabilise.
❒ With the engine running, turn the steering wheel
from right to left fully, several times.
IN AN
EMERGENCY
❒ Top up the fuel to the MAX level and then retighten
the cap.
WARNING
Prevent power steering fluid from
coming into contact with hot engine
parts: the liquid is flammable.
Power steering fluid consumption is very
low. If the fluid needs topping up a short
time after the last top-up, have the
system checked by a Fiat Dealership to ensure
there are no leaks.
Do not press the power steering end of
travel lock for longer than 8 consecutive
seconds with the engine running because
it will cause noise and risk damaging the system.
MAINTENANCE
AND CARE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
INDEX
216
fig. 227 – 130 – 150 – 180 Multijet versions
F0N0109m
fig. 228 – 115 Multijet versions
F0N0534m
AIR FILTER/POLLEN FILTER
Have the air filter replaced by a Fiat Dealership.
AIR FILTER – DUSTY ROADS
(for versions/markets, where provided)
The air filter for dusty areas is equipped with a visual
filter block indication device A-fig. 229. Check the
reading of the filter block sensor at intervals (refer to
“Scheduled Servicing Plan” in the “Maintenance and
care” section).
When the setting is reached the indicator is triggered
B-fig. 230 and changes to red, even with the engine off.
To reset the indicator, clean/replace the cartridge as on
normal versions and then reset the indicator by pressing
the button C-fig. 230.
KNOWING
YOUR CAR
WARNING To clean the filter, use an air jet, do not use
water or liquid detergents.
SAFETY
Because this filter is specific to versions designed for
dusty areas, it is advisable to contact a Fiat Dealership
to change the filter.
STARTING
AND
DRIVING
POLLEN FILTER
Have the pollen filter replaced by a Fiat Dealership.
WARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGES
IN AN
EMERGENCY
MAINTENANCE
AND CARE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
INDEX
fig. 229
F0N0253m
fig. 230
F0N0254m
217
KNOWING
YOUR CAR
SAFETY
STARTING
AND
DRIVING
WARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGES
IN AN
EMERGENCY
BATTERY
CHANGING THE BATTERY
The battery is of the “Limited maintenance” type: under
normal conditions of use the electrolyte does not need
topping up with distilled water.
It does, however, need to be checked periodically at a
Fiat Dealership or by specialist personnel to make sure
it is working correctly.
The battery is located inside the passenger
compartment, in front of the pedals. Remove the
protective cover to gain access to it.
WARNING
When performing any operation on the
battery or near it, always protect your
eyes with special goggles.
If required, replace the battery with a genuine spare part
with the same specifications.
If a battery with different specifications is fitted, the
service intervals given in the “Scheduled Servicing
Programme” in this chapter will no longer be valid.
Follow the battery manufacturer’s instructions for
maintenance.
Incorrect assembly of electric and
electronic devices may cause severe
damage to your vehicle. Contact a Fiat
Dealership if you want to install accessories
(alarms, radiophone, etc.): they will suggest the
most suitable devices and advise you if a higher
capacity battery needs to be installed.
WARNING
MAINTENANCE
AND CARE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
INDEX
218
Battery liquid is poisonous and corrosive.
Avoid contact with the skin and eyes.
Keep naked flames or possible sources of sparks
away from the battery: risk of explosion or fire.
WARNING
Using the battery when the fluid is too
low can damage it irreparably and
generate a risk of explosion.
Batteries contain substances that are very
harmful to the environment. It is
advisable to have the battery changed by
a Fiat Dealership, where it will be disposed of
properly and in accordance with the law.
If the vehicle must remain unused for
a long time at very low temperatures,
remove the battery and take it to a warm
place to avoid freezing.
USEFUL ADVICE FOR EXTENDING
THE LIFE OF YOUR BATTERY
To avoid draining your battery and make it last longer,
observe the following instructions:
❒ when you park the vehicle, ensure that the doors,
tailgate and bonnet are closed properly to avoid the
ceiling lights remain on;
❒ the ceiling lights must be off. The vehicle is however
provided with an automatic system for switching off
internal lights;
❒ do not keep accessories (e.g. sound system, hazard
warning lights, etc...) switched on for a long time
when the engine is not running;
❒ before performing any operation on the electrical
system, disconnect the negative battery cable;
❒ battery terminals should always be completely
tightened.
IMPORTANT If the charge level remains under 50% for
a long time, the battery is damaged by sulphation,
reducing its capacity and starting attitude.
The battery will also be more at risk of freezing (this can
happen as early as −10°C). Refer to the paragraph
“Vehicle inactivity” in “Starting and driving” if the car is
left parked for a long time.
If, after buying the vehicle, you want to install electric
accessories which require permanent electric supply
(alarm, etc.) contact a Fiat Dealership whose qualified
personnel, in addition to suggesting the most suitable
devices from the Lineaccessori Fiat, will evaluate the
overall electric absorption, checking whether the
vehicle’s electrical system is capable of withstanding the
load required, or whether it should be integrated with
a more powerful battery.
Since these devices continue absorbing energy even
when the ignition key is off, they gradually run down the
battery.
KNOWING
YOUR CAR
SAFETY
STARTING
AND
DRIVING
WARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGES
IMPORTANT If a tachograph is fitted, if the vehicle is
parked for a long period of 5 days, it is advisable to
disconnect the negative battery terminal to maintain its
charge.
IN AN
EMERGENCY
If the vehicle is equipped with a battery disconnection
function (disconnector), see the description of the
procedure in the „Controls“ paragraph in the
„Dashboard and controls“ section.
MAINTENANCE
AND CARE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
INDEX
219
KNOWING
YOUR CAR
SAFETY
STARTING
AND
DRIVING
WARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGES
WHEELS AND TYRES
Check the pressure of each tyre, including the spacesaver wheel, approximately every two weeks and before
long journeys: the pressure should be checked with the
tyre rested and cold. It is normal for the pressure to
increase when the vehicle is used; for the correct tyre
inflation pressure, see “Wheels” in the “Technical
specifications” section. Incorrect pressure causes
abnormal tyre wear fig. 231:
A normal pressure: tread evenly worn.
B low pressure: tread particularly worn at the edges.
C high pressure: tread particularly worn in the centre.
The tyres must be replaced when the tread is less than
1.6 mm thick. In all cases, follow the laws in force in the
country where you are driving.
IN AN
EMERGENCY
MAINTENANCE
AND CARE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
INDEX
220
fig. 231
F0N0111m
IMPORTANT NOTES
❒ Avoid braking suddenly, burning starts and violent
knocks against the curb, potholes or other obstacles
if possible. Driving for long stretches over bumpy
roads can damage the tyres;
❒ check the tyres regularly for cuts on the sides,
swelling or irregular tread wear. Contact a Fiat
Dealership if required.
❒ avoid overloading the car when travelling: this may
cause serious damage to the wheels and tyres;
❒ if a tyre is punctured, stop the vehicle immediately
and change it to avoid damage to the tyre, the rim,
the suspensions and the steering system;
❒ a tyre will age even if it is not used much. Cracks in
the tread and on the sidewalls are a sign of ageing.
Have the tyres checked by skilled personnel if they
have been fitted for longer than six years. Also
remember to check the space-saver wheel very
carefully;
❒ In the case of replacement, always fit new tyres,
avoiding those with an unknown origin.
❒ If a tyre is replaced, also change the inflation valve.
❒ to allow an even wear between the front and rear
tyres, it is advisable to change them over every
10-15 thousand kilometres, keeping them on the
same side of the vehicle so as not to reverse the
direction of rotation.
WARNING
Remember that the road holding
qualities of your vehicle also depend on
the correct inflation pressure of the tyres.
WARNING
If the pressure is too low the tyre will get
overheated, with the risk of serious
damage.
WARNING
Avoid moving the tyres from the right
side of the vehicle to the left side and
vice versa.
RUBBER HOSES
As far as the brake system and fuel rubber hoses are
concerned, follow the “Scheduled Servicing Programme”
in this chapter carefully.
KNOWING
YOUR CAR
Ozone, high temperatures and prolonged lack of fluid in
the system may cause hardening and cracking of the
hoses, with possible leaks.
SAFETY
Careful inspections are therefore necessary.
STARTING
AND
DRIVING
WARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGES
IN AN
EMERGENCY
MAINTENANCE
AND CARE
WARNING
Never submit alloy rims to repainting
treatments requiring the use of
temperatures exceeding 150 °C. The mechanical
properties of the wheels could be impaired.
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
INDEX
221
KNOWING
YOUR CAR
SAFETY
STARTING
AND
DRIVING
WARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGES
IN AN
EMERGENCY
WINDSCREEN WIPER
Replacing the windscreen wiper blades fig. 232
Proceed as follows:
BLADES
Periodically clean the rubber part using special products;
TUTELA PROFESSIONAL SC 35 is recommended.
Replace the blades if the rubber edge is deformed or
worn. In all cases, it is advisable to replace them
approximately once a year.
A few simple precautions can reduce the possibility of
damage to the blades:
❒ make sure that the rubber part is not stuck to the
windscreen at sub-zero temperatures. Use an
antifreeze product to release it if required;
❒ remove any snow from the glass: in addition to
protecting the blades, this prevents effort on the
motor and overheating;
❒ lift the arm A of the wiper and position the blade so
that it forms an angle of 90° with the arm;
❒ remove the press-fitted blade B from arm A;
❒ insert the new blade making sure it is locked.
SPRAY NOZZLES
Windscreen washer fig. 233
If the jet of fluid is inadequate, firstly check that there is
fluid in the reservoir (see “Checking fluid levels” in this
section).
❒ do not operate the windscreen wipers on dry glass.
MAINTENANCE
AND CARE
WARNING
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
Driving with worn wiper blades is
a serious hazard, because visibility is
reduced in bad weather.
INDEX
222
fig. 232
F0N0137m
Then check that the nozzle holes are not clogged, if
necessary using a needle.
BODYWORK
The washer jets should be positioned by adjusting the
angle of the sprays using a small straight-headed
screwdriver.
PROTECTION FROM ATMOSPHERIC
AGENTS
The main causes of corrosion are: atmospheric
pollution, salty air and humidity (coastal areas, or hot
humid climates) and seasonal environmental conditions.
The abrasive action of wind-borne atmospheric dust and
sand, as well as mud and gravel raised by other cars is
also not to be underestimated. On your vehicle, Fiat has
implemented the best manufacturing technologies to
effectively protect the bodywork against corrosion.
These include:
❒ painting products and systems which give the vehicle
particular resistance to corrosion and abrasion;
❒ use of galvanised (or pretreated) steel sheets, with
high resistance to corrosion;
❒ spraying the underbody, engine compartment,
internal wheel arches and other parts with highly
protective wax products;
❒ spraying of protective plastic material in the more
exposed points: underdoor, inner mudguard parts,
edges, etc...;
❒ Use of “open” boxed sections to prevent
condensation and pockets of moisture which could
cause rust to form inside.
The jets must be directed at about 1/3 of the height from
the window upper edge.
HEADLAMP WASHERS
Check the correct condition and cleanliness of nozzles
at regular intervals.
The headlamp washers come on automatically when the
windscreen washer is operated with the dipped
headlamps on.
KNOWING
YOUR CAR
SAFETY
STARTING
AND
DRIVING
WARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGES
IN AN
EMERGENCY
MAINTENANCE
AND CARE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
INDEX
fig. 233
F0N0112m
223
KNOWING
YOUR CAR
SAFETY
STARTING
AND
DRIVING
WARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGES
IN AN
EMERGENCY
MAINTENANCE
AND CARE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
INDEX
224
VEHICLE BODY AND UNDERBODY
WARRANTY
Your vehicle is covered by warranty against perforation
due to rust of any original element of the structure or
body.
For the general terms of this warranty, refer to the
Warranty Booklet.
ADVICE FOR PRESERVING THE BODYWORK
Paint
Paintwork does not only serve an aesthetic purpose, but
also protects the underlying sheet metal. Touch up
abrasions and scratches immediately to prevent rust
formation. Use only original paint products for touchups (see “Bodywork paint identification plate” in the
“Technical specifications” section). Normal maintenance
of paintwork consists in washing the car: the frequency
depends on the conditions and environment where the
car is used. For example, it is advisable to wash the
vehicle more often in areas with high levels of
environmental pollution or on roads spread with salt.
To correctly wash the vehicle proceed as follows:
❒ remove the aerial from the roof to prevent damage
to it if the vehicle is washed in an automatic system;
❒ wash the body using a low pressure jet of water;
❒ wipe a sponge with a slightly soapy solution over the
bodywork, frequently rinsing the sponge;
❒ rinse well with water and dry with a jet of air or
a chamois leather.
Dry the less visible parts particularly carefully, such as
the door frames, bonnet and the headlight frames,
where water may stagnate more easily. It is a good idea
to leave the vehicle outdoors for a while after washing it
to give the water time to evaporate.
Do not wash the vehicle after it has been left in the sun
or with the bonnet hot: this may alter the shine of the
paintwork.
Exterior plastic parts should be cleaned in the same way
as the rest of the vehicle.
Where possible, do not park the vehicle under trees;
the resinous substances released by many species give
the paint a dull appearance and increase the possibility
of rust.
To protect the paint more effectively, polish
occasionally with special protective waxes; when the
paint tends to cloud because of a build-up of smog,
polish with slightly abrasive protective waxes.
IMPORTANT Bird droppings must be washed off
immediately and carefully as the acid they contain is
particularly aggressive.
Detergents pollute the environment.
The vehicle should be washed in areas
equipped for collecting and purifying the
liquid used in the washing process.
INTERIORS
Periodically check that water is not trapped under the
mats (due to water dripping off shoes, umbrellas, etc.)
which could cause oxidisation of the sheet metal.
KNOWING
YOUR CAR
SAFETY
Glasses
To clean glasses, use specific window cleaner products.
Also use clean cloths to avoid scratching the glass or
damaging the transparency.
IMPORTANT Wipe the rear window inside gently with
a cloth in the direction of the filaments to avoid
damaging the heating device.
Engine compartment
Wash the engine compartment thoroughly at the end of
every winter. Be careful not to direct the jet of water
onto electronic control units. Adequately protect the
upper air vents to prevent damage to the windscreen
wiper motor. Have this operation performed at a
specialised workshop.
IMPORTANT The washing should take place with the
engine cold and the ignition key in the STOP position.
After the washing operation, make sure that the various
protections (e.g. rubber caps and guards) have not been
removed or damaged.
Front headlights
IMPORTANT Never use aromatic substances (e.g.:
petrol) or ketones (e.g.: acetone) for cleaning the front
headlight plastic lenses.
WARNING
Never use flammable products, such as
petrol, ether or rectified petrol, to clean
the vehicle interior. The electrostatic charges
which are generated by rubbing during the
cleaning operation may cause a fire.
WARNING
Do not keep aerosol cans in the vehicle:
risk of explosion Aerosol cans must not
be exposed to a temperature exceeding 50 °C.
When the vehicle is exposed to sunlight, the
internal temperature can greatly exceed this
value.
STARTING
AND
DRIVING
WARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGES
IN AN
EMERGENCY
MAINTENANCE
AND CARE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
INDEX
225
KNOWING
YOUR CAR
SAFETY
STARTING
AND
DRIVING
WARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGES
IN AN
EMERGENCY
MAINTENANCE
AND CARE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
INDEX
226
SEATS AND FABRIC PARTS
Remove dust with a soft brush or a vacuum cleaner. It is
advisable to use a moist brush on velvet upholstery.
Rub the seats with a sponge moistened with a solution
of water and neutral detergent.
The fabric upholstery of your vehicle is
designed to withstand the normal wear
and tear of your vehicle for a long time.
You are however recommended to avoid strong
and/or continuous scratching with clothing
accessories such as metal buckles, studs, Velcro
fastenings and the like, as these items cause stress
of the cover fabric that could lead threads to
break and damage the upholstery.
INTERIOR PLASTIC PARTS
It is advisable to clean interior parts with a moist cloth
and a solution of water and mild soap. Use specific
products for cleaning plastic, without solvents and
specifically designed to prevent damage to the
appearance and colour of the treated parts to remove
grease and tough stains.
IMPORTANT Never use alcohol or petroleum to clean
the instrument panel.
LEATHER STEERING WHEEL/GEAR KNOB
These components must be cleaned with mild soap and
water only.
Never use alcohol and/or alcohol-based products.
Before using off-the-shelves products designed for
cleaning car interiors, make sure that they do not
contain alcohol and/or alcohol based substances before
using them.
If window cleaner accidentally drips onto the steering
wheel or gear lever knob, wipe away immediately and
then wash the affected area with mild soap and water.
IMPORTANT Be careful when using a steering wheel
lock device, where applicable, to prevent damaging the
leather upholstery by rubbing.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
KNOWING
YOUR CAR
IDENTIFICATION DATA
H Maximum authorised weight on second axle
(rear).
It is advisable to take note of the identification codes.
The following identification codes are printed and
shown on the plates:
I
❒ Model plate.
M Number for spare parts
❒ Chassis marking.
N Correct fume coefficient value.
SAFETY
Engine type
L Bodywork version code
STARTING
AND
DRIVING
❒ Bodywork paint identification plate.
WARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGES
❒ Engine marking.
MODEL PLATE fig. 234
This plate is fitted to the engine compartment front
crossmember and contains the following identification
data:
IN AN
EMERGENCY
B Type-approval number
MAINTENANCE
AND CARE
C Vehicle type identification code.
D Chassis number.
E Maximum authorised weight of vehicle fully laden.
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
F Maximum authorised weight of vehicle fully laden
plus trailer.
G Maximum authorised weight on first axle (front).
INDEX
fig. 234
F0N0333m
227
KNOWING
YOUR CAR
SAFETY
BODYWORK PAINT IDENTIFICATION
PLATE fig. 235
This plate is fitted to the engine compartment front
crossmember and contains the following identification
data:
ENGINE MARKING
This is stamped onto the cylinder block and shows the
type and the manufacture serial number.
A Paint manufacturer.
B Colour name.
STARTING
AND
DRIVING
C Fiat colour code.
D Respray and touch up code.
WARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGES
CHASSIS MARKING fig. 236
IN AN
EMERGENCY
❒ vehicle model;
One is located on the passenger’s side inner wheel arch,
A-fig. 236, the other on the lower part of the
windscreen, fig. 237.
❒ the chassis progressive number.
fig. 236
F0N0162m
MAINTENANCE
AND CARE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
INDEX
228
fig. 235
F0N0160m
fig. 237
F0N0338m
ENGINE CODES – BODYWORK VERSIONS
Versions
Engine type code
115 Multijet
250A1000
130 Multijet
F1AE3481D
150 Multijet
F1AE3481E
180 Multijet Power
F1CE3481E
There is an example of a bodywork version code below
by way of explanation with a key which is valid for all
bodywork version codes:
Key
250
A
A
MODEL
GVW
ENGINE
ENGINE TRANSMISSION/AXLES
BODYWORK
WHEELBASE
VERSION
M
F
A
AX
GVW
A 3000 kg
B 3300 kg
C 3500 kg
D 3500 kg MAXI
E 4005 kg
ENGINE
M 130 Multijet
N 150 Multijet
P 180 Multijet Power
R 115 Multijet
TRANSMISSION
M Manual gearbox
A Automatic
transmission
WHEELBASE
A Short wheelbase
B Medium wheelbase
C Long wheelbase
D Medium-long
wheelbase
U All wheelbases
(incomplete vehicles).
BODYWORK
A Chassis cab frame
B Platform frame without drive cab
C Platform chassis cab
D Flatbed truck
E Primary school bus
F Van
G Long cab trailer
H Long cab frame
L Secondary school bus
M Bus
P Panorama
R 6/9 seater crew cab
KNOWING
YOUR CAR
SAFETY
STARTING
AND
DRIVING
WARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGES
IN AN
EMERGENCY
MAINTENANCE
AND CARE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
INDEX
229
KNOWING
YOUR CAR
SAFETY
ENGINE
GENERAL INFORMATION
Engine code
Cycle
STARTING
AND
DRIVING
WARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGES
IN AN
EMERGENCY
MAINTENANCE
AND CARE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
Cylinder
number and position
115
Multijet
130
Multijet
150
Multijet
180
Multijet Power
250A1000
F1AE3481D
F1AE3481E
F1CE3481E
Diesel
Diesel
Diesel
Diesel
4 in line
4 in line
4 in line
4 in line
Piston bore
and stroke
mm
83 x 90.4
88 x 94
88 x 94
95.8 x 104
Total displacement
cm3
1956
2287
2287
2999
16.5 : 1
16.2 : 1
16.2 : 1
17.5 : 1
kW
HP
84.6
115
96
130
109
148
130
177
corresponding
speed
rpm
3750
3600
3600
3500
Maximum
torque (EEC)
Nm
280
320
350
400
corresponding speed
rpm
1500
1800
1500
1400
Compression
ratio:
Max power
(EEC)
Fuel
Diesel for automotive engines (Specification EN590)
INDEX
230
POWER SUPPLY
Supply system
WARNING
Modifications or repairs to the fuel
supply system that are not carried out
properly or do not take the system’s technical
specifications into account can cause
malfunctions leading to the risk of fire.
Common Rail
direct injection
Clutch
Traction
SAFETY
STARTING
AND
DRIVING
TRANSMISSION
Gearbox
KNOWING
YOUR CAR
115 Multijet
130 Multijet – 150 Multijet – 180 Multijet Power
Five forward gears and reverse
with synchronisers for forward
gear engagement
Six forward gears plus reverse
with synchronisers for
forward gears
Self-adjusting pedal without idle stroke
WARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGES
IN AN
EMERGENCY
Front
MAINTENANCE
AND CARE
SUSPENSION
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
front
Mac Pherson independent wheels
Rear
Rigid rear axle with tubular axle; longitudinal leaf spring
INDEX
231
KNOWING
YOUR CAR
BRAKES
Service brakes:
SAFETY
front
self-ventilated discs
rear
discs
Parking brake
STARTING
AND
DRIVING
WARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGES
controlled by hand lever, acting on rear brakes
IMPORTANT Water, ice and antifreeze salt spread on the roads may deposit on the brake discs reducing braking efficiency
the first time the brakes are applied.
STEERING
Short
wheelbase
Type
IN AN
EMERGENCY
MAINTENANCE
AND CARE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
INDEX
232
Steering circle
(kerb to kerb)
Medium
wheelbase
Medium-long
wheelbase
Long
wheelbase
Rack and pinion with hydraulic power steering
m
11.06
12.46
13.54
14.28
WHEELS
RIMS AND TYRES
Pressed steel or alloy rims. Radial type tubeless tyres.
The vehicle registration document also lists all typeapproved tyres.
IMPORTANT In the event of discrepancies between the
information provided on this “Owner Handbook” and
the “Vehicle registration document”, only the latter is
valid.
READING TYRE CODE fig. 238
Example: 215/70 R 15 109S
215 = Nominal width (S, distance between sidewalls in
mm).
70 = Height/width ratio (H/S) in percentage.
R = Radial tyre.
15 = Rim diameter in inches (Ø).
109 = Load rating (capacity).
S = Maximum speed index.
Fit tyres of the same make and type on all wheels,
to ensure the safety of the vehicle in movement
KNOWING
YOUR CAR
SAFETY
STARTING
AND
DRIVING
IMPORTANT Do not use inner tubes in the case of
tubeless tyres.
WARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGES
SPARE WHEEL
Pressed steel wheel.
Tubeless tyre, same as standard tyre.
IN AN
EMERGENCY
WHEEL GEOMETRY
Total front toe in:
– 1 ± 1 mm
The values refer to the vehicle in running order.
MAINTENANCE
AND CARE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
INDEX
fig. 238
F0N0113m
233
KNOWING
YOUR CAR
SAFETY
STARTING
AND
DRIVING
WARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGES
IN AN
EMERGENCY
MAINTENANCE
AND CARE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
INDEX
234
Maximum speed index
RIM PROTECTOR TYRES fig. 239
Q = up to 160 km/h.
R = up to 170 km/h.
S = up to 180 km/h.
T = up to 190 km/h.
U = up to 200 km/h.
H = up to 210 km/h.
V = up to 240 km/h.
WARNING
DO NOT fit wheel hub caps when using
integral hub caps fixed (with springs) to
the steel rim and after sale tyres provided with
Rim Protector (fig. 234). The use of unsuitable
tyres and wheel hub caps could cause a sudden
pressure loss in the tyre.
Maximum speed index for snow tyres
QM + S = up to 160 km/h.
TM + S = up to 190 km/h.
HM + S = up to 210 km/h.
Load rating (capacity)
70 = 335 kg
71 = 345 kg
72 = 355 kg
73 = 365 kg
74 = 375 kg
75 = 387 kg
76 = 400 kg
77 = 412 kg
78 = 425 kg
79 = 437 kg
80 = 450 kg
81 = 462 kg
82 = 475 kg
83 = 487 kg
84 = 500 kg
85 = 515 kg
86 = 530 kg
87 = 545 kg
88 = 560 kg
89 = 580 kg
90 = 600 kg
91 = 615 kg
fig. 239
F0V0217m
READING RIM CODE fig. 238
Example: 6J x 15 ET43
6
J
15
ET43
=
=
=
=
rim width in inches 1.
rim drop centre outline (side projection where the tyre bead rests) 2.
rim nominal diameter in inches (corresponds to diameter of the tyre to be mounted) 3 = Ø.
wheel camber (distance between the disc/rim support plane and the wheel rim centre line).
KNOWING
YOUR CAR
SAFETY
STARTING
AND
DRIVING
Versions
Rims
Tyres provided
Ducato (except recreational)
6J x 15" – H2
215/70 R15C 109/107S
225/70 R15C 112/110S
Ducato (recreational)
6J x 15" – H2
215/70 R15CP 109/107Q
Ducato Maxi (except recreational)
6J x 16" – H2
215/75 R16C 116/114R
225/75 R16C 118/116R
Ducato Maxi (recreational)
6J x 16" – H2
225/75 R16CP 116/114Q
If using M+S winter tyres with speed index lower than “S” for 15 inch wheels and “R” for 16 inch wheels, respect the max
vehicle speed indicated in the table: Maximum speed index.
WARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGES
IN AN
EMERGENCY
MAINTENANCE
AND CARE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
important Use only the tyres shown in the vehicle vehicle registration document.
If using class C tyres on a Camping vehicle, always use wheels with a metal inflation valve. When replacing, it is always advisable
to use Camping tyres.
INDEX
235
KNOWING
YOUR CAR
COLD TYRE INFLATION PRESSURE (bar)
Tyres provided
Use
Front
Rear
4.0 ± 0.05
4.0 ± 0.05
4.1 ± 0.05
4.5 ± 0.05
SAFETY
215/70 R15
3000 GVW(*) with wide tyres,
except PANORAMA
3300 GVW (*) / 3500 GVW (*)
with basic tyres
STARTING
AND
DRIVING
215/70 R15
PANORAMA with basic tyres
4.1 ± 0.05
4.5 ± 0.05
3000 GVW (*) with wide tyres,
except PANORAMA
3300 GVW(*) / 3500 GVW(*)
with wide tyres
4.0 ± 0.05
4.0 ± 0.05
225/70 R15
4.1 ± 0.05
4.5 ± 0.05
225/70 R15 C
Winter tyres M+S class C on Camping vehicle
4.3 ± 0.05
4.75 ± 0.05
225/70 R15
PANORAMA with wide tyres
4.1 ± 0.05
4.5 ± 0.05
215/70 R15 CP
Range with Camping tyres
5.0 ± 0.05
5.5 ± 0.05
215/75 R16
Maxi range with basic tyres
4.5 ± 0.05
5.0 ± 0.05
225/75 R16
Maxi range with wide tyres
4.5 ± 0.05
5.0 ± 0.05
225/75 R16 C
Winter tyres M+S class C on Camping vehicle
5.2 ± 0.05
5.2 ± 0.05
225/75 R16 CP
Maxi range with camping tyres
5.5 ± 0.05
5.5 ± 0.05
WARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGES
IN AN
EMERGENCY
MAINTENANCE
AND CARE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
INDEX
236
(*) GVW = Total weight on the ground
When the tyres are warm, the inflation pressure should be + 0.3 bar compared with the prescribed figure.
However, recheck that the value is correct with the tyre cold.
With snow tyres, add +0.2 bar to the inflation pressure value prescribed for standard tyres.
DIMENSIONS
VAN VERSION
KNOWING
YOUR CAR
Dimensions are expressed in mm
and refer to the vehicle fitted with
standard tyres.
SAFETY
The height refers to the unladen
vehicle.
STARTING
AND
DRIVING
F0N0852m
fig. 240
WARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGES
VAN
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
I
CHI-CH2
MH1 – MH2
LH2 – LH3
XLH2 – XLH3
948
3000
1015
4963
2254 – 2524
1810
2050
1790
948
3450
1015
5413
2254 – 2524
1810
2050
1790
948
4035
1015
5998
2524 – 2764
1810
2050
1790
948
4035
1380
6363
2524 – 2764
1810
2050
1790
IN AN
EMERGENCY
MAINTENANCE
AND CARE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
INDEX
The sizes vary according to the various versions within the limits indicated above
237
KNOWING
YOUR CAR
SAFETY
TRUCK VERSION
Dimensions are expressed in mm
and refer to the vehicle fitted with
standard tyres.
The height refers to the unladen
vehicle.
F0N0342m
fig. 241
STARTING
AND
DRIVING
WARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGES
IN AN
EMERGENCY
MAINTENANCE
AND CARE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
INDEX
238
BOX
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
L
CHASSIS CAB
CHI
MH1
LH1
XLH1
948
3000
1345
5293
2798
2254
1810
1790
2100
948
3450
1345
5743
3248
2254
1810
1790
2100
948
4035
1345
6328
3833
2254
1810
1790
2100
948
4035
1710
6693
4198
2254
1810
1790
2100
The sizes vary according to the various versions within the limits indicated above
CHI
MH1-MLH1
LH1
XLH1
948
948
948
948
3000
3450-3800
4035
4035
960
960
960
1325
4908
5358-5708
5943
6308
–
–
–
–
2254
2254
2254
2254
1810
1810
1810
1810
1790÷1980 1790÷1980 1790÷1980 1790÷1980
2050
2050
2050
2050
CHASSIS COWL
CHI
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
L
MH1-MLH1
LH1
SPECIAL CHASSIS CAB
XLH1
925
925
925
925
3000
3450-3800
4035
4035
860
860
860
1225
4785
5235-5585
5820
6125
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
1810
1810
1810
1810
1790÷1980 1790÷1980 1790÷1980 1790÷1980
2050
2050
2050
2050
CHI
MH1-MLH1
LH1
XLH1
948
948
948
948
3000
3450-3800
4035
4035
880
880
880
1245
4828
5278-5628
5863
6228
–
–
–
–
2254
2254
2254
2254
1810
1810
1810
1810
1790÷1980 1790÷1980 1790÷1980 1790÷1980
2050
2050
2050
2050
The sizes vary according to the various versions within the limits indicated above
CHI
A
B
C
D
G
H
L
925
3000
880
4805
1810
1790÷1980
2050
SPECIAL CHASSIS COWL
MH1-MLH1
LH1
925
3450-3800
880
5255-5605
1810
1790÷1980
2050
The sizes vary according to the various versions within the limits indicated above
925
4035
880
5840
1810
1790÷1980
2050
XLH1
925
4035
1245
6205
1810
1790÷1980
2050
KNOWING
YOUR CAR
SAFETY
STARTING
AND
DRIVING
WARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGES
IN AN
EMERGENCY
MAINTENANCE
AND CARE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
INDEX
239
KNOWING
YOUR CAR
PERFORMANCE
Top permitted speed after initial vehicle use in km/h.
115 Multijet
130 Multijet
150 Multijet
180 Multijet Power
CH1-MH1
148
155
162
171
CH2-MH2
LH2-XLH2
143
150
157
166
LH3
XLH3
138
145
152
161
CH1
148
155
157
171
SAFETY
STARTING
AND
DRIVING
WARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGES
IN AN
EMERGENCY
MAINTENANCE
AND CARE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
INDEX
240
VAN
LORRIES WITH
FLATBED
VAN WEIGHTS
3000 kg GVW versions (***)
115 Multijet
130/150 Multijet
180 Multijet Power
Unladen weight
(with all fluids, fuel tank filled
to 90% and without
optional equipment):
kg
1845÷1910
1860÷1925
1910÷1975
Payload (*) including
the driver:
kg
1090÷1155
1075÷1140
1025÷1090
Maximum permitted loads (**)
– front axle:
– rear axle:
– total:
kg
kg
kg
1630
1650
3000
1630
1650
3000
1630
1650
3000
Towable loads
– braked trailer:
– non braked trailer:
kg
kg
2000
750
2500
750
2500
750
Maximum load on the ball
joint (braked trailer):
kg
100
100
100
Maximum load on roof
(evenly distributed):
kg
150
150
150
(*)
If special equipment is fitted (sunroof, tow hitch, etc.) the unladen vehicle weight increases, thus reducing the specified
payload.
(**) Loads not be exceeded. The user is responsible for arranging goods in the luggage compartment and/or load platform
within the maximum permitted loads.
(***) The values indicated refer to panel and glazed Vans in medium and short wheelbases with high and low sides.
KNOWING
YOUR CAR
SAFETY
STARTING
AND
DRIVING
WARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGES
IN AN
EMERGENCY
MAINTENANCE
AND CARE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
INDEX
241
KNOWING
YOUR CAR
SAFETY
STARTING
AND
DRIVING
WARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGES
IN AN
EMERGENCY
MAINTENANCE
AND CARE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
VAN WEIGHTS
3300 kg GVW versions (***)
115
Multijet
130/150
Multijet
180
Multijet Power
115
Multijet
130/150
Multijet
180
Multijet Power
kg
1845÷1985
1860÷2000
1910÷2050
1845÷1985
1860÷2000
1910÷2050
Payload (*) including the
driver:
kg
1315÷1455
1300÷1440
1250÷1390
1515÷1655
1500÷1640
1450÷1590
Maximum permitted loads (**)
– front axle:
kg
– rear axle:
kg
– total:
kg
1750
1900
3300
1750
1900
3300
1750
1900
3300
1850
2000
3500
1850
2000
3500
1850
2000
3500
Towable loads
– braked trailer:
– non braked trailer:
kg
kg
2000
750
2500
750
2500
750
2000
750
2500
750
2500
750
Maximum load on the ball
joint (braked trailer):
kg
100
100
100
100
100
100
Maximum load on roof
(evenly distributed):
150
150
150
150
150
150
Unladen weight
(with all fluids,
fuel tank filled to 90%
and without
optional equipment):
(*)
INDEX
242
3500 kg GVW versions (***)
kg
If special equipment is fitted (sunroof, tow hitch, etc.) the unladen vehicle weight increases, thus reducing the specified
payload.
(**) Loads not be exceeded. The user is responsible for arranging goods in the luggage compartment and/or load platform
within the maximum permitted loads.
(***) The values indicated refer to panel and glazed Vans in medium and short wheelbases with high and low sides.
VAN WEIGHTS (MAXI versions)
3500 kg GVW versions (***)
4000 kg GVW versions (***)
KNOWING
YOUR CAR
130/150 Multijet 180 Multijet Power 130/150 Multijet 180 Multijet Power
Unladen weight
(with all fluids, fuel tank filled to
90% and without optional equipment):
kg
1940÷2090
1990÷2140
2010÷2135
2060÷2185
Payload (*) including the driver:
kg
1410÷1560
1360÷1510
1865÷1990
1815÷1940
Maximum permitted loads (**)
– front axle:
– rear axle:
– total:
kg
kg
kg
2100
2400
3500
2100
2400
3500
2100
2400
4000
2100
2400
4000
Towable loads
– braked trailer:
– non braked trailer:
kg
kg
3000
750
3000
750
2500
750
2500
750
Maximum load on the ball
joint (braked trailer):
kg
120
120
100
100
Maximum load on roof
(evenly distributed):
kg
150
150
150
150
SAFETY
If special equipment is fitted (sunroof, tow hitch, etc.) the unladen vehicle weight increases, thus reducing the specified
payload.
(**) Loads not be exceeded. The user is responsible for arranging goods in the luggage compartment and/or load platform
within the maximum permitted loads.
(***) The values indicated refer to panel and glazed Vans in medium and short wheelbases with high and low sides.
STARTING
AND
DRIVING
WARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGES
IN AN
EMERGENCY
MAINTENANCE
AND CARE
(*)
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
INDEX
243
KNOWING
YOUR CAR
SAFETY
STARTING
AND
DRIVING
WARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGES
IN AN
EMERGENCY
MAINTENANCE
AND CARE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
INDEX
244
TRUCK TRAILER WEIGHTS
115 Multijet
130 Multijet
180 Multijet Power
Unladen weight
(with all fluids, fuel tank filled to
90% and without optional equipment): kg
1795÷1840
1810÷1855
1860÷1905
Payload (*) including the driver:
kg
1125÷1160
1125÷1145
1095÷1140
Maximum permitted loads (**)
– front axle:
– rear axle:
– total:
kg
kg
kg
1630
1650
2920-3000
1630
1650
2935-3000
1630
1650
2935-3000
Towable loads
– braked trailer:
– non braked trailer:
kg
kg
2000
750
2500
750
2500
750
Maximum load on the ball
joint (braked trailer):
kg
100
100
100
3000 kg GVW versions
(*)
If special equipment is fitted (sunroof, tow hitch, etc.) the unladen vehicle weight increases, thus reducing the
specified payload.
(**) Loads not be exceeded. The user is responsible for arranging goods in the luggage compartment and/or load
platform within the maximum permitted loads.
TRUCK TRAILER WEIGHTS
3300 kg GVW versions
115
Multijet
Unladen weight
(with all fluids,
fuel tank filled to 90%
and without optional
equipment):
130
Multijet
180
Multijet Power
KNOWING
YOUR CAR
3500 kg GVW versions
115
Multijet
130
Multijet
180
Multijet Power
SAFETY
kg
1795÷1895
1810÷1910
1860÷1960
1795÷1895
1810÷1910
1860÷1960
Payload (*) including the
driver:
kg
1405÷1435
1390÷1435
1340÷1440
1535÷1605
1535÷1590
1540÷1640
1750
1900
3230÷3300
1750
1900
3245÷3300
1750
1900
3425÷3300
1850
2000
3330÷3500
1850
2000
3345÷3500
1850
2000
3345÷3500
kg
kg
2000
750
2500
750
2500
750
2000
750
2500
750
2500
750
Maximum load on the ball
joint (braked trailer):
kg
100
100
100
100
100
100
Maximum permitted loads (**)
– front axle:
kg
– rear axle:
kg
– total:
kg
Towable loads
– braked trailer:
– non braked trailer:
(*)
If special equipment is fitted (sunroof, tow hitch, etc.) the unladen vehicle weight increases, thus reducing the specified
payload.
(**) Loads not be exceeded. The driver is responsible for arranging goods in the luggage compartment and/or on the load
platform within the maximum permitted loads.
STARTING
AND
DRIVING
WARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGES
IN AN
EMERGENCY
MAINTENANCE
AND CARE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
INDEX
245
KNOWING
YOUR CAR
SAFETY
STARTING
AND
DRIVING
WARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGES
IN AN
EMERGENCY
MAINTENANCE
AND CARE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
INDEX
246
TRAILER TRUCK WEIGHTS (MAXI versions)
3500 kg GVW versions
4000 kg GVW versions
130 Multijet
180 Multijet Power
130 Multijet
180 Multijet Power
Unladen weight
(with all fluids, fuel tank filled to
90% and without optional equipment):
kg
1895÷1985
1945÷2035
1895÷1985
1945÷2035
Payload (*) including the driver:
kg
1515÷1605
1465÷1555
2015÷2105
1965÷2055
Maximum permitted loads (**)
– front axle:
– rear axle:
– total:
kg
kg
kg
2100
2400
3500
2100
2400
3500
2100
2400
4000
2100
2400
4000
Towable loads
– braked trailer:
– non braked trailer:
kg
kg
2500
750
2500
750
2500
750
2500
750
Maximum load on the ball
joint (braked trailer):
kg
120
120
100
100
(*)
If special equipment is fitted (sunroof, tow hitch, etc.) the unladen vehicle weight increases, thus reducing the specified
payload.
(**) Loads not be exceeded. The user is responsible for arranging goods in the luggage compartment and/or load platform
within the maximum permitted loads.
WEIGHTS OF CHASSIS CAB FRAME WITH PLATFORM
3000 kg GVW versions
115 Multijet
130/150 Multijet
3300 kg GVW versions
115 Multijet
130/150 Multijet
Unladen weight (*)
(with all fluids,
fuel tank filled to
90% and without
optional equipment):
kg
1600
1580÷1615
1580÷1615
1595÷1630
Maximum permitted loads (**)
– front axle:
– rear axle:
– total:
kg
kg
kg
1630
1650
3000
1630
1650
3000
1750
1900
3300
1750
1900
3300
Towable loads
– braked trailer:
– non braked trailer:
kg
kg
2000
750
2500
750
2000
750
2500
750
Maximum load on the ball
joint (braked trailer):
kg
100
100
100
100
(*)
KNOWING
YOUR CAR
SAFETY
If special equipment is fitted (sunroof, tow hitch, etc.) the unladen vehicle weight increases, thus reducing the specified
payload.
(**) Loads not be exceeded. The user is responsible for arranging goods in the luggage compartment and/or load platform
within the maximum permitted loads.
STARTING
AND
DRIVING
WARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGES
IN AN
EMERGENCY
MAINTENANCE
AND CARE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
INDEX
247
KNOWING
YOUR CAR
SAFETY
STARTING
AND
DRIVING
WARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGES
IN AN
EMERGENCY
MAINTENANCE
AND CARE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
INDEX
248
WEIGHTS OF CHASSIS CAB FRAME WITH PLATFORM
3500 kg GVW versions
115 Multijet
130 Multijet
Unladen weight (*)
(with all fluids, fuel tank filled to
90% and without optional equipment):
kg
1580÷1615
1595÷1630
Maximum permitted loads (**)
– front axle:
– rear axle:
– total:
kg
kg
kg
1850
2000
3500
1850
2000
3500
Towable loads
– braked trailer:
– non braked trailer:
kg
kg
2000
750
2500
750
Maximum load on the ball
joint (braked trailer):
kg
100
100
(*)
If special equipment is fitted (sunroof, tow hitch, etc.) the unladen vehicle weight increases, thus reducing the specified
payload.
(**) Loads not be exceeded. The driver is responsible for arranging goods in the luggage compartment and/or on the load
platform within the maximum permitted loads.
WEIGHTS OF CHASSIS CAB FRAME WITH PLATFORM (MAXI versions)
3500 kg GVW versions
4000 kg GVW versions
130 Multijet
180 Multijet Power
130 Multijet
180 Multijet Power
Unladen weight
(with all fluids, fuel tank filled to
90% and without optional equipment):
kg
1655÷1685
1705÷1735
1655÷1685
1705÷1735
Payload (*) including the driver:
kg
1815÷1845
1765÷1795
2315÷2345
2265÷2295
Maximum permitted loads (**)
– front axle:
– rear axle:
– total:
kg
kg
kg
2100
2400
3500
2100
2400
3500
2100
2400
4000
2100
2400
4000
Towable loads
– braked trailer:
– non braked trailer:
kg
kg
3000
750
3000
750
2500
750
2500
750
Maximum load on the ball
joint (braked trailer):
kg
120
120
100
100
(*)
KNOWING
YOUR CAR
SAFETY
If special equipment is fitted (sunroof, tow hitch, etc.) the unladen vehicle weight increases, thus reducing the specified
payload.
(**) Loads not be exceeded. The user is responsible for arranging goods in the luggage compartment and/or load platform
within the maximum permitted loads.
STARTING
AND
DRIVING
WARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGES
IN AN
EMERGENCY
MAINTENANCE
AND CARE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
INDEX
249
KNOWING
YOUR CAR
SAFETY
STARTING
AND
DRIVING
WARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGES
IN AN
EMERGENCY
MAINTENANCE
AND CARE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
INDEX
250
CHASSIS CAB FRAME WEIGHTS
3000 kg GVW versions
Unladen weight (*)
(with all fluids, fuel tank filled to
90% and without optional equipment): kg
115 Multijet (❏)
130 Multijet (❏)
180 Multijet Power (❏)
1590÷1630
1605÷1635
1655÷1695
Maximum permitted loads (**)
– front axle:
– rear axle:
– total:
kg
kg
kg
1630
1650
3000
1630
1650
3000
1630
1650
3000
Towable loads
– braked trailer:
– non braked trailer:
kg
kg
2000
750
2500
750
2500
750
Maximum load on the ball
joint (braked trailer):
kg
100
100
100
(❏) Chassis version
(*) If special equipment is fitted (sunroof, tow hitch, etc.) the unladen vehicle weight increases, thus reducing the specified
payload.
(**) Loads not be exceeded. The user is responsible for arranging goods in the luggage compartment and/or load platform
within the maximum permitted loads.
CHASSIS CAB FRAME WEIGHTS
115 Multijet
(❏)
3300 kg GVW versions
Unladen weight (with all fluids,
fuel tank filled to 90%
and without
optional extras) (*):
kg
115 Multijet
(▼)
130 Multijet
(❏)
150 Multijet
(❏)
150 Multijet
(▼)
180 Multijet
Power (❏)
KNOWING
YOUR CAR
SAFETY
1590÷1640
1545÷1560
1605÷1655
1605÷1655
1560÷1580
1655÷1705
Maximum permitted loads (**)
– front axle:
kg
– rear axle:
kg
– total:
kg
1750
1900
3300
1750
1900
3300
1750
1900
3300
1750
1900
3300
1750
1900
3300
1750
1900
3300
Towable loads
– braked trailer:
– non braked trailer:
kg
kg
2000
750
2000
750
2500
750
2500
750
2500
750
2500
750
Maximum load on the ball
joint (braked trailer):
kg
100
100
100
100
100
100
(❏) Chassis version
STARTING
AND
DRIVING
WARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGES
IN AN
EMERGENCY
(▼) Special version
MAINTENANCE
AND CARE
(*) If special equipment is fitted (sunroof, tow hitch, etc.) the unladen vehicle weight increases, thus reducing the specified
payload.
(**) Loads not be exceeded. The driver is responsible for arranging goods in the luggage compartment and/or on the load
platform within the maximum permitted loads.
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
INDEX
251
KNOWING
YOUR CAR
CHASSIS CAB FRAME WEIGHTS
115 Multijet
(❏)
115 Multijet
(▼)
130 Multijet
(❏)
150 Multijet
(❏)
150 Multijet
(▼)
180 Multijet
Power (❏)
Unladen weight
(with all fluids, fuel tank filled
to 90% and without
optional extras) (*):
kg
1590÷1640
1545÷1575
1605÷1655
1605÷1655
1560÷1590
1655÷1705
Maximum permitted loads (**)
– front axle:
kg
– rear axle:
kg
– total:
kg
1850
2000
3500
1850
2000
3500
1850
2000
3500
1850
2000
3500
1850
2000
3500
1850
2000
3500
Towable loads
– braked trailer:
– non braked trailer:
kg
kg
2000
750
2000
750
2500
750
2500
750
2500
750
2500
750
Maximum load on the ball
joint (braked trailer):
kg
100
100
100
100
100
100
3500 kg GVW versions
SAFETY
STARTING
AND
DRIVING
WARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGES
IN AN
EMERGENCY
MAINTENANCE
AND CARE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
INDEX
252
(❏) Chassis version
(▼) Special version
(*) If special equipment is fitted (sunroof, tow hitch, etc.) the unladen vehicle weight increases, thus reducing the specified
payload.
(**) Loads not be exceeded. The driver is responsible for arranging goods in the luggage compartment and/or on the load
platform within the maximum permitted loads.
CHASSIS CAB FRAME WEIGHTS (MAXI versions)
3500 kg GVW versions
130 Multijet
(❏)
180 Multijet
Power (❏)
130 Multijet
(▼)
180 Multijet
Power (▼)
Unladen weight (with all fluids,
fuel tank filled to 90% and without
optional equipment):
kg
1675÷1710
1725÷1760
1610÷1630
1660÷1680
Payload (*) including the
driver:
kg
1790÷1825
1740÷1775
1870÷1890
1820÷1840
Maximum permitted loads (**)
– front axle:
– rear axle:
– total:
kg
kg
kg
2100
2400
3500
2100
2400
3500
2100
2400
3500
2100
2400
3500
Towable loads
– braked trailer:
– non braked trailer:
kg
kg
2500
750
2500
750
2500
750
2500
750
Maximum load on the ball
joint (braked trailer):
kg
120
120
120
120
(❏) Chassis version
KNOWING
YOUR CAR
SAFETY
STARTING
AND
DRIVING
WARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGES
IN AN
EMERGENCY
MAINTENANCE
AND CARE
(▼) Special version
(*) If special equipment is fitted (sunroof, tow hitch, etc.) the unladen vehicle weight increases, thus reducing the specified
payload.
(**) Loads not be exceeded. The driver is responsible for arranging goods in the luggage compartment and/or on the load
platform within the maximum permitted loads.
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
INDEX
253
KNOWING
YOUR CAR
SAFETY
STARTING
AND
DRIVING
WARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGES
IN AN
EMERGENCY
MAINTENANCE
AND CARE
CHASSIS CAB FRAME WEIGHTS (MAXI versions)
4000 kg GVW versions
130 Multijet
(❏)
180 Multijet
Power (❏)
130 Multijet
(▼)
180 Multijet
Power (▼)
Unladen weight (with all fluids,
fuel tank filled to 90% and without
optional equipment):
kg
1675÷1710
1725÷1760
1610÷1630
1660÷1680
Payload (*) including the
driver:
kg
2290÷2325
2240÷2275
2370÷2390
2320÷2340
Maximum permitted loads (**)
– front axle:
– rear axle:
– total:
kg
kg
kg
2100
2400
4000
2100
2400
4000
2100
2400
4000
2100
2400
4000
Towable loads
– braked trailer:
– non braked trailer:
kg
kg
2500
750
2500
750
2500
750
2500
750
Maximum load on the ball
joint (braked trailer):
kg
100
100
100
100
(❏) Chassis version
(▼) Special version
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
INDEX
254
(*) If special equipment is fitted (sunroof, tow hitch, etc.) the unladen vehicle weight increases, thus reducing the specified
payload.
(**) Loads not be exceeded. The driver is responsible for arranging goods in the luggage compartment and/or on the load
platform within the maximum permitted loads.
CHASSIS COWL WEIGHTS (MAXI versions)
3500 kg GVW versions
130 Multijet
(❏)
180 Multijet
Power (❏)
130 Multijet
(▼)
180 Multijet
Power (▼)
Unladen weight (with all fluids,
fuel tank filled to 90% and without
optional equipment):
kg
1375÷1410
1425÷1460
1310÷1330
1360÷1380
Payload (*) including the
driver:
kg
2090÷2125
2040÷2075
2170÷2190
2120÷2140
Maximum permitted loads (**)
– front axle:
– rear axle:
– total:
kg
kg
kg
2100
2400
3500
2100
2400
3500
2100
2400
3500
2100
2400
3500
Towable loads
– braked trailer:
– non braked trailer:
kg
kg
2500
750
2500
750
2500
750
2500
750
Maximum load on the ball
joint (braked trailer):
kg
120
120
120
120
KNOWING
YOUR CAR
SAFETY
(❏) Chassis version
STARTING
AND
DRIVING
WARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGES
IN AN
EMERGENCY
MAINTENANCE
AND CARE
(▼) Special version
(*) If special equipment is fitted (sunroof, tow hitch, etc.) the unladen vehicle weight increases, thus reducing the specified
payload.
(**) Loads not be exceeded. The driver is responsible for arranging goods in the luggage compartment and/or on the load
platform within the maximum permitted loads.
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
INDEX
255
KNOWING
YOUR CAR
CHASSIS COWL WEIGHTS (MAXI versions)
4000 kg GVW versions
SAFETY
STARTING
AND
DRIVING
WARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGES
IN AN
EMERGENCY
MAINTENANCE
AND CARE
130 Multijet
(❏)
180 Multijet
Power (❏)
130 Multijet
(▼)
180 Multijet
Power (▼)
Unladen weight (with all fluids,
fuel tank filled to 90% and without
optional equipment):
kg
1375÷1410
1425÷1460
1310÷1330
1360÷1380
Payload (*) including the
driver:
kg
2590÷2625
2540÷2575
2670÷2690
2620÷2640
Maximum permitted loads (**)
– front axle:
– rear axle:
– total:
kg
kg
kg
2100
2400
4000
2100
2400
4000
2100
2400
4000
2100
2400
4000
Towable loads
– braked trailer:
– non braked trailer:
kg
kg
2500
750
2500
750
2500
750
2500
750
Maximum load on the ball
joint (braked trailer):
kg
100
100
100
100
(❏) Chassis version
(▼) Special version
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
INDEX
256
(*) If special equipment is fitted (sunroof, tow hitch, etc.) the unladen vehicle weight increases, thus reducing the specified
payload.
(**) Loads not be exceeded. The driver is responsible for arranging goods in the luggage compartment and/or on the load
platform within the maximum permitted loads.
CREW CAB TRUCK WEIGHTS
3300 kg GVW versions
115
Multijet
Unladen weight
(with all fluids,
fuel tank filled to 90%
and without optional
equipment):
130
Multijet
180
Multijet Power
3500/4000 kg GVW versions
115
Multijet
130
Multijet
180
Multijet Power
SAFETY
kg
1950÷2010
1965÷2025
2015÷2075
1950÷2010
1965÷2025
2015÷2075
Payload (*) including the
driver:
kg
1290÷1350
1275÷1335
1225÷1285
1490÷1550
1475÷1535
1425÷1485
Maximum permitted loads (**)
– front axle:
kg
– rear axle:
kg
– total:
kg
1750
1900
3300
1750
1900
3300
1750
1900
3300
2100
2400
3500
2100
2400
3500
2100
2400
3500
Towable loads
– braked trailer:
– non braked trailer:
kg
kg
2000
750
2500
750
2500
750
2500
750
2500
750
2500
750
Maximum load on the ball
joint (braked trailer):
kg
100
100
100
120
120
120
(*)
KNOWING
YOUR CAR
If special equipment is fitted (sunroof, tow hitch, etc.) the unladen vehicle weight increases, thus reducing the specified
payload.
(**) Loads not be exceeded. The driver is responsible for arranging goods in the luggage compartment and/or on the load
platform within the maximum permitted loads.
STARTING
AND
DRIVING
WARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGES
IN AN
EMERGENCY
MAINTENANCE
AND CARE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
INDEX
257
KNOWING
YOUR CAR
SAFETY
STARTING
AND
DRIVING
WARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGES
IN AN
EMERGENCY
MAINTENANCE
AND CARE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
INDEX
258
CREW CAB TRUCK WEIGHTS (MAXI versions)
3500/4000 kg GVW versions
130 Multijet
180 Multijet Power
Unladen weight
(with all fluids, fuel tank filled to
90% and without optional equipment):
kg
2005÷2105
2055÷2155
Payload (*) including the driver:
kg
1395÷1495
1345÷1445
Maximum permitted loads (**)
– front axle:
– rear axle:
– total:
kg
kg
kg
2100
2400
3500
2100
2400
3500
Towable loads
– braked trailer:
– non braked trailer:
kg
kg
2500
750
2500
750
Maximum load on the ball
joint (braked trailer):
kg
120
120
(*)
If special equipment is fitted (sunroof, tow hitch, etc.) the unladen vehicle weight increases, thus reducing the specified
payload.
(**) Loads not be exceeded. The user is responsible for arranging goods in the luggage compartment and/or load platform
within the maximum permitted loads.
COMBI WEIGHTS
3000 kg GVW versions
115 Multijet
130 Multijet
180 Multijet Power
Unladen weight
(with all fluids, fuel tank filled to
90% and without optional equipment):
kg
1935
1950
2000
Payload (*) including the driver:
kg
1065
1050
1000
Maximum permitted loads (**)
– front axle:
– rear axle:
– total:
kg
kg
kg
1600
1650
3000
1600
1650
3000
1600
1650
3000
Towable loads
– braked trailer:
– non braked trailer:
kg
kg
2000
750
2500
750
2500
750
Maximum load on the ball
joint (braked trailer):
kg
100
100
100
(*)
If special equipment is fitted (sunroof, tow hitch, etc.) the unladen vehicle weight increases, thus reducing the specified
payload.
(**) Loads not be exceeded. The driver is responsible for arranging goods in the luggage compartment and/or on the load
platform within the maximum permitted loads.
KNOWING
YOUR CAR
SAFETY
STARTING
AND
DRIVING
WARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGES
IN AN
EMERGENCY
MAINTENANCE
AND CARE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
INDEX
259
KNOWING
YOUR CAR
SAFETY
STARTING
AND
DRIVING
WARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGES
IN AN
EMERGENCY
MAINTENANCE
AND CARE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
INDEX
260
COMBI WEIGHTS
3300 kg GVW versions
3500 kg GVW versions
115
Multijet
130
Multijet
180
Multijet Power
130
Multijet
180
Multijet Power
Unladen weight (with all fluids, fuel tank
filled to 90% and without
optional equipment):
kg
1935÷2045
1950÷2060
2000÷2100
2125
2175
Payload (*) including the driver:
kg
1255÷1365
1240÷1350
1190÷1300
1375
1325
Maximum permitted loads (**)
– front axle:
– rear axle:
– total:
kg
kg
kg
1750
1900
3300
1750
1900
3300
1750
1900
3300
2100
2440
3500
2100
2440
3500
Towable loads
– braked trailer:
– non braked trailer:
kg
kg
2000
750
2500
750
2500
750
2500
750
2500
750
Maximum load on the ball
joint (braked trailer):
kg
100
100
100
100
100
(*) If special equipment is fitted (sunroof, tow hitch, etc.) the unladen vehicle weight increases, thus reducing the specified
payload.
(**) Loads not be exceeded. The driver is responsible for arranging goods in the luggage compartment and/or on the load
platform within the maximum permitted loads.
COMBI WEIGHTS (MAXI versions)
3500 kg GVW versions
130 Multijet
180 Multijet Power
kg
2100
2150
Payload (*) including the driver:
kg
1400
1350
Maximum permitted loads (**)
– front axle:
– rear axle:
– total:
kg
kg
kg
2100
2400
3500
2100
2400
3500
Unladen weight
(with all fluids, fuel tank filled to
90% and without optional equipment):
Towable loads
– braked trailer:
– non braked trailer:
kg
kg
3000
750
3000
750
Maximum load on the ball
joint (braked trailer):
kg
120
120
(*)
If special equipment is fitted (sunroof, tow hitch, etc.) the unladen vehicle weight increases, thus reducing the specified
payload.
(**) Loads not be exceeded. The user is responsible for arranging goods in the luggage compartment and/or load platform
within the maximum permitted loads.
KNOWING
YOUR CAR
SAFETY
STARTING
AND
DRIVING
WARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGES
IN AN
EMERGENCY
MAINTENANCE
AND CARE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
INDEX
261
KNOWING
YOUR CAR
SAFETY
STARTING
AND
DRIVING
WARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGES
IN AN
EMERGENCY
MAINTENANCE
AND CARE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
INDEX
262
PANORAMA WEIGHTS
3000 kg GVW versions
3300 kg GVW versions
115
Multijet
130
Multijet
180
Multijet Power
115
Multijet
130
Multijet
180
Multijet Power
kg
2200
2215
2265
2200÷2285
2215÷2300
2265÷2350
Payload (*) including the
driver:
kg
800
785
735
1015÷1100
1000÷1085
950÷1035
Maximum permitted loads (**)
– front axle:
kg
– rear axle:
kg
– total:
kg
1630
1650
3000
1630
1650
3000
1630
1650
3000
1750
1900
3300
1750
1900
3300
1750
1900
3300
Towable loads
– braked trailer:
– non braked trailer:
kg
kg
2000
750
2500
750
2500
750
2000
750
2500
750
2500
750
Maximum load on the ball
joint (braked trailer):
kg
100
100
100
100
100
100
Unladen weight
(with all fluids,
fuel tank filled to 90%
and without
optional equipment):
(*)
If special equipment is fitted (sunroof, tow hitch, etc.) the unladen vehicle weight increases, thus reducing the specified
payload.
(**) Loads not be exceeded. The user is responsible for arranging goods in the luggage compartment and/or load platform
within the maximum permitted loads.
CAPACITIES
115
Multijet
litres
130
Multijet
litres
150
Multijet
litres
180
Multijet Power
litres
Fuel tank:
including a reserve of:
90 (*)
10/12
90 (*)
10/12
90 (*)
10/12
90 (*)
10/12
Diesel fuel for motor vehicles
(EN 590 standard)
Engine cooling system:
8 (▼)
9.6 (▼)
9.6 (▼)
10 (▼)
Mixture of 50% distilled water
and PARAFLUUP(▲)
Engine sump:
Engine sump and filter:
4.9
5.7
5.3
5.9
2.7 (❏)
8
9
Gearbox casing/
differential:
2.9 (■)
5.3
5.9
2.7 (❏) (❍)
2.9 (■) (●)
Hydraulic brakes
circuit with ABS:
ASR/ESP:
0.6
0.62
0.6
0.62
0.6
0.62
0.6
0.62
Hydraulic power
steering:
1.5
1.5
1.5
1.5
Windscreen washer
fluid reservoir:
with headlamp washers:
5.5
5.5
5.5
5.5
5.5
5.5
5.5
5.5
2.9 (■)
Prescribed fuels
Original products
SELENIA WR P.E.
TUTELA CAR EXPERYA (❏)
TUTELA CAR MATRYX (■)
TUTELA TOP 4
TUTELA CAR GI/E
Mixture of water and
TUTELA
PROFESSIONAL SC 35
(*) It is possible to request a 120 litre capacity tank on all versions (with 12 l reserve).
On „Recreational versions“, a 60 litre capacity tank may be ordered (with 10 l reserve).
(▼) With Webasto: +1/4 liter - Underseat heater 600 cc: +1 liter - Rear heater 900 cc: +1.5 liter
(▲) When the vehicle is used in particularly harsh weather conditions, we recommend using a mixture of 60% PARAFLUUP
and 40% distilled water.
(❍) MLGU gearbox
(●) M38 gearbox
KNOWING
YOUR CAR
SAFETY
STARTING
AND
DRIVING
WARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGES
IN AN
EMERGENCY
MAINTENANCE
AND CARE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
INDEX
263
KNOWING
YOUR CAR
FLUIDS AND LUBRICANTS
SPECIFICATIONS AND RECOMMENDED PRODUCTS
Use
Quality specifications of fluids and lubricants
for correct vehicle operation
Diesel engine
lubricants
SAE 5W-30 grade synthetic base lubricant.
FIAT 9.55535-S1 certification.
SELENIA WR P.E. (▲)
Contractual Technical
Reference No. 510.D07
According to
Scheduled
Servicing Plan
Synthetic base lubricant, SAE 75W-80 grade
that exceeds API GL-4 specifications
TUTELA CAR EXPERYA
Contractual Technical
Reference No. F178.B06
Manual gearbox
and differential
Synthetic base lubricant, SAE 75W-85 grade
that exceeds API GL-4 specifications
TUTELA CAR MATRYX
Contractual Technical
Reference No. F108.F02
TUTELA STAR 500
Manual gearbox
and differential
Lithium-based grease
NI.GI. 0 consistency
TUTELA MRM ZERO
Differential side
constant velocity
joints
Poly-urea synthetic-based grease suitable for
high temperatures. NI.GI. 2 consistency
TUTELA STAR 325
Contractual Technical
Reference No. F301.D03
Differential side
constant velocity
joints
Lubricant for power steering and automatic
transmissions. Exceeds
ATF DEXRON III
TUTELA GI/E
Contractual Technical
Reference No. F001.C94
Hydraulic power
steering
Lubricants
SAFETY
STARTING
AND
DRIVING
WARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGES
IN AN
EMERGENCY
MAINTENANCE
AND CARE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
INDEX
264
Lubricants
and greases
for motion
transmission
Lithium soap grease with molybdenum
disulphide. NI.GI. 2 consistency
Genuine lubricants
and fluids
Replacement
interval
Wheel side
constant velocity
joints
(▲) For diesel engines, in the event of an emergency in which the original products are not available, lubricants with at least ACEA C2
performance are acceptable; however, in this case optimum engine performance is not guaranteed and the lubricants should be replaced
with recommended products as soon as possible at a Fiat Dealership.
The use of products with lower specifications than ACEA C2 could cause damage to the engine not covered by the warranty.
For particularly harsh climate conditions, ask a Fiat Dealership for the appropriate product from PETRONAS LUBRICANTS.
Use
Fluid and lubricant specifications
for correct vehicle operation
Genuine lubricants
and fluids
Brake
fluid
Synthetic fluid, NHTSA n° 116 DOT 4,
ISO 4925 SAE J-1704, CUNA NC 956- 01.
FIAT classification 9.55597
TUTELA TOP 4
Contractual Technical
Reference N° F001.A93
Protective
agent for
radiators
Red protective agent with antifreeze action,
based on inhibited monoethylene glycol with
organic formula. Exceeds CUNA NC 956-16,
ASTM D 3306 specifications.
FIAT classification 9.555323.
PARAFLUUP (*)
Contractual Technical
Reference N° F101.M01
Cooling circuits
percentage of use:
50% water50%
PARAFLUUP (❑)
Additive for diesel antifreeze, protecting diesel
engines
TUTELA DIESEL ART
Contractual Technical
Reference N° F601.L06
To be mixed
with diesel
(25 cc per 10 litres)
Miscela di alcoli e tensioattivi.
Supera la specifica CUNA NC 956-11.
Qualificazione FIAT 9.55522.
TUTELA
PROFESSIONAL SC 35
Contractual Technical
Reference N° F201.D02
To be used neat
or dilute in screen
washer systems
Diesel
additive
Windscreen
washer
fluid (*)
Replacement
interval
Hydraulic brakes
and clutch hydraulic
controls
KNOWING
YOUR CAR
SAFETY
STARTING
AND
DRIVING
WARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGES
IN AN
EMERGENCY
MAINTENANCE
AND CARE
IMPORTANT Do not use fluids with different specifications for topping up or mixing.
(❑) When the vehicle is used under particularly harsh climate conditions, we recommend using a mixture of 60% PARAFLUUP
and 40% demineralised water.
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
INDEX
265
KNOWING
YOUR CAR
SAFETY
STARTING
AND
DRIVING
WARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGES
FUEL CONSUMPTION
The fuel consumption figures given in the table below are determined on the basis of the homologation tests set down by
specific European Directives. The procedures below are followed for measuring consumption:
urban cycle: cold starting followed by driving that simulates urban use of the vehicle; extra-urban cycle: frequent
accelerations in all gears, simulating extra-urban use of the vehicle: speed varies between 0 and 120 km/h;
mixed cycle: is calculated weighing about 37% of urban cycle consumption and about 63% of extra-urban consumption.
IMPORTANT The type of route, traffic situations, weather conditions, driving style, general conditions of the vehicle, trim
level/equipment/accessories, climate control system, vehicle load, roof rack, other situations that affect air drag may lead to
different fuel consumption levels than those measured.
According to the European Directive in force (litres/100 km)
Versions
COMBI
115 Multijet
IN AN
EMERGENCY
MAINTENANCE
AND CARE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
Gross vehicle weight
130 Multijet
150 Multijet
180 Multijet Power
Consumptions
Urban
Extra-urban
Mixed
30q
33q
35q
30q
33q
35q
30q
33q
35q
30q
33q
35q
8.0
8.3
8.3
8.3
8.5
8.5
8.3
8.5
8.5
9.5
10.3
10.7
5.4
5.7
5.7
5.6
5.9
5.9
5.6
5.9
5.9
5.5
6.0
6.4
6.4
6.7
6.7
6.6
6.9
6.9
6.6
6.9
6.9
7.0
7.6
8.0
30q-33q
30q-33q
30q-33q
30q-33q
8.6
8.7
8.7
10.7
6.0
6.1
6.1
6.4
7.0
7.1
7.1
8.0
PANORAMA
INDEX
266
115 Multijet
130 Multijet
150 Multijet
180 Multijet Power
Versions
115 Multijet
130 Multijet
Van CH1/Box truck CH1 MH1 MLH1/
Cab chassis and double cab (*)/
Flatbed cab (*)/Chassis cowl (*)
Van MH1 LH1/box truck LH1/double cab, MH1
Van LH1/Double cab LH1
Van CH1/Box truck CH1 MH1/
Cab chassis and double cab (*)/
Flatbed cab (*)/Chassis cowl (*)
Van CH1 MH1/box truck MH1 MLH1 LH1/
double cab MH1
Van LH1/Double cab LH1, MH1
Box truck CH1/Cab chassis and double cab (*)/
Flatbed cab (*)/Chassis cowl (*)
Van CH1 MH1/box truck MH1 MLH1 LH1
180 Multijet
Van CH1/Box truck MH1 MLH1/
Cab chassis and double cab (*)/
Flatbed cab (*)/Chassis cowl (*)
Cab chassis (*)/Chassis cowl (*)
Van MH1 LH1/box truck LH1/double cab,
MH1 LH1
Van LH1/Box truck LH1/Double cab MH1 LH1
Gross vehicle weight
2800 Light, 3000 Light,
3300 Light, 3500 Light
3000 Light, 3300 Light,
3500 Light
3300 Light, 3500 Light
3000 Light, 3300 Light,
3500 Light
3000 Light, 3300 Light,
3500 Light, 3500 Maxi,
4005, 4250 Maxi
3300 Light, 3500 Light,
3500 Maxi, 4005,
4250 Maxi
3000 Light, 3300 Light,
3500 Light
3000 Light, 3300 Light,
3500 Light
3500 Maxi,
4005, 4250 Maxi
3300 Light, 3500 Light,
3650 Light, 3500 Maxi,
4005, 4250 Maxi
3500 Maxi,
4005, 4250 Maxi
3300 Light, 3500 Light
Consumptions
Urban
Extra-urban
Mixed
8.0
6.1
6.8
8.2
6.3
7.0
8.5
6.5
7.2
8.3
6.4
7.1
8.5
6.4
7.2
8.8
6.6
7.4
9.7
6.5
7.7
10.1
6.7
8.0
10.3
6.8
8.1
10.6
7.0
8.3
10.9
7.0
8.4
11.1
7.1
8.5
KNOWING
YOUR CAR
SAFETY
STARTING
AND
DRIVING
WARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGES
IN AN
EMERGENCY
MAINTENANCE
AND CARE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
INDEX
(*) Such consumption is meant for vehicles before the conversion.
267
KNOWING
YOUR CAR
SAFETY
STARTING
AND
DRIVING
WARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGES
IN AN
EMERGENCY
CO2 EMISSIONS
The CO2 emission levels at the exhaust given in the following tables refer to combined consumption.
According to the European Directive in force (g/km)
Versions
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
INDEX
268
Emissions
30q
33q
35q
30q
33q
35q
30q
33q
35q
30q
33q
35q
166
174
182
173
180
180
173
180
180
184
200
210
30q-33q
30q-33q
30q-33q
30q-33q
182
186
186
210
COMBI
115 Multijet
130 Multijet
150 Multijet
180 Multijet Power
MAINTENANCE
AND CARE
Gross vehicle weight
PANORAMA
115 Multijet
130 Multijet
150 Multijet
180 Multijet Power
Versions
Gross vehicle weight
CO2 Emissions
Mixed
115 Multijet
130 Multijet
Van CH1/Box truck CH1 MH1 MLH1/
Cab chassis and double cab (*)/
Flatbed cab (*)/Chassis cowl (*)
Van MH1 LH1/box truck LH1/double cab, MH1
Van LH1/Double cab LH1
Van CH1/Box truck CH1 MH1/
Cab chassis and double cab (*)/
Flatbed cab (*)/Chassis cowl (*)
Van CH1 MH1/box truck MH1 MLH1 LH1/ double cab
MH1
Van LH1/Double cab LH1, MH1
Box truck CH1/Cab chassis and double cab (*)/ Flatbed
cab (*)/Chassis cowl (*)
Van CH1 MH1/box truck MH1 MLH1 LH1
180 Multijet
Van CH1/Box truck MH1 MLH1/
Cab chassis and double cab (*)/
Flatbed cab (*)/Chassis cowl (*)
Cab chassis (*)/Chassis cowl (*)
Van MH1 LH1/box truck LH1/double cab,
MH1 LH1
Van LH1/Box truck LH1/Double cab MH1 LH1
2800 Light, 3000 Light,
3300 Light, 3500 Light
3000 Light, 3300 Light,
3500 Light
3300 Light, 3500 Light
3000 Light, 3300 Light,
3500 Light
3000 Light, 3300 Light,
3500 Light, 3500 Maxi,
4005, 4250 Maxi
3300 Light, 3500 Light, 3500
Maxi, 4005, 4250 Maxi
3000 Light, 3300 Light,
3500 Light
3000 Light, 3300 Light,
3500 Light
3500 Maxi,
4005, 4250 Maxi
3300 Light, 3500 Light,
3650 Light, 3500 Maxi,
4005, 4250 Maxi
3500 Maxi,
4005, 4250 Maxi
3300 Light, 3500 Light
KNOWING
YOUR CAR
179
SAFETY
185
190
186
189
STARTING
AND
DRIVING
WARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGES
195
203
IN AN
EMERGENCY
209
213
219
222
224
MAINTENANCE
AND CARE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
INDEX
(*) Such consumption is meant for vehicles before the conversion
269
KNOWING
YOUR CAR
SAFETY
STARTING
AND
DRIVING
ARRANGEMENTS FOR DEALING WITH THE VEHICLE AT THE END OF ITS LIFE
Fiat has been committed for many years to safeguarding the environment through the constant improvement of its production
processes and manufacturing products that are increasingly compatible with the ecosystem.
To assure customers of the best possible service in terms of respecting environmental laws and in response to European
Directive 2000/53/EC governing vehicles at the end of their life, Fiat is offering their customers the opportunity of handing
over their vehicle* at the end of its life without incurring any additional costs.
The European Directive sets out that when the vehicle is handed over the last keeper or owner should not incur any expenses
as a result of its market value.
In particular, in almost all European Union countries, until 1st January 2007, vehicles registered after 1st July 2002 will be
collected free of charge, whilst from 2007 collection will be free of charge irrespective of the year of registration as long as the
vehicle contains its basic components (in particular, the engine and bodywork) and has no additional waste.
WARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGES
To hand your vehicle over at the end of its life without extra cost, contact one of our Fiat dealerships or authorised collection
and scrapping centres.
IN AN
EMERGENCY
You can find further information on these collection and scrapping centres either from a Fiat and Fiat Commercial Vehicle
These centres have been carefully chosen to offer high quality service for the collection, treatment and recycling of unused
vehicles with respect to the environment.
Dealership or by calling the freephone number 00800 3428 0000 or on the Fiat website.
MAINTENANCE
AND CARE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
INDEX
* Vehicle for transporting passengers with a maximum of nine seats with a total permitted weight of 3.5 t
270
OFFICIAL TYPE APPROVALS
KNOWING
YOUR CAR
SAFETY
STARTING
AND
DRIVING
WARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGES
IN AN
EMERGENCY
MAINTENANCE
AND CARE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
INDEX
271
KNOWING
YOUR CAR
SAFETY
STARTING
AND
DRIVING
WARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGES
IN AN
EMERGENCY
MAINTENANCE
AND CARE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
INDEX
272
®
In the heart of your engine.
®
Always ask your mechanic for
Oil change? The experts recommend Selenia
The engine of your car is factory filled with Selenia.
This is an engine oil range which satisfies the most advanced
international specifications. Its superior technical characteristics
allow Selenia to guarantee the highest performance
and protection of your engine.
The Selenia range includes a number of technologically advanced products:
SELENIA K PURE ENERGY
Synthetic lubricant designed for latest generation, low
emission, petrol engines. Its specific formulation warrants
the utmost protection also for high performance
turbocharged engines with high thermal stress.
Its low ash content helps to maintain the total cleanliness
of modern catalysts.
SELENIA WR PURE ENERGY
Fully synthetic lubricant that can meet the requirements of
the latest diesel engines. Low ash content to protect the
particulate filter from the residual products of combustion.
High Fuel Economy System that allows
considerable fuel saving.
It reduces the danger of dirtying the turbine to ensure the
protection of increasingly high performance diesel
engines
SELENIA MULTIPOWER
Particularly ideal for the protection of new generation petrol
engines, very effective even in the most severe weather
conditions. It guarantees a reduction in fuel consumption
(Energy conserving) and it is also ideal for alternative
engines.
SELENIA SPORT
Fully synthetic lubricant capable of meeting the needs of
high performance engines.
Studied to protect the engine also in high thermal stress
conditions, it prevents deposits on the turbine to achieve
the utmost performance in total safety.
The range also includes Selenia StAR Pure Energy, Selenia
Racing, Selenia K, Selenia WR, Selenia 20K, Selenia 20K AR.
For further information on Selenia products visit the web site
www.selenia.com.
INDEX
ABS SYSTEM ............................ 108
ABS .............................................. 108
Accessories purchased
by the owner .......................... 121
Additional heater ..................... 60
Additional rear heating ........... 66
Additional independent
heater ....................................... 61
Additional rear air
conditioning ............................ 67
Air filter ..................................... 217
Arm rests.................................... 33
Ashtray........................................ 88
ASR .............................................. 112
Automatic climate control ..... 54
Automatic headlight sensor
(dusk sensor) .......................... 70
Battery
– battery disconnection
function (disconnector) .... 80
– jump starting ....................... 169
– maintenance ........................ 218
– recharging ............................ 202
– replacement ........................ 218
– tips for extending life ........ 219
Body (marking) ......................... 228
Body
– maintenance ........................ 224
– version code ....................... 229
Bonnet ........................................ 104
Brake Assist (emergency
braking assistance) ................. 110
Brakes
– fluid level .............................. 215
– technical specifications ...... 232
Bulb replacement ..................... 181
– bulb types .................... 182-183
– external bulb
replacement ............................ 184
– general information ........... 181
– internal bulb replacement .. 193
KNOWING
YOUR CAR
Cab glove compartment
(Capucine) ............................... 91
Carrying children safely .......... 130
Carrying children safely .......... 130
– “Universal Isofix” child
restraint assembly setup ...... 134
– child seats ............................ 130
– positioning of child seats on
seats .............................. 133-136
Ceiling lights .............................. 76
– bulb replacement ....... 193-194
Central door
locking/unlocking system ..... 96
Chassis (marking) .................... 229
Checking the levels ................. 209
Checking the levels ................. 209
– brake fluid ............................ 215
– brake fluid ............................ 216
– engine coolant .................... 213
– engine oil ............................. 211
SAFETY
STARTING
AND
DRIVING
WARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGES
IN AN
EMERGENCY
MAINTENANCE
AND CARE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
INDEX
275
KNOWING
YOUR CAR
SAFETY
STARTING
AND
DRIVING
WARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGES
IN AN
EMERGENCY
MAINTENANCE
AND CARE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
INDEX
276
– washer fluid for
windscreen/rear
window/headlamps ............ 214
Cigar lighter .............................. 88
Cleaning and maintenance
– bodywork ............................ 223
– engine compartment .......... 225
– front headlights.................... 225
– glasses ................................... 225
– interiors ............................... 225
– leather upholstery ............. 226
– paintwork ............................ 224
– plastic parts .......................... 226
– rubber tubes ....................... 221
– seats and fabric parts ........ 226
– windows................................ 225
CO2 emissions........................... 268
Instrument panel .................... 14
Code card................................... 5
Compartment under front
passenger seat ........................ 86
Compartment under the seat.. 36
Controls .................................... 79
Cruise Control (constant speed
regulation) ............................... 74
Cruise Control (constant speed
regulator) ................................ 74
Cup/can holder ........................ 87
Dashboard ................................
3
Daytime lights
– bulb replacement ............... 186
– control ................................. 68
Dead lock (device) .................. 99
Desk/bookrest........................... 90
Dimensions ............................... 237
Dipped beam headlights
– bulb replacement ............... 186
– control ................................. 68
Dipped headlights
– bulb replacement ............... 186
– control................................... 74
Direction indicators
– bulb replacement ....... 187-189
– control ................................. 69
Direction indicators
– control ................................. 69
– front bulb replacement ..... 187
– rear bulb replacement ...... 189
Door lock .................................. 81
Door pockets ........................... 86
Doors ......................................... 96
DPF (diesel particulate filter).... 124
DPF (diesel particulate filter).... 124
EBD system .............................. 108
Electric windows ...................... 103
Electrical power supply and fuel
cut off switch .......................... 82
Electrical/electronic devices
(installation) ............................ 121
Electronic alarm ....................... 10
Engine codes ............................. 228
Engine compartment
– bonnet opening/closing ..... 104
– checking the levels ............. 209
– washing.................................. 225
Engine coolant fluid
– checking the level ............... 214
– temperature gauge ............ 16
Engine coolant temperature
gauge ........................................ 16
Engine oil gauge......................... 17
Engine oil
– checking the level ............... 211
– engine oil gauge .................. 17
– oil consumption ................. 214
– technical specifications ...... 264
Engine
– bonnet .................................. 104
– identification code ............. 229
– marking ................................ 228
– specifications ....................... 230
Environment (protecting) ...... 124
EOBD system ........................... 115
ESP system ................................ 110
External lights ........................... 68
Fiat CODE system ..................
4
Fix & Go automatic (quick tyre
repair kit) ................................ 176
Flashing the headlights ............ 69
Fluids and lubricants
(quantity and products) 263-264
Fog lights
– alignment ............................. 108
– bulb replacement ............... 188
– control ................................. 79
Follow Me Home (device) ..... 70
Front air bags ............................ 137
Fuel consumption
– engine oil ............................. 212
– fuel ........................................ 266
Fuel flap ...................................... 124
Fuel level gauge ........................ 16
Fuel reserve .............................. 155
Fuel tank cap ............................. 123
Fuel
– consumption ....................... 264
– electricity supply and fuel
cut off switch........................ 82
– fuel cap ................................. 123
– fuel level gauge ................... 16
– saving .................................... 148
Fuses (if a fuse blows) ............. 195
– fuse list ................................. 198
– fuses (if a fuse blows) ........ 195
– general information ........... 195
– location (fuse boxes) ......... 196
– users list ............................... 198
KNOWING
YOUR CAR
SAFETY
Gearbox
– using the manual gearbox ... 146
General warnings...................... 2
Glove compartment ................ 85
STARTING
AND
DRIVING
Handbrake ................................ 145
WARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGES
Handbrake lever ...................... 145
Hazard warning lights ............. 79
Head restraints ........................ 40
Headlight alignment
correction ............................... 107
Headlight washers
– control................................... 73
– maintenance ........................ 223
Headlights .................................. 107
– adjusting headlights
abroad .................................. 108
– beam orientation................. 107
– bulb replacement ............... 184
IN AN
EMERGENCY
MAINTENANCE
AND CARE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
INDEX
277
KNOWING
YOUR CAR
SAFETY
STARTING
AND
DRIVING
WARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGES
IN AN
EMERGENCY
MAINTENANCE
AND CARE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
– headlight alignment
corrector ............................. 107
Headlights (warning
for cleaning) ............................ 225
Heated rear window ............... 80
Heating and ventilation ........... 45
– automatic climate control... 54
– controls ................................ 46
– front window rapid
defrosting/demisting ... 48-51-59
– heated rear window and
external rear view mirrors
defrosting/demisting .... 48-53
– interior air recirculation ... 49
– manual climate control ..... 49
– passenger compartment
air vents ............................... 46
Heavy use of the vehicle
(servicing) ................................ 208
Hill Holder system .................. 111
Identification plates ................. 227
INDEX
278
– body paintwork .................. 228
– identification data ............... 227
Ignition switch .......................... 12
– steering lock ........................ 13
In an emergency ....................... 169
Installation of electrical/
electronic devices .................. 121
Installing the tow hook ........... 151
– assembly diagrams....... 153-154
Interior fittings ......................... 84
Interiors (maintenance) .......... 225
“Isofix” child seat ..................... 134
Keys ...........................................
– Code card ...........................
– key with remote control ..
– key without remote
control .................................
– replacing the battery .........
Knowing your car ....................
5
5
6
8
8
3
Light clusters
– front (bulb replacement) .. 184
– rear (bulb replacement) ... 189
Load (warnings) ....................... 147
Load advice ................................ 147
Load compartment button .... 108
Load limiters ............................. 127
Lubricants (quantity and
products) ......................... 263-264
Main beam headlights
– bulb replacement ............... 185
– control ................................. 68
Main beam headlights
– bulb replacement ............... 185
– control ................................. 68
– flashing the headlights ....... 69
Maintenance and care ............. 205
– regular checks ..................... 208
– Scheduled servicing ........... 205
– Scheduled Servicing
Plan ................................... 206-207
–Heavy use of the vehicle .... 208
Manual climate control ........... 49
Moving platform........................ 101
MSR (system) ............................ 112
MSR system................................ 112
Multifunction display ............... 18
Number plate lights (bulb
replacement) .......................... 192
Official type approval for radio
frequency remote control .... 271
On-board instruments
(panel) .............................. 14-15
– engine coolant
temperature gauge ............. 16
– engine oil gauge .................. 17
– fuel level gauge..................... 16
– multifunction display ......... 18
– rev counter ......................... 15
– speedometer........................ 15
– trip computer ..................... 29
Paintwork
– identification plate ............. 228
– maintenance ........................ 224
Bodywork version ................. 229
Parking lights
– control ......................... 69-80
Parking sensors ........................ 116
Passenger compartment
air vents ................................... 46
Performance ............................. 240
Pollen filter ................................ 217
Portable navigator socket ....... 91
Power socket ........................... 89
Preparation for “Isofix”
child seat ................................. 134
Pretensioners............................. 127
Protecting
the environment ..................... 124
Quick tyre repair kit
“Fix & Go automatic” ........... 176
Radio .......................................... 119
Radio frequency
remote control:
official type approval ............. 269
Radio transmitters and mobile
phones ..................................... 121
Rain sensor ............................... 73
Raising the vehicle ................... 203
Rear double swing door ......... 101
Rear fog light
– bulb replacement ....... 189-191
– control ................................. 80
Rear partition ........................... 87
Rear view mirrors .................... 42
– defrosting/demisting .......... 44
– electric adjustment ............ 42
– external ................................ 42
– interior ................................. 42
Refrigerated compartment .... 84
– Speed block .......................... 96
Refuelling (quantity
and products) ................. 263-264
Refuelling the vehicle .............. 122
Rev counter .............................. 15
Reversing lights (bulb
replacement) .......................... 189
Rim Protector (tyres) .............. 234
Rims
– reading rim markings ......... 235
Roof lights
– bulb replacement ....... 193-194
– control ................................. 76
KNOWING
YOUR CAR
SAFETY
STARTING
AND
DRIVING
WARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGES
IN AN
EMERGENCY
MAINTENANCE
AND CARE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
INDEX
279
KNOWING
YOUR CAR
Roof rack ................................... 106
Rubber tubes (servicing) ........ 221
Safety ......................................... 125
SAFETY
STARTING
AND
DRIVING
WARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGES
IN AN
EMERGENCY
MAINTENANCE
AND CARE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
INDEX
280
– “Isofix” child seat ............... 134
– carrying children safely ..... 130
– seat belts .............................. 125
Saving fuel (warning light) ...... 162
S.B.R. system ............................. 126
Scheduled servicing plan... 204-206
Scrappage (prescriptions
for handling the vehicle
at the end of its life) .............. 268
Seat belts .................................... 125
– general warnings ................ 128
– load limiters ........................ 127
– maintenance ........................ 129
– pretensioners....................... 127
Seats (positioning of child seats
on seats) .......................... 133-136
Seats
– adjustment ................... 31-32
– arm rests............................... 33
– base plastic cover ............... 37
– cleaning ................................ 226
– Combi versions .................. 38
– flap on bench ...................... 36
– headrests ............................. 40
– heating .................................. 35
– Panorama versions ............ 37
– revolving base ............. 33-34
– under-seat compartment... 36
Shelf above the cab ................. 90
Side bags .................................... 139
Side lights
– control ................................. 68
– front bulb replacement ..... 185
– rear bulb replacement ...... 189
– side bulb replacement ....... 193
Ski rack........................................ 106
Sliding side door........................ 100
Sliding side window .................. 100
Snow chains .............................. 155
Speedometer ............................. 15
Starting the engine ................... 143
– bump starting ...................... 170
– emergency starting ............ 169
– ignition switch ..................... 12
– jump starting ....................... 169
– procedure ............................ 143
– stopping the engine ........... 144
– warming up the engine
once started ........................ 144
Starting up and driving ............ 143
Steering lock .............................. 13
Steering wheel (adjustment) .. 41
Steering
– technical specifications ...... 232
– turning circle ........................ 232
Storage compartments ... 84-85
Sun visors .................................. 89
Supply (specifications) ............. 231
Suspension (specifications) .... 231
Symbols ...................................... 4
Tachograph .............................. 105
Technical specifications .......... 227
Telepass (preparation) ............ 122
Third brake light ...................... 192
Top speeds ................................ 240
Towing the vehicle .................. 203
Traction Plus system ............... 114
Trailer (towing) ........................ 150
– installing the tow hook ..... 151
– warnings ............................... 151
Trailers (towing) ...................... 150
Transmission (specifications) ... 231
Trip computer .......................... 29
TV camera system and rear
visibility display ....................... 92
Tyre inflation pressure ........... 236
Tyres
– changing a wheel ................ 170
– maintenance ........................ 220
– provided ............................... 235
– reading tyre markings ....... 233
– Rim Protector .................... 234
– snow ..................................... 155
– tyre inflation pressure ....... 236
Vehicle identification data ..... 227
Vehicle inactivity ....................... 154
Vehicle inactivity ....................... 156
Ventilation ................................. 45
Warning lights
and messages .......................... 157
Weights ..................................... 241
– chassis cab ........................... 251
– chassis cab with
platform ............................... 247
– chassis cowl ......................... 255
– combi .................................... 259
– crew cab .............................. 257
– lorry ...................................... 243
– Panorama ............................. 262
– van ......................................... 241
Wheel (change) ........................ 170
Wheel geometry....................... 233
Wheels and tyres (servicing) . 220
– specifications ....................... 233
– wheel geometry ................. 233
When parked ........................... 145
When parked ........................... 145
Window cleaning ..................... 225
Window cleaning ..................... 71
Window cleaning ..................... 71
Windscreen washer
– control ................................. 71
– fluid level .............................. 214
Windscreen wiper blades ...... 222
Windscreen wipers
– blades .................................... 222
– control ................................. 71
– nozzles .................................. 222
– rain sensor ........................... 73
– Traction Plus........................ 114
KNOWING
YOUR CAR
SAFETY
STARTING
AND
DRIVING
WARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGES
IN AN
EMERGENCY
MAINTENANCE
AND CARE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
INDEX
281
Fiat Group Automobiles S.p.A. – Parts & Services – Technical Services – Service Engineering
Largo Senatore G. Agnelli, 5 – 10040 Volvera – Torino (italia)
Print no. 603.81.947 – 05/2011 – 1 Edition
ENGLISH
The data contained in this publication is intended merely as a guide. FIAT reserves the right to modify the models and
versions described in this booklet at any time for technical and commercial reasons.
If you have any further questions please consult your FIAT dealer.
Printed in recycled paper without chlorine.